Home

PARTNER Advanced Communications System

1. Follow these steps to label the line and extension jacks 1 Label the line jacks on the processor module beginning with 1 at the top line jack 2 Doone ofthe following a Fora 2 slot carrier label the line jacks on the other module b Fora 5 slot carrier label the line jacks on the other modules by starting with the leftmost module and ending with the rightmost module NOTES The T1 module is assigned 16 lines even though it has only one line jack If you have a T1 module in a 5 slot carrier label the line jacks on the module after the T1 module to begin with 22 m The 1600 DSL module is assigned 16 lines even though it has only one line jack If you have a 1600 DSL module in a 5 slot carrier label the line jacks on the module after the 1600 DSL module to begin with 22 3 Label the extension jacks on the processor module beginning with 10 at the topmost extension jack 4 Doone ofthe following a For a 2 slot carrier label the extension jacks on the other module b Fora 5 slot carrier label the extension jacks on the other modules by starting with the leftmost module and ending with the rightmost module Installing the Control Unit 2 10 Installation Grounding the System You ground the system by running a solid copper wire from the processor module to
2. DH oo DH oo DE Night Sve LNR SNR VM Msgs VM Box Grp Fage Ext 23 Ext 24 Ext 2b Ext 26 Ext 27 Ext 28 Ext 17 Ext 18 Ext 19 Ext 20 Ext 21 Ext 22 Ext 11 Ext 12 Ext 15 Ext 14 Ext 15 Ext 16 Line7 Line amp MS Bill Fax 30 Sales Lust Support Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Also the operator can use an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the operator dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the telephone free for more features and telephone numbers Programming an Operator s Extension 7 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Automatic System Answer Features The Automatic System Answer features help the system operator handle outside calls during peak calling periods When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Automatic System Answer the system answers it after a specified number of rings and plays a short user recorded greeting to the caller Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system does one of the following m Places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensi
3. Audio Source optional Music On Hold 9 32 Using Auxiliary Equipment Music On Hold 602 Use this feature to activate or deactivate the Music On Hold jack on the processor module The jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack to provide recorded music or messages to callers on hold Considerations m If Music On Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence m The audio source must be connected to the control unit by using an RCA phono plug The Music On Hold input jack accepts a maximum input of 2 Volts at 50 Kohms m Ifthe audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly turn it off by changing the Music On Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem m You can adjust the volume of Music On Hold using Music On Hold Volume 614 m If Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active and Music On Hold is Active transferred callers hear Music On Hold until the call is answered m f Music On Hold is Active users with system telephones with speakers can play Background Music through their telephones speakers m f Automatic System Answer is on callers hear Music On Hold while waiting for someone to answer the call m f Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the settings for Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer 119 m If the operator
4. You have several options at the Name Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Name Display of the previous log record m Press the Dial button to dial the telephone number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the Call Status display At the Call Status display shown in Figure 8 4 you see the following information m At the left of the display you see the date and time of the call and either am or pm to indicate whether the call arrived in the morning or afternoon m The entry in the next column indicates the line that the call came in on Caller ID Features 8 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use The next entry a vertical handset symbol indicates whether the call was answered at the extension If the call was not answered this column is blank In the next column indicates that a user attempted to use automatic dialing to return the call If no callback was attempted the column is blank Figure 8 4 Call Status Display 11 28 10 37am 101 Next Pere M Erase More You have several options at this display Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed Press the Prev butto
5. ETETEIVOYAETNIWIT 8 4 7 UNN If you are replacing a module with one of a different type make sure that all 400 or 200 modules are installed to the right of all 012E 308EC or 206 modules and that the processor module remains in the center slot If you have a T1 module or a 1600 DSL module it must be in the first slot on the left of the carrier NOTED PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports Endeavor telephones when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier Install the Endeavor 362EC module s to the right of the T1 module or 1600 DSL module if one is installed and to the left of any 400 and 200 module To insert the replacement once the module is properly seated firmly push the center of the module until the connectors on the module lock into place and the module is attached to the rear of the carrier For proper engagement of the connectors the module must be inserted straight into the carrier see Figure 10 12 A slight click indicates the connectors are engaged Replacing Modules 10 14 Upgrading the System Figure 10 12 Proper Insertion of the Module 10 Tf 12 13 14 15 16 17 Cd A CAUTION Do not force the module Use the carrier shelf as a reference and do not tilt slant or rotate the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it Connect the line and extension cords o
6. Parada pai MES at A ee 4 55 Eus AAA A bases hdd eG Seuss T LTNEUTTT 4 55 Remote Administration Password 730 TS escri BS e MM LER ORR ESI EAS HOGER LS 4 56 PROGRAMMING eseexaesisenss NS gd ddp d bid pud ET 4 56 Remote Call Forwarding RISE Lise oues ashes E rm rider 4 57 FE gp cie MINUM A ER yee eee PT 4 57 a Progamm cds ads dior dd tedud c 54d 4 57 Hing en DEEP DT TID 3 cq ead OR REE DOA AE RARA RC e e i0 4 58 E AAA II ex eduda e pu nkon re ini 4 58 a Progamming cocos dd see re 4 58 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 ueasesxerewete xq exe vtesxeetbbexepecxaes ka c eO a Considerations ipickcucd pewates ipis 3d ped ads HEP Erh Rd dd 2 4 58 E o au 3 coded dor ei CREAN E ORS Jp Ded E RR epe de leo 4 59 Star Code Dial A A 4 59 Et A 4 60 a Progamming AAA TTE TT T STI bie o 461 System Password 403 ooooooooooo bid Ra ed socias 4 61 Etoo AA rH TN 4 61 a Proga AAA TIT TT 4 62 System Reset Programming Saved 728 ea 4 62 ES OUI cri did 4 62 4 Programming isses sa Mm E 463 E A 4 63 a C nsiderationS eno usd CT T T TTL T TT TI 4 63 a Programming ERC LESA pad no 464 Toll Gall Prefix 402 siria ra A de 4 65 s CONAM cocidas a o cree it 4 65 o cn AAA PS 4 65 Transier Return Programming aa sc sce e RC Air 4 65 a Transfer Return Extension 306 DEAR DARE o 4 66 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Pr
7. TS sax AM a Using Wake Up DEPRESI N 7 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Operator Features Overview A typical setup of the PARTNER ACS includes using extension 10 as the system operator position The person at extension 10 thus becomes the primary operator for calls coming into the system Certain system features are used only by the system operator these are explained in this chapter Programming an Operator s Extension One of the initial programming duties in programming extensions is to set up operator extensions To set up an operator s extension you must program call handling options backup answering options and buttons used for specific operator features Call Handling Options If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it Call Answering If the operator should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Set Line Ringing for all lines at extension 10 to the desired number of Rings set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring In Hybrid mode Immediate Call Answering is the factory setting Lines are assigned as individual line buttons on the telephone at extension 10 and all pool buttons assigned to users extensions are set to No Ring Backup Call Answering If the operator should
8. m To restrict another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Programming 4 51 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Pool Extension Assignment 314 Use this feature to identify the pools that are assigned to buttons at a pooled extension The System uses two buttons to represent the main pool 880 and one for each auxiliary pool 881 882 883 You can assign up to five pool buttons per extension Considerations You cannot assign pool buttons to extension 10 or to any key extension The main pool buttons are always assigned to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of a system telephone You cannot use Select Button Setting 3 for the main pool 880 If you select Not Assigned Setting 2 for the main pool 880 during Pool Extension Assignment programming the main pool is removed from the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of the system telephone at that extension The buttons are then available for programming lines auxiliary pools or system features If the main pool is ever reassigned to that extension previous programming is erased Auxiliary pool buttons are located next to the main pool buttons unless you select Setting 3 to choose a button location when programming You can assign up to four pools to a single line telephone but a single line telephone can make only one
9. Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system NOTE If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Using Loudspeaker Paging on a Single Line Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system 1 Liftthe handset to hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial MO 3 Speakinto the handset Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system NOTE For touch tone telephones only if your Loudspeaker Paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Paging Features 8 50 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Simultaneous Paging 1 70 Use this feature to access the Loudspeaker Paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module and all of the idle system telephones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Considerations m You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system telephone to access with one touch the Loudspeaker Paging system and idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 m If the Loudspeaker Paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m f someone answers a loudspeaker page from a system telephone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call
10. m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Night Service Group Extensions 504 Use this feature to assign extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Any extensions that would normally ring during the day also ring Considerations Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline telephones or doorphones in the Night Service Group A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s telephone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service Group can vary from one extension to another If you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 4406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers without entering the System Password Groups of Extensions 4 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s telephones in the Night Service Group are covered by
11. 5 0 GC at extension 10 or 11 Select Day or Night mode by entering or 2 respectively the factory setting is 1 Day Enter the line number The current setting is displayed 4 Toset VMS Hunt Delay press until the appropriate value for the number of rings appears 0 6 2 is the factory setting 5 To set VMS Hunt Delay for another line press Next item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Use this feature to determine whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant service of the voice messaging system You can program VMS Hunt Schedule on a per line basis Voice Messaging Systems 9 47 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 m If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service Button for extension 10 m When the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only and Night Service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on line
12. The ringing call is sent immediately to the covering extension subsequent calls go to the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If Call Coverage is turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the covering extension until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system If VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If VMS Cover is already turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send covered calls immediately to coverage when Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on press Do Not Disturb All calls go to the covering extension If there is no answer the calls go to your voice mailbox Speed Dialing Features You can quickly dial numbers from your telephone by using one of these features Personal Speed Dial System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Use this feature to store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the two digit code from 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers pro
13. V VMS see Voice Messaging Systems 9 44 VMS Cover 8 72 light patterns 6 7 using 8 73 VMS Cover Rings 3 16 9 46 VMS Cover Rings 117 9 46 VMS Hunt Delay 9 47 VMS Hunt Schedule 9 47 Voice Gateway Configuration 2 29 Voice Interrupt features 8 73 Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 68 8 73 responding 8 75 using 8 74 Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 4 68 Voice Interrupt on Busy Call description 4 68 6 7 8 73 responding toa 8 75 Index Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls 6 9 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back 8 75 using 8 75 Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back light patterns 6 7 voice mailbox sending all calls to 8 63 Voice Mailbox Transfer 8 76 using 8 76 Voice messaging systems 9 44 voice messaging systems 1 13 8 18 9 44 Automated Attendant hours of operation 9 47 Call Screening 9 48 calls answered by Auto Attendant 9 47 listening to a caller leaving a message 9 48 programming VMS Cover Rings 9 46 VMS Hunt Delay 9 47 VMS Hunt Schedule 9 47 voicemail coverage turning on and off 8 72 Voice signaling 6 7 6 8 8 39 8 42 Volume Controls 6 3 W Wake Up Service using 7 21 Wake Up Service Button 7 20 Wake Up Service Button 115 7 20 wall mounting 2 4 2 8 2 slot carrier 2 5 stand alone processor module 2 5 wall mounting a telephone 2 37 Wildcard Character 4 34 wiring requirements 2 3 with direct connection 9 3 IN 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programm
14. m Memory Error m Insert Valid Card m SystemBusy If there is no problem press Enter to begin the backup Backup and Restore 4 6 Programming System Options 4 Press Enter A status message is displayed indicating that a backup is in progress and within 30 seconds a message appears indicating the result If the backup was successful the new backup information replaces the information in the MAN mmddyy file on the processor module or Backup Restore PC Card and the mmddyy extension now reflects the current date Backup information on one media type PC Card or internal flash memory is not impacted when you save to the other media type If the backup failed you see one of the following error messages see Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions m Backup Failed Check Card m Backup Failed SystemBusy 5 Exit programming mode NOTED If you exit the procedure before the backup finishes you do not interrupt the backup but you do not see feedback messages on the display Restore Programming 125 Use this feature to reinstate your system and telephone programming except the System Date and System Time to the settings saved on the processor module or a PC Card at the last system backup manual or automatic You should restore the system settings if your system settings become corrupted if you make changes and decide you would rather use the former settings or if you replace your pr
15. 02 002 eee 4 23 a Line Access Restriction 302 0 00 ee 4 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Lamm mam t a a E m eee t a Outgoing Call Restriction 401 iussus ha ssa ssp yeh rk 3kRRRA KE 4 25 Dial Mode loop irritada dd eb 4 26 o AMA E TCU DR EI 4 26 ek ils pd 12 107 215 21151 215 er 10 NAAA 4 26 wl cR pit amine Prem 4 27 ber is i o AAA O Tes 4 27 s PEDESTRI od ciate ba dete pK Cod pi PEDEM SEP essen e 4 29 Display Language CP asd e o PERIERE des ER ACD OR YR Jo Ql E RE OA 4 29 DOnSIOSRHIODS eisksus bed dad aq ti PLeAedderesrqibd db PETION dda dd 4 29 Ec GIU TESTIS ISl 51275 1 ARA a ARA RES OD 4 29 ea id Fe cece keel ke eR EH RE SPERA eed oq ees 4 30 a TDI RI iio escenas d EU ete kee d Ie A 4 30 Exemal Aoine ASIA EE AAA soe EO RID cl 4 31 EN acc oru AAA UII UP 4 32 Forced Account Codes escoria cir iaa pipas TEE 4 33 a Forced Account Cade Entry 307 25 ccascedserescid VERRE E PEE SERA cas 4 33 Forced Account Code List 409 iiiuss oou sus WsupRRARR RERXAREARASAE 4 34 Groups of EWN Pc PL 4 35 a Calling Group Extensions 502 2 5 2 ccceceee neta ssceaeseenases 4 35 a Aunt Group Extensions 905 cs ar A AA AR 4 36 a Group Call Distribution S206 secessu dese rr Rm ERI RR ERA 4 38 a Night Service Group Extensions 504 0 000 eee eee ee 4 39 a PCRS Group Extensions 501 ess tscrsebes 000086 00000640804005 4 40 Hold Disconnect Time 203 2 22 cccee
16. 6 10 Using the Telephones Ringing Patterns Single line telephones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m An intercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring m A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring NOTED If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to telephones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones Single line telephones have two different dial tones m Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the telephone is set to select intercom first as recommended is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press 9 Using the Switchhook Some of the instructions in this guide direct you to rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing and releasing the switchhook for 1 2 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash or Recall However do not press and release the switchhook too quickly If you press a
17. Click the OK button The translation file now resides on the Remote Access card in the PARTNER system This translation file will not be used by the PARTNER system until you restore it to the PARTNER system From the Administration menu select Restore System Translations A message box appears stating that the restore has started and that your connection to the PARTNER system will be disconnected Click the OK button A message box appears stating that your connection to the PARTNER system was ended Click the OK button The PARTNER system is now using the system translation you programmed and restored The T1 Module 2 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use The 1600 DSL Module The 1600 DSL module provides 16 lines even though it contains only one line jack The 1600 DSL module provides Symmetrical Digital Subscriber Line SDSL and router capabilities Figure 2 22 1600 DSL Module Ports Besides the RJ 45 port used to connect the central office line to the 1600 DSL module three other ports exist on the module see Figure 2 22 m A10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 port used to connect a LAN to the 1600 DSL module After 1600 DSL Module the initial module configuration has been done you can also program the 1600 DSL module Power LED over a LAN connected to this port m A Console serial port used for configuring the 1600 DSL module locally using a PC m AV 35port used to con
18. Considerations The call timer records the total time an outside call is in progress in the PARTNER system including the time a call is placed on hold It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle or the Speakerphone is turned on and ends when the handset is placed back in the cradle or the Speakerphone is turned off For outgoing T1 calls the call timer restarts when the call is answered if the T1 service provider provides answer supervision The call timer is displayed along with the factory set display Most messages other than the factory set display and Caller ID are displayed for approximately 15 seconds The number you dial will remain on the display until you perform another action that displays information such as transferring a call Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not appear when they are dialed Adjust the display contrast by pressing x and then using the up volume control button to increase the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle You can adjust the angle of the display to three positions low medium and high The System Date 101 and System Time 103 settings appear as the factory set display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display telephone Users can assign a name to his or her extensi
19. Figure 6 2 shows the PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 telephones System Telephones 6 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure 6 2 PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 Telephones PARTNER 6 ea Line Programmable 313 Buttons 4 2 ai Intercom Buttons 2 d A I pao a d HER Feat Spkr 3 al o f Q Conf Me E e HFAI ti Q 0 Transfr Hold PARTNER 18D Mur n a e A PARTNER 18 Display Programmable Buttons cj c3 c4 cd 4 without lights d Eri Bici Sec Bir d fo Bez gem Beca a Scy i Sec a Line Programmable Buttons al Scy gri Sca gcc d Ecc Bem Sem fees 16 with lights al i a fa el fa 9 8L 20 BO E zi 8L 83 O 36 j ll Intercom Buttons 2 iee g Dr Dr g or Dr al al Ext message i al al Ext Message mmm Message Light AE em O 6 6 gr 77 G Fe 00 G l MO NI Y I 6 Feature c TAAA 1 iO E MU ND E i Ines e 0 6 1 gt Conf NAE E 4 l gt LL 5 IN ae ifs qoe M Mic Mm A e cam HFAI Transfr q z tc Den l Lf Sy P So spe Hod ur sl t Ses y Ifthe PARTNER telepho
20. In the Voice Mail System VMS area choose whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system This setting is not used for T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing If the PARTNER system is operating in Hybrid pooled mode choose the pool to which this line will be assigned This setting is available only when the PARTNER system is operating in Hybrid Pooled mode From the Assign Line for DID Operation box choose whether Direct Inward Dialing is administered for this line by your T1 Service Provider From the Incoming Seizure Type box choose the type of incoming signaling for this line From the Outgoing Seizure Type box choose the type of outgoing signaling for this line From the Supply Local Dial Tone box choose whether the PARTNER system should provide dial tone when PARTNER users go offhook From the Incoming Answer Supervision Time msec box choose the incoming answer supervision time for the line Repeat Steps b through o for each T1 line you are using If you will be using the Direct Inward Dialing DID feature from the T1 service provider configure the DID Mapping Table To map DID lines to extensions hunt groups and calling groups In the PARTNER ACS System window double click on
21. Using Centralized Telephone Programming 3 8 Initial System Programming 6 Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned show the current Line Ringing settings The remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 7 Atthis point program the features that must use Centralized Telephone Programming 8 To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number 9 To exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 0 or lift the handset and place it back in the cradle Configuring the T1 Module To configure a T1 module you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software You cannot program or view the administration of a T1 module via System Programming from extensions 10 or 11 For instructions on how to install the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software on a PC see the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Getting Started Configuring a T1 module consists of the following steps 1 Start PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Connect to the PARTNER system Back up and retrieve the translations from the PARTNER system Save this file as a new file Verify that the PARTNER system has a T1 module Configure the settings for the T1 module Administer the settings for each line channel you will use on the T1 module o N DONA
22. Using Recorda An EORR SUP dee S ERIS 8 57 Redialing FERUTER 6251404445508 qa OE Pre d poo dd 8 57 a Last Number Redial FOS isc ka dece x dra ia 8 57 a Save Number Redial F04 iiiisesden e rre 8 59 Remote Call Forwarding F11 ua cs sedes Eos ch eR CR FOR SRE e CER EE Es 8 60 Etoo AAA Bases E T E seateeteuses ee 8 60 sc AAA 8 61 a Using Remote Call Forwarding on a System Telephone 8 62 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use ELLA cac A ELLE eee 8 iv Using Remote Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone 8 63 E po tee neat erase cus rrr Cr 8 63 Using Send o AA E Ede Rec PerErer B e aces Iva ipta 8 64 Speed Dialing Features eres Sabi d Werk edes ded x Rd Deresi 8 64 lt Personal Speed Dial i edisi aaeeeiai iaa dae 8 64 Sn Speed Dial AAA e er E RIVE IM eene onn re aE 8 67 Station Lock F21 yeas P DAA EA ARE 8 68 ua CORSO cs dde Ead ERRADA AEREA AAA 8 68 eo ls 3 vua deed P d ERE EY ee CERES ES EETA ESAE Rd EXE 8 68 Using Station Lock on a System Telephone oooococccoooco ooo 8 69 Using Station Lock on a Single Line Telephone oo oocoooocoooo 8 69 a nn 8 70 a ARNG ira RIA AAA ERAS 8 70 a Using System Password Pv Aria 8 70 TODO Tone Enable PU erro A AA 8 71 tio AA O ak dreni CEE EEREN EE hace 8 71 a PO AAA ar a ea a e 8 71 a Using Touch Tone Enable oce deu picar E E ERES 8 71 VMS Cover
23. You can include star codes in Allowed Phone Number Lists and Disallowed Phone Number Lists Star Code Dial Delay settings apply to Auto Dialing Last Number Redial Personal Speed Dial numbers Save Number Redial and System Speed Dial numbers If Dial Mode 201 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone System Speed Dial numbers can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press ora X 6 Z 2 6 6 C 0 0 1 A Marked System Speed Dial number can also begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press Q9 G9 6 7 6 5 5 D 0 0 1 Star Code Dial Delay 410 4 60 Programming System Options Programming To change the Star Code Dial Delay setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 Sy
24. m f some extensions in Calling Group 1 have single line MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephones those extensions are not included in the simultaneous page because they do not have built in speakers m Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the Loudspeaker Paging system m You must administer a Loudspeaker Paging Line via Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 If you do not administer Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 calls to 170 and 1 70 will receive intercept tone Programming To program a Simultaneous Paging button 1 Press Feature O 0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press left Intercom 7 0 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Simultaneous Paging on a System Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system and the idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Press the programmed button or intercom X 7 0 then lift the handset 2 Speakinto the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Paging Features 8 51 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system and the speakers of all idle System telephones in Calling Group 1 NOTED If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Using Simultaneous Paging
25. m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this current procedure m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset Automatic System Answer Features 7 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Direct Extension Dial Features Direct Extension Dial answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized message This message prompts the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension Hunt Group or Calling Group The Direct Extension Dial features that you must program are m Direct Extension Dial Lines m Direct Extension Dial Button m Direct Extension Dial Delay m Direct Extension Dial Record Playback Considerations m The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately m Use the Direct Extension Dial Record Playback feature to record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no factory set message This message can prompt callers to dial an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number after the system answers an outside call m Direct Extension Dial features are unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Use this feature to identify the lines on which incoming calls are to be answered for Direct Extension Dial Considerations Assign all lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial to extension 10 or its transfer return extension If a
26. 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Programming By the factory setting transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered However you can program the transferred call to return to another extension And you also can program the number of times a transferred call rings before it returns to an extension Program the following features for Transfer Return m Transfer Return Extension m Transfer Return Rings Toll Call Prefix 402 4 65 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Transfer Return Extension 306 Use this feature to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call Considerations An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the extension receiving the call Do not designate an extension associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller AA Extensions 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with auto attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 505 is used to identify the extensions associated with voice messaging system hardwa
27. DID service 1 To receive Caller ID information you must first subscribe to the service from your local telephone company if available on a per line basis Then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the module Any users with system display telephones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID information Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E 206EC and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E 400EC and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Any 200 modules can be used System Components 1 10 Overview System Batteries The system uses two user replaceable AAA size standard alkaline batteries in the processor module to ensure that system programming telephone programming and time of day clock settings are not lost in case of a power failure PC Card Slots The processor module has two PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association interface slots hereafter referred to as PC Card slots You can buy PC Cards to use in these slots for the following purposes Use a Backup and Restore PC Card to backup or restore telephone and system programming Use a PC Upgrade card After powering down the system you insert the PC Upgrade Card and turn the power back on While the system upgrades the bicolor red green power LED on the processor flas
28. F15 ccssisavces es KESERI EA arias bevessawens sasa 8 72 ON 25 hu cre eb 4 RS OLE EEE ES RHE ER CIE o Re lo 8 72 a PEDES A A welee cheese que 8 72 UNO TIAS re sas QE ded aus 8 73 Vole Interupi FORBES sorori dase ECC UL AE eerie OA RC Ae ieee RR EROR 8 73 a Voice Interrupt Ori BUSY iaasakus Aid Arar AAA 8 73 a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 oooocooccoonomomoo 8 75 Voice Malbox Transiter FI coe rca 8 76 eode MIR tl 23 3 eed pod E HE EROR Eae d dies 8 76 a Prodam ERE EET TTE LT T TII M TTC 8 76 a Using Voice Mailbox Transfer TT BT OTT NE 8 76 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Overview You can program many of the system s features right from your telephone When you program a feature from your telephone you are using Extension Programming The features discussed in this chapter are features often programmed by individual users However they can be programmed by the System Administrator as well from a system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Some of the features only show the instructions for using the feature because the feature usually is programmed by the System Administrator Extension Programming Extension Programming is the programming that you perform at your own telephone not at the telephone at extension 10 or 11 To program at an extension use the following procedure 1 To start programming dial Feature O O The green lights next to buttons on which lines or po
29. Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Use this feature to ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups G represents a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging you hear a beep and can begin speaking Your voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system telephones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing pk or by pressing Mic HFA to answer a page is connected to the caller You can group page employees for general announcements this is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system telephones with built in speakers where you want employees to hear announcements Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group m f some extensions in a Calling Group have single line MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephones those extensions are not signaled for voice paged calls to the group because they do not have built in speakers m If no members of a Calling Group are on hook idle a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone External Hotline 8 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m If you leave the microphone on for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that telephone receives a group page you must lift the handset or press Mic HFAN to answer the page m Calls can be tra
30. If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m f you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension Lift the handset to reconnect to the caller m To make a voice signaled transfer to a system telephone in Step 2 of the procedure above press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up Handling Calls 6 28 Using the Telephones f you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the tr
31. If using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops calls shorten the time Programming To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 1 O 7 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 18 450 msec 2 Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing Next Data or Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press until a display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 30 750 msec You also can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall Timer to 750 msec press 3 0 Recall Timer settings run from 01 to 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec is the factory setting 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Ifyou are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m If acall is disconnected shorten the time m If the Recall signal has no effect lengthen the time Recall Timer Duration 107 4 55 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Remote Administration Password 730 Use this feature to create a password for remote or local PC administration of the system To perform remote administration the remote party must ha
32. Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press HOO 3 Dial your extension number twice Call Park Use this feature to park a call or place it on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any telephone in the system Considerations Call Park typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because users can retrieve calls without knowing which line the call is on You should park only one call at a time from your extension to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up the parked call Call Park is useful for single line telephone users because they can retrieve a parked call without knowing which line the call is on Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls If you frequently park calls and you have a system telephone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing the button See Auto Dialing on page 8 5 Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting Call Coverage Call Forwarding Cell Phone Connect Remote Call Forwarding or VMS Cover Using Call Park on a System Telephone To park a call 1 While on a call press and dial your two digit extension number or press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension 2 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you used an Auto Dial button the green light next to the button flutters Call Park 8 14 Progr
33. Outside Conference Denial 109 siena tia is 4 49 POOL uies f A 4 50 Recall Timer Duration 2p 4 55 Remote Administration Password 730 esccionioniiccnciniacicicniona orienten arica ci nas 4 56 Remote Call Forwarding DESSEN dese itc rabia EE ro depu LII ERO EH Fa TREE Ea EEE ET EOTS 4 57 Rog on TS Nt eme 4 58 ii Master TOC Master Table of Contents J M J P Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 odiaba Da a iaaah SOO oci A 4 59 System Password EAS cosita 40 System Reset Programming Saved 728 cccoooncoccccnccononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnons sess 4 62 eo dca o Dial sarria di wee 4 63 ied sor Uop E 4 65 Transfer Return Programming ee oe Unique Line Ringing 209 ooccoocccccnnccnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninin 4 67 Voice Interrupt On Busy DESTRO sanan ana 4 68 5 initial Telephone Programming Overview T AE TE T E PETER merana 1 Required Telephone Programming escioniinnnacnicns ni ci dela sinus 5 2 Automate Line SEBOROPLo n iaireidyniais ibi ERR L A A 5 2 Extension Name Display donec MIEL M ies too a 5 4 Gine FIDA praia piste 5 5 6 Using the Telephones Overview A EMI AEE cM M e DI E se 6 1 System Telephones TN T abso TER MANU id A GA o t o T 6 10 LSU ues vibe DU duLQ p
34. Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button Enter an account code PBX Centrex feature access code or one of the following Outside telephone number Enter the telephone number up to 28 digits exactly as you would dial it Extension number Press the left button and enter the two digit extension number Press x before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling press Men OO Feature code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press Featwe QQA When you press the programmed button the message light at extension 20 turns on 4 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode Using Auto Dialing From a system telephone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press Spkr but you do not have to do so 1 Doone ofthe following If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and Mic HFAN go on and you are active on the speakerphone If you want to call by using a specific pool on a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and Mic HFAN go on and you ar
35. Wic HFA to include a stop between the two codes For instance if the code to activate a Centrex feature is X 3 0 and the code to deactivate the feature is G9 3 D store G9 3 0 MAA X 3 7 on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing which may not be required for your dialing area QHN 1 2 0 C0 5 6 5 DOOM Examples B 2 Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial numbers see System Speed Dial on page 4 63 System Speed Dial on page 8 67 and Personal Speed Dial on page 8 64 We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future To dial m On a system telephone press Code m Onasingle line telephone
36. a In the PARTNER ACS System window click on Lines The Lines window appears b Double click on the T1 line you want to program Lines 6 21 are T1 lines The Line window appears for the selected line The T1 Module 2 20 Installation In the Line Type area perform one of the following steps Ifthe PARTNER system will use this line click the T1 E amp M option button and then go to Step d f the PARTNER system will not use this line click the T1 UNEQ option button Since this line will not be used by the PARTNER system you are finished with this procedure Go to Step 8 From the Disconnect Time box choose the outward disconnect time interval for the line From the Ring Pattern box choose the ringing pattern for the line From the Group Call Distribution box choose the Hunt Group to which you want to assign the line This setting is not used for T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing From the Line Coverage Extension box choose the extension to be assigned ownership of the line This setting is not used for T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing In the Voice Mail System VMS area choose when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system during the day and when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system when the system is in Night Service This setting is not used for T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing
37. extension numbers or system features m To assign a name to the extension press niercom and then enter the character codes m To Erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Vvic HFA Press the programmed button Press Mic HFAI m To End Programming Mode Press Feature 0 0 Icon Description w Factory setting i Button with lights required m Button with lights recommended Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart Account Code Entry Press a programmable button Press a Extension Name Display Press Enter the character codes for the name See table Valid Character Entries Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number x Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press Dial a two digit code 80 99 Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions Call Pickup Press a programmable button Press 6 Dial the two digit extension number Caller ID Call Logging amp Dialing Press a programmable button with lights Press D Auto Dial Numbers Outside and Ins
38. inserting 4 5 problems with 11 23 removing 4 5 Backup Failure Alarm clearing 11 4 Batteries insertion 2 11 batteries 1 11 replacing 10 1 11 3 Bed and Breakfast Features outgoing call restriction button 114 7 17 wake up service button 115 7 20 bridging adapter 9 4 Busy Extension Indication see Light Patterns Busy Lamp Fields BLF Feature see Light Pat terns Button Locations for Programming at Extension 10 11 description 3 6 button programming operator extension 7 2 IN 2 Buttons auto dial 7 2 Auto Dial PBX and Centrex Services with 3 18 intercom 1 4 6 5 line 1 4 system phone 1 4 C Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer 1 12 8 5 Call Coverage 8 8 identifying owner of outside line 4 48 using single line telephone 8 11 system telephone 8 10 Call Coverage 116 Rings 4 9 Call Coverage Rings 3 16 4 9 programming for Release 3 0 or later 4 9 Call Follow Me description 8 11 8 14 8 30 8 63 light patterns 6 7 Call Forwarding description 8 11 8 14 8 30 8 63 light patterns 6 7 using single line telephone 8 13 system telephone 8 13 call handling 6 16 Call ID Logging and Dialing using 8 22 Call Intercept Feature 9 4 Call Log erasing records 8 25 Call Park 8 14 using single line telephone 8 15 system telephone 8 14 Call Pickup 8 15 using single line telephone 8 16 system telephone 8 16 Call Reports 9 36 call reports A 9 specifying cal
39. lights Press Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press Voice Mailbox Transfer Press a programmable button Press Recall Press a programmable button with lights Press Record A Call Press a programmable button with lights Press Remote Call Forwarding Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial two digit originating extension number Dial two digit destination R Personal Speed Dial Number Group Pickup Press a programmable button Press OO Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press 0 Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button Press Intercom 7 Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press 0 Station Lock Press a programmable button Press Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 12 Flow Charts Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart follow these instructions first To Program at an extension use the following procedure m To Start programming Press Feature 0 0 The green light next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings You can program the remaining buttons with telephone numbers
40. m Select 2 Modify Existing DLCI from the FR DLCI Config Menu Do one of the following m f you are configuring a voice connection type the port number for Proprietary Voice DLCI and press Enter m f you are configuring a data connection or a voice or data connection for a PathStar gateway type the port number for RFC 1490 and press Enter Select one of the following from the FR Encapsulation Configuration menu m Select 3 RFC 1490 for a PathStar gateway m Select 2 Proprietary Voice DLCI for another gateway Select 1 Configure Transmit CIR from the FR DLCI Options menu Type the committed burst size in bits as provided by the service provider at the prompt and press Enter A rule of thumb is 100 000 bits x the number of channels used Type the bits second of the Circuit Throughput at the prompt and press Enter Usually you enter the factory setting of 272 000 Type 0 at the excess burst size prompt and press Enter Select 2 Configure Receive CIR from the FR DLCI Options menu Repeat Steps h i and j above for the Receive CIR Press Esc to return to the WAN Configuration Menu 12 Select 4 Configure Maintenance Protocol from the WAN Configuration Menu 13 Select the appropriate Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol from the following Obtain this information from your service provider 0 None 1 CCITT Q 933 Annex A Network CCITT Q 933 Annex A User CCITT Q 933 Anne
41. o O a o o mi oQ po RI aS LT LCC a LDD o O a oO o O yLM LN LO LP LAA LBB oO O a oO oO O n I Hn J n K n L n Y O Z o O ao o B n F o G i H pem Intercom n Hn n n Hn Oo A O B a C oO D oO O Programming Mixed Telephone Types Figure D 2 Programming from an MLS 34D Telephone PARTNER 6 Phone N oce gCo SLA aB o o o Intercom Intercom Ext message MEOS ote PARTNER 18D 18 Ph gt 18D 1 one Next Next L_J Next m A Procedure m ltem m Data pa Remove Mm N po pese pp pee o Ls Ls LS LS LS U Prev Prev Prev a m Procedure m_ Item m_ Data m Enter A O PEL PE ER o3 pe LS Lf LS Lf Ls LS M b N hi o E P E AA BB Ly Ly Ly Ly Ly Ly GG HH ll JJ A t t m A A JCM ICN SLO E P I J K L Y Z E 3 LS US LS LS Lf Lf B T B J E K B L A A 7 A S A A E Syst Central ALE aLF aLG aLH LS Sl z Program Tel Prograi E a E a 3 cl 9 baaa Duce BCA BCE 2007 gp A B C D Ls LS LS LS g g Ext Message Intercom Intercom Feature PARTNER 34D Phone A AE Wild SY GG HH li JJ EEE oU ev iW sSLX Slee slop oca ELK 508 slr oi
42. press Code while receiving intercom dial tone Speed Dial Form C 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table C 1 PARTNER ACS System Speed Dial numbers Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 600 637 601 638 602 639 603 640 604 641 605 642 606 643 607 644 608 645 609 646 610 647 611 648 612 649 613 650 614 651 615 652 616 653 617 654 618 655 619 656 620 657 621 658 622 659 623 660 624 661 625 662 626 663 627 664 628 665 629 666 630 667 631 668 632 669 633 670 634 671 635 672 636 673 Speed Dial Form C 2 Speed Dial Form Table C 1 PARTNER ACS System Speed Dial numbers Continued Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 674 687 675 688 676 689 677 690 678 691 678 692 680 693 681 694 682 695 683 696 684 697 685 698 686 699 Table C 2 PARTNER ACS Personal Speed Dial numbers Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 80 90 81 91 82 92 83 93 84 94 85 95 86 96 87 97 88 98 89 99 Speed Dial Form C 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Speed Dial Form C 4 Programming Mixed Telephone Types Overview This appendix provides information about programming from a PARTNER 34D telephone to MLS telephones and from an MLS 34D
43. v Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 69 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 70 Initial Telephone Programming 5 Contents dolor A A A A IN 5 1 Required Telephone Programming Tere rere core reer ee 5 2 A tomatie LI E AA i e a NOU pd bU CHE 5 2 MU uou A TT TTE 5 3 a Programming DES ibd T UR a DX bad d a d NR RO ce oO Extension Name DIEDISU 044 500 9d ETE E IHRE OOEIRE OA d E UP REC PP REA Ce dead 5 4 a a rei qeu NE TEST TE IR enin e eh ea aE 5 4 Mora Mp P 5 5 LOS PE 203 rivas 1e RAR el ACRI AMO CR ORD Pedo dd 5 5 a Considerations Kenge pereg T TTE ss 5 5 a PIG BITE wet eee aid IR RUE EE OR eH e Eae MGE RUE AER ER OP D oe ond 5 6 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Initial Telephone Programming Overview As the System Administrator you should program telephones at individual extensions with certain features There are two types of telephone programming Centralized Telephone Programming programming individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 Extension Programming programming an individual system telephone from the extension to which it is connected Use Centralized Telephone P
44. 10 a Replacing Modules in a Stand Alone or 2 Slot Carrier Configuration 10 10 a Replacing Modules in a 5 Slot Carrier oooooocconooonmmoo 10 13 Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 16 Changing System SENOS es cronicas ck b ergo rtorras 10 16 a Adding ION LING AN 10 16 a AGANG New AAA AP 10 17 a Adding New EXiensionS aceudelibesahibobCREPem 10 18 a Swapping EXISIIBIOUS oxadd ER HC E ARR AAA 10 18 10 i PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y 10 ii Upgrading the System Overview You can upgrade your system software to a new release of the PARTNER ACS by using a PCMCIA card You also can add or replace modules and add lines pools and extensions Both old and new introduced in system Release 4 0 5 slot carriers are compatible with PARTNER ACS R7 0 Battery Replacement The processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When battery power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn Or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display telephones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should notify the System Administra
45. 10 or 11 At the Line prompt enter the two digit line number of the line jack to which the loudspeaker paging system is connected Press Enter Select another procedure or exit programming mode Loudspeaker Paging System 9 28 Using Auxiliary Equipment Modems You can use a modem to send calls only or you can use a modem to send and receive calls NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the central office lines connected to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality Modem for Sending Calls Only You can set up a modem to dial out only see Figure 9 12 With this modem and a terminal you can connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services The telephone shown is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a telephone Figure 9 12 Modem for Sending Only Telephone optional Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions to use the modem Modems 9 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a modem for sending only 1 Doone ofthe following m If extension X is
46. 15 a Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted A 11 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use a Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect 0 0 0 0 cece ees a Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call ooooooo Problems with Combination Extensions 00200 0c eee eee eee a Telephone Does Not Work Properly eee Ads bs prise sans Problems with Tip Ping Devices iuuecuacoscescuenRrre cR RR D RR ken ot a Tip Ring Device Does Not Answer o ooooooocoranr oe a Tip Ring Device Does Not Dial Out Properly oooocooooooo a Call Records Wrap on SMDR Pridt0Ut o o ooooococococococ eee Problems with the 1600 DSL Module pud dd Hla EA ane eR EAT Problems with Automatic Backup aues edes rper e ara a Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at dle Extensions TO and 11 src E 3 REVERSE SORGE SEER EHS Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Ri dad qd eee eee ud A Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 OPE T ides pudet Display Shows Backup Failed era at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 er re dad pd iiec Problems with Manual BACKUP i2aaosbama heec IHEd RED IR Ec red d a Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode S M seria bance Display Shows Card is Write
47. 2 Doone ofthe following m To make a ringing call dial 7 and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring m To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 7 and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 8 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G Use this feature to distribute call volume among extensions in a group to off load call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where G is a Hunt Group number from 1 8 the system rings or voice signals the first available extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For a voic
48. 22 Insert Card 11 21 System Busy 11 22 Write Prot 11 21 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 3 11 4 3 8 7 Automatic Extension Privacy 3 16 4 3 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 4 3 Automatic Line Selection 3 14 3 15 5 2 Automatic System Answer 7 4 delay 110 7 6 lines 204 7 6 Automatic System Answer Button 7 4 using 7 5 Automatic System Answer Delay 7 6 Automatic System Answer Lines 7 6 Automatic System Answer Mode 7 7 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 7 8 Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial PC Card 1 11 Automatic Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines 9 17 Automatic VMS Cover 310 9 45 IN 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Auxiliary Equipment example setups 4 1 9 1 overview 1 13 auxiliary equipment 8 15 9 1 Night Service 9 34 Background Music 8 7 using 8 8 backing up system programming 4 4 Backplane 2 8 Backup automatic problems 11 21 manual problems 11 23 Backup Failed Check Card 11 24 Backup Failed System Busy 11 24 Card is Write Protected 11 23 Invalid Card 11 23 System Busy 11 23 Backup and Restore 4 4 Backup Answering Options 7 2 Backup Problems automatic 11 21 11 22 manual 11 24 Backup Programming Automatic 4 5 4 6 automatic 4123 11 21 11 22 Manual 4 6 4 7 manual 124 11 24 Backup Programming Automatic 3 10 Backup Programming Manual 3 10 Backup Restore PC Card 4 5 4 6
49. 311 or Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types Copy Settings 399 Set up your system by programming one extension for each type of telephone in the system Then use Copy Settings 399 to program other telephones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D telephone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 telephones See Copy Settings 399 on page 4 17 for more information Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services Your system may work behind a PBX or Centrex system m PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch m Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex features to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information about using Centrex features see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Consider the following when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system m Recall setting m Dialing restrictions m Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers Recall Setting Set the Recall Timer Duratio
50. 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension X use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Programming Fax 2 Receive Ext Y To program the receive fax machine T 2 Do one of the following m f extension Y is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y m If extension Y is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension Y If you want to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first line A selected last Fax Machines 9 22 Using Auxiliary Equipment 3 SetLine Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring set all other lines and pools at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and pro
51. 728 was used Automatic System Answer Features 74 Operator Features m Direct Extension Dial is an alternative system answering feature that lets outside callers dial an extension or Hunt Group number directly without the aid of the operator Programming To assign or unassign an Automatic System Answer Button with lights at extension 10 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 1 1 1 2 Doone ofthe following m f you want to assign Automatic System Answer to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to unassign Automatic System Answer press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 2 Not Assigned the factory setting wv m Ifyou want to assign Automatic System Answer to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears ASA Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Automatic System Answer to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Automatic System Answer Button at extension 10 Using the Automatic System Answer Button Use the Automatic System Answer Button as a toggle button to turn ASA on or off When ASA is on the green light next to the button is on steady When ASA is off the green light goes off If you turn Automatic System Answer on when calls are ring
52. ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 7 A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a confirmation tone Begin recording your message Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 20 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this current procedure m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the following procedure m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset To play back an Automatic System Answer message ll Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press the button Dial 8 9 7 A display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 A display similar to the following appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the procedure for recording a message
53. Are Disconnected 11 28 Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect cooecenadeeReleskhbc c rir mE ES RARE 11 28 x All Calls Disconnected cecs cer athadete ead si terrein eaa ERE 11 28 All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights 1129 Multiple Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights isses 11 29 Poor Transmission Quality on Modem n ssassn aaaea 11 30 Other Problems with System 2 cates nananana araea 11 30 11 iii PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y 11 iv Troubleshooting Overview From time to time problems may arise with various system functions This chapter describes some common problems and recommends solutions for them You also can obtain help with solving problems by contacting your authorized dealer or by calling the helpline Customer Self Service Center on the Internet If you can access the Internet you can use the Customer Self Service Center to get on line information m Answers to frequently asked questions m 800 number directory If you have a service agreement active lease or warranty you can get additional on line information m Feature programming tips m Notification of changes to products m Product documentation m Chat service The Internet address for the Customer Self Service Center is on the copyright page of this guide Overview
54. Button 6 5 Intercom Autodialer 1 12 7 3 connecting 2 40 problems 11 8 Intercom Call making an 6 19 Intercom Dial Tone 4 44 Intercom Dial Tone 309 4 44 Internet Customer Self Service Center 11 1 interrupting calls 8 73 interrupting calls See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls 8 5 8 5 Jacks types per module 3 3 jacks labeling 2 9 Joining a Call 6 30 Joining calls on a Single Line Telephone 6 31 System Telephone 6 31 K key extensions adding new lines 10 16 definition 1 5 setup 3 14 Key Mode 1 3 LAN Configuration 2 30 language changing 4 29 Language Display 303 4 29 language for displays 4 29 Last Number Redial using single line telephone 8 58 system telephone 8 58 LEDs checking for proper functioning 2 15 Light Patterns 6 5 description of 6 5 intercom auto dial button 7 2 Line adding to system 10 16 assigning to extensions 3 12 4 46 buttons 6 1 jacks 3 3 restricting use at individual extension 4 23 Line Access Mode 4 45 Line Access Restriction 302 4 23 Line Assignment 301 defaulton PARTNER phones 4 46 description 4 46 4 48 Line buttons 4 46 Line Coverage Extension 3 16 4 48 Line Coverage Extension 208 4 48 Line Ringing 5 5 Line Selection Automatic 5 2 lines 3 12 adding new lines 10 16 assigning to pools 4 54 testing 2 17 Lines and extensions connecting 2 16 Lines Number of 104 3 12 Lists allowed phone numbers 4 18 disallo
55. Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination telephone number was programmed dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside number at which you want the calls to ring Remote Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Remote Call Forwarding by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Remote Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Remote Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Remote Call Forwarding F1 1 8 62 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Remote Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HOOD Dial your extension number Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Remote Call Forwarding 1 Lift the handset You h
56. Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or Centrex system dial out code 9 on most systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number Emergency Phone Number List 406 Use this feature to create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and emergency services numbers You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code 201 but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency List Considerations m Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits m Enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it including any toll prefixes m When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Emergency Phone Number List 406 3 18 Initial System Programming m Users at Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List without entering an account code Users can make 91
57. DAS UI ok n 3 terra FT eR ERE CENAR ROLE ER RE 6 27 a Joining Calls A A eee eT ee EA 6 30 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Using the Telephones Overview This chapter explains how system and single line telephones work with the system The buttons on the telephones are discussed as well as the basic call handling features and the display System Telephones PARTNER telephones have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they work For information about an MLC 6 MLS or TransTalk 9000 series telephone see the documentation that came with the telephone NOTE Endeavor telephones are supported in PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier The Endeavor telephones are programmed the same as PARTNER 34D 18D 18 and 6 telephones and have the same button layouts For more information about these telephones see the documentation that came with the telephones Buttons and Indicators PARTNER telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it Some telephones also have a display which provides feedback messages and prompts from t
58. DSL module which is equipped with programmable flash memory The firmware to upgrade this module resides on a Backup Restore PC Card PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 provides a firmware upgrade capability for the 012E module which is equipped with programmable flash memory The firmware to upgrade this module resides on a Backup Restore PC Card The steps to perform a firmware upgrade are the same as those to upgrade the system software See Using a PC Card on page 10 2 Check the LEDs While a 1600 DSL or 012E module is undergoing a firmware upgrade the power LEDs appear as follows m The power LED on the 1600 DSL and or the 012E module is initially steady green for 10 to 20 seconds then flashes for another 5 to 10 seconds m The LED on the processor module flashes green while the firmware upgrade is in progress m The LEDs on other modules residing in the carrier that are not being upgraded are off NOTE Some modules do not display the LED off during a firmware upgrade of other modules The power LED on the 1600 DSL module is steady green and the power LED on the PARTNER Messaging module is steady amber while firmware is upgraded on other modules The firmware upgrade process occurs for one module at a time After successful completion of the upgrade for one module the system resets after 3 to 10 seconds and begins the firmware upgrade of the next module if required The firmware upgrades begin with modules in the left most slot to t
59. Hunt Group Extension 505 Modems 9 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Music On Hold When Music On Hold is activated and a Music On Hold audio source is connected to the processor module a caller on hold hears music NOTE The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives You can activate and deactivate Music On Hold and adjust the volume level by programming these features m Music On Hold m Music On Hold Volume Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source You can connect an audio source to the Music On Hold jack on the processor module so that a caller hears music when placed on hold when the Music On Hold feature has been activated Follow these steps to connect an audio source to the Music On Hold jack 1 Insert an RCS phono plug into the Music On Hold jack on the processor module located near the middle of the processor module below the line jacks see Figure 9 14 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Place a call on hold and listen If you do not hear music at any setting the Music On Hold feature may not be activated or properly programmed Figure 9 14 Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source MUSIC ON HOLD a Jack
60. Installation Programming and Use Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm If you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 and the automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the default day date time message on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 After correcting the problem that caused the failure you can clear the Backup Failure Alarm by following these steps 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 2 3 The current setting appears 2 Press 3 to choose Option 4 Backup Alarm Cleared NOTE You cannot use Next Data or Prev Data in this procedure to choose Option 3 3 Exit programming mode NOTE Using Option 4 to clear a Backup Failure Alarm does not change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 123 It remains either Active or Not Active 012E Module Power Management The power supply used in the 012E module is adequate to power the 12 ETR ports under normal conditions However if too many large PARTNER telephones such as the PARTNER 34D are off hook with speakerphone volume set to high levels the power supply could be overloaded Power management of the 012E module eliminates the power supply overload When a power threshold is exceeded all telephones connected to the 012E module will appear as follows m LED display dims to a minimal level m Speakerphone volume is decreased To clear this co
61. Modules in a 5 Slot Carrier Replacing a module in a 5 slot carrier involves many of the steps used in installing the modules A CAUTION Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 Follow these steps to replace a module in a 5 slot carrier 1 Move the On Off switch to the Off position O Remove the power cord from the wall outlet Loosen the thumb screw at the bottom of the carrier cover n Rotate the carrier cover to disengage the tabs at the top of the modules from the openings on the top of the carrier 5 Before installing a module remove the clear plastic protector from the connector area on the rear of the module by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 10 10 Figure 10 10 Removing the Plastic Protector Tab EET M q EN S Tab Replacing Modules 10 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Check the slack in the wires If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free label and disconnect the wires Place one hand on top of the module With the other hand grip the plastic bracket on the bottom front of the module and pull out the old module see Figure 10 11 Figure 10 11 Removing the Module 8
62. N E y Nie ni AUT NGA RA NT AA Connecting Lines and Extensions 2 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use The T1 Module The T1 module provides up to 16 lines even though it contains only one line jack Figure 2 21 11 Module Ports The T1 module provides 24 channels but a maximum of 16 channels can be used for voice lines Channels 9 through 24 are used for voice These channels can be assigned to line or pool buttons and used for incoming and outgoing calls The eight unused that is unequipped channels channels 1 through 8 and any channels you do not use for voice lines can be used for data connectivity by placing an external Channel Service Unit CSU DSU Data Service Unit between the T1 module and your T1 service provider The T1 module also provides Direct Inward Dialing DID capabilities allowing calls to be routed automatically to particular extensions hunt groups and calling groups based on the digits received from the T1 service provider With DID a caller can dial a PARTNER extension directly without the assistance of an attendant Note that you can make outgoing calls on T1 lines with DID You must contact your T1 service provider for DID The T1 module contains m one RJ 45 port to connect your service provider to the T1 module m three pairs of bantam j
63. Night Service Group Extensions 4 39 System Password 4 61 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 7 System Manager Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Customizing your system To set the system wide time System System Date 3 10 Managers only System Day 3 10 System Time 1 Set up account codes so that calls canbe N A Forced Account Code Entry 4 33 billed or tracked to a specific client or Forced Account Code List 4 34 project Set up which line is selected when a user Alltelephones Automatic Line Selection 5 2 lifts the handset or presses the Speaker button Set up a single line telephone so that it For single line External Hotline 4 31 dials a specific inside extension or outside telephones Hotline 4 43 number as soon as someone lifts the only handset Adjust the ringing options at an extension All Abbreviated Ringing 4 2 Distinctive Ring 4 30 Adjust the system dial tone to N A Intercom Dial Tone 4 44 accommodate a voice messaging system or modem Control what a caller hears while waiting N A Music On Hold 9 33 for the system during transfer while on hold or during other operations where the caller must wait Change the language used English Display Display Language 4 29 Canadian French or Latin American telephones Spanish at an extension s display the language chosen for extension 10 becomes the language for the Station Message Deta
64. Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m If no one changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Station Lock was used to lock the extension What to do Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension m f you can make a call the problem is solved m Ifthe extension was not locked go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Local telephone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isolate the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different telephones using the same line m If you cannot make calls from one telephone on all lines follow the procedure for System Telephone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 m If you cannot make calls by using different telephones go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Too many tip ring devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is on a system telephone go to Possible Cause 7 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try to call later m If you can make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding a 206 1 receiver 400 2 receivers 308EC 6 receivers 012E 10 receivers or Endeavor 362EC 6 receivers if Endeavor telephones are used module to avoid future problems Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover If you wait 30 seconds and still do not
65. PARTNER Advanced Communications System The C01 represents the country code To use this feature press Feature 5 9 at any system display telephone The system release message replaces the default information on the top line of the telephone display for 15 seconds Power Failure Operation When power to the system is cut off the first two lines on the PARTNER R7 0 processor module and the 308EC module automatically connect to the first two extensions on those modules and the first line on each 206 module connects to its first extension This enables you to make and answer calls during a power outage provided you have a single line telephone connected to any of these extensions During a power failure single line telephones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available When You Need Help 11 2 Troubleshooting The system can stay programmed for a minimum of 45 days and a maximum of six months after it stops receiving power depending on the freshness of the batteries When the batteries are drained all of the system s programmed settings return to the factory settings You should install fresh batteries every year Battery Replacement The PARTNER ACS processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When batter
66. Pickup 8 15 interrupting 8 73 interrupting See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls joining 6 30 parking 8 14 placing on hold 6 23 restricting A 7 transferring 6 27 transferring to voice mailbox 8 76 Capacities System 1 5 Cell Phone Connect description 8 27 using single line telephone 8 30 system telephone 8 29 Centralized Telephone Programming 3 3 3 8 Changing System Settings 3 1 3 17 Index Clock changing system 3 10 3 11 clock changing system 10 16 CNG detection 9 23 combination extension problems telephone does not work 11 16 Combination Extensions 9 3 combination extensions problems 11 16 Components batteries 1 11 capacity 1 5 description 1 7 modules 1 9 PC Card slot 1 11 telephones 1 12 1 13 Components System description 1 7 Conference call making a 6 25 conf button 6 25 dropping a participant 8 31 limiting outside parties 4 49 outside restriction 4 49 Single Line Telephone 6 26 System Telephone 6 26 Conference Drop 8 31 using single line telephone 8 31 system telephone 8 31 Configurations 2 Slot 1 7 5 Slot 1 7 extensions maximum 1 9 lines maximum 1 5 overview 1 7 connecting an Intercom Autodialer 2 40 connecting lines and extensions 2 16 connecting telephone cords 2 17 Contact Closure 8 32 length of operation 9 13 setting up 9 38 using single line telephone 8 33 system telephone 8 33 Contact Closure Adjunct
67. Possible Cause System battery power is low What to do Replace the system batteries see Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 11 Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number Possible Cause 1 Not receiving Caller ID service from local telephone company What to do Contact your local telephone company to check on Caller ID service m If you are not receiving Caller ID service subscribe to it m f you are receiving Caller ID service go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Line connected to a module that does not support Caller ID What to do Make sure lines with Caller ID service are connected to a processor 206EC 308EC or 400EC module If Caller ID lines are not connected to one of these modules install the appropriate modules and or make the appropriate connections Possible Cause 3 Someone activated Call Coverage What to do Check the system telephone display m If Coverage Call for XX where XX is the extension that activated the Call Coverage appears the call is a coverage call Call Coverage displays the extension number of the person who activated the feature rather than Caller ID information m If Coverage Call for XX does not display call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Telephone Problems 11 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The caller used
68. Power until the cord locks into place see Figure Ora 4 Plug the other end of the power cord into a Stand Alone properly grounded three prong wall outlet that is not controlled by a switch 5 If you have a 5 slot carrier move the On Off switch to the On position A CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the connector for the entire length of the module or carrier Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Installing the Control Unit 2 14 Installation NOTES If your system has a T1 module initialization may take up to one minute m l your system has a 1600 DSL module initialization of the line and extension ports may take up to 40 seconds The initialization of the 1600 DSL module itself may take from 2 to 7 minutes Checking the LEDs After you power up your system check the green lights on the fronts of the modules see Figure 2 17 Figure 2 17 Module LEDs m Ifa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and then power up the carrier Lights m If multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat either both modules 2 slot carrier or the leftmost module that has a light out 5 slot carrier and then power up the carrier ducc Module If the lights are still out see the Customer Support Document on the accompanying compact disc for z informati
69. Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Pressthe Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Voice Interrupt Features 8 75 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Use this feature to transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when you know that a co worker is away from his or her desk You must have a voice messaging system to use Voice Mailbox Transfer and you can use it only from a system telephone Considerations m You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system telephone to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button and then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number m While
70. Rings prompt appears VMS Cover Rings XX 3 Rings Enter a setting 1 9 3 is the factory setting or press until the correct value appears Voice Messaging Systems 9 46 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 To set VMS Cover Rings for another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Delay 506 Use this feature to determine when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant of the voice messaging system You can set the system for any number of rings 0 6 Assigning more rings gives the operator an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant VMS Hunt Delay is programmable on a per line basis In addition you can program this feature so that calls can be handled one way during the day and a different way when the system is in Night Service Considerations m If you do notsubscribe to ICLID services and want immediate call handling set this option to 0 rings m If you do subscribe to ICLID services and want immediate call handling set this option to at least 2 rings This allows the ICLID information to be detected before the call is sent to the Automated Attendant Programming To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program
71. SMDR Printout Possible Cause SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits causing the combined length of the fields for a call record to be greater than the 80 characters supported by your printer What to do Reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer m If the call records print without wrapping to the next line the problem is solved m If the problem remains change the output format back to 15 digits Problems with Tip Ring Devices 11 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Problems with the 1600 DSL Module Under certain circumstances the 1600 DSL module may not function properly This may be the fault of a circuit or programming Prior to performing any of the steps below make sure that you have reset the 1600 DSL module via a cold restart of the system to ensure that all settings you have made have been put into effect NOTE For the instructions in this section you can check or change the 1600 DSL module settings by connecting your computer directly to the 1600 DSL module see instructions packaged with the module You can also use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to remotely administer the module To remotely administer the module you must have the following m Release 5 0 or later software on the 1600 DSL module m Release 7 0 software version of PARTNER ACS m Release 7 0 PARTNER AC
72. Schedule 507 to meet your business s needs Automatic VMS Cover 310 Use this feature to automatically route an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings factory setting for all system extensions is three rings so callers can leave a message Considerations Single line telephones and system telephones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension To manually change an extension s VMS Cover state program the VMS Cover feature on a button with lights Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox Voice Messaging Systems 9 45 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 320 If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified amount of VMS Cover Rings If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice mess
73. System Date and System Time to schedule the automatic backups m Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 do not back up the System Date or the System Time m Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Date or System Time m Be sure that the System Date and System Time are set correctly before using backup procedures System Date 101 Use this feature to set the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display telephones when the telephone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Considerations The System Date date stamps the backup files when you use Backup Programming Programming To change the System Date 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 1 O 1 at extension 10 or 11 Enter today s date in the form mmddyy month day and year including leading zeros for single digit months or days For example to enter April 26 2001 press 0 4 2 6 0 1 A display similar to the following appears System Date Data 042601 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Setting the Date and Time 3 10 Initial System Programming System Time 103 Use this feature to set the time that appears on system display telephones Considerations m Enter the time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are 0 0 0 0 12 midnight to AQA 1
74. Use 3 Press until the appropriate value appears m 00 No Detection m 07 350 msec m 01 50 msec m 08 400 msec m 02 100 msec m 09 450 msec the factory setting v m 10 500 msec m 03 2150 msec m 04 200 msec m 05 250 msec m 11 550 msec m 06 300 msec m 12 600 msec 4 To program the next line press then repeat Step 3 Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Hold Reminder Tone 127 Use this feature to set the time interval at which the PARNTER system will provide a reminder tone for a call on hold at a system telephone When you place a call on hold the PARTNER system will provide the Hold Reminder Tone at your extension if the call remains on hold for the time interval specified You can disable the Hold Reminder Tone If you disable the Hold Reminder Tone the PARTNER system will not provide a reminder tone when a call is on hold Considerations m When you program this feature via Set administration the setting you specify will apply to all analog lines It will not apply to T1 lines You must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program the Hold Reminder Tone for T1 lines Programming To change the hold reminder tone time 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 2 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears showing the current Hold Reminder Tone setting Hold Timer 5 60 se
75. a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the modem to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the modem to use to extension X 2 Ifthe modem only dials outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 or a pool access code and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 Set the auto answer feature of the modem to Off Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem use the setup shown in Figure 9 13 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy Figure 9 13 Send and Receive Modem Modem Line A Lines PARTNER ACS Modems 9 30 Using Auxil
76. a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system and it disconnects from the call This causes the screening extension to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party m You cannot screen a call if the Cell Phone Connect feature is active Call Screening F25 8 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with the feature Press a programmable button with LEDs Press Feature 2 5 Program another extension or exit programming mode c RON Caller ID Features Caller ID is available on system display telephones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number and name if available When active on a call you automatically receive Caller ID information for the duration of the call When your extension is idle you receive Caller ID information for the call you will be connected to when you lift the handset NOTE You receive both the callers number and name on a two line display telephone while the call is ringing The TransTalk telephones only receive either the caller s number or the caller s name depending on the status of the Caller ID Name Disp
77. a voice messaging system Auto Attendant 9 8 Using Auxiliary Equipment Considerations m On system display telephones Automated Attendant appears when a call is being transferred from an auto attendant The Caller ID information if available will be displayed automatically after the transfer is completed Transfer from AA Or Transfer from Auto Att appears when a call transferred by an auto attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension m For each auto attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination extension does not answer m Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the auto attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Programming To identify an extension where an auto attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A G O 7 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to which the auto attendant is connected To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To assign or unassign a second auto attendant extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Auto Attendant 9 9 PARTNER Advanced Communi
78. ada Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le Industrie Canada Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your sys tem and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you an Avaya Inc system administrator your tele communications peers and your managers Avaya Inc does not warrant that this product or any of its networked equipment is either immune from or will prevent either unauthorized or malicious intrusions Avaya Inc will not be responsible for any charges losses or damages that result from such intrusions For important information regarding your system and toll fraud see the PARTNER Customer Support Document Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need techni cal supporter assistance call the Avaya Customer Care Center at 1 800 628 2888 Warranty Avaya Inc provides a
79. after the operator transferred a call green flutter Programming an Operator s Extension 7 2 Operator Features m Manual Signaling A Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target extension hears a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by an operator to alert the boss to an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally you can use a Manual Signaling button to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system telephones NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling m Fax Management A button labeled Fax 30 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 30 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper Figure 7 1 PARTNER 34D Telephone as an Operator Console PARTNER 34D Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable
80. all other extension features For non display system telephones you may also want to program all extension features at this point To erase the current programming from a button press the button and then press Mic FAI Automatic Line Selection This feature determines the line or pool a user is connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines or pools in the order specified by Automatic Line Selection and selects the first available line or pool For example if you specify outside lines or pools first for an extension but all outside lines or pools are busy the user hears the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker At key extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number If all outside lines are busy the system searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to 05 01 02 03 04 Intercom This way the WATS line is selected first At pooled extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an available line in the main pool pool 880 button 1 then button
81. and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence Calls forwarded and unanswered at both the originating extension and the forwarded extension are logged as unanswered calls by the Caller ID Logging feature at both extensions If the forwarded call is answered at the forwarded extension it is not logged unless the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 feature is set to log answered calls Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park on page 8 14 You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Call Forwarding button 1 2 3 Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Do one of the following m Press feature MM m Press and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature 1 1 the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 8 12 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Call Forwarding on a System Telephone To forward calls manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding manually E Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number twi
82. answer some lines only when a user does not pick up set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to Delayed Ring set the lines or pools assigned at each user s extension to Immediate Ring No Answering If some lines should not be picked up by the operator at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use Line Assignment 301 to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case set Line Access Restriction 302 to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the operator from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines Overview 7 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Backup Answering Options To assist the operator in handling calls consider the following features Automatic System Answer When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized greeting Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system either places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flashes disconnects the call Direct Extension Dial When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings a
83. assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program s 5 O 1 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting Y Groups of Extensions 4 40 5 6 Programming System Options Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Hold Disconnect Time 203 Use this feature to change the hold disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up the hold disconnect time is probably set too high or set at No Detection Considerations If the tel
84. away from the edge of your desk m Ifyou have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation m In conference rooms a separate speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system telephone is designed for individual use System Telephones 6 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Single Line Telephones In addition to system telephones you can connect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial telephones and even some feature telephones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine single line telephones on the same extension with system telephones or other devices without using expensive adapters or connectors Single line telephones can do many of the things that system telephones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using single line telephones Use single line telephones as power failure backups system telephones will not work If you connect single line telephones to the first two extensions on the PARTNER ACS processor module users can place and answer outside calls on the first two lines If you connec
85. beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response f you hear ringing you have reached an idle single line MLC 6 TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy not assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Answering Calls This section describes how you can answer calls ringing at your extension Additional features allow you to pick up calls at other extensions Considerations Calls that are answered by pressing a pool button can be held conferenced or transferred however pool buttons cannot be used to join calls There are several ways to access a line for answering calls On either a system telephone or a single line telephone lift the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system telephone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time On a system telephone press a specific line pool or button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing Intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Onasingle line telephone
86. call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties Using Conference on a Single Line Telephone Follow these steps to originate a conference call on a single line telephone T Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call 2 Press the switchhook down once rapidly The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone 3 Doone ofthe following m To add an outside party dial 9 or a pool access code plus the outside number If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back m To add an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party 4 When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties Handling Calls 6 26 Using the Telephones Transferring Calls You can transfer calls using the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other extensions Considerations When you press fransfr the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks A transferred call appears on the destination extension s button
87. call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings m Ifan extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Programming To program a VMS Cover button 1 Press Feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button with lights 3 Press mo 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode VMS Cover F15 8 72 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using VMS Cover From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off When the light is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered intercom DID and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox Voice Interrupt Features Use the Voice Interrupt On Busy feature to talk to a user who is active on a call The user then can use Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back to speak to you Voice Interrupt On Busy A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user
88. call to ring at your extension is identified in the display If more than one coverage call rings at your extension you can press the Caller ID Inspect button Then press line pool or button next to the flashing green light to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent Answering a Call on a Single Line Telephone If your single line telephone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook m To answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call m To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active Handling Calls 6 22 Using the Telephones Placing Calls on Hold You can place and retrieve calls on hold by using either the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone You can make and receive other calls on another line or pool while a call is on hold Considerations For system telephones if a call is left on hold for longer than the specified Hold Reminder Ton
89. caller enters an invalid extension number or does not enter one at all the call is transferred to the operator at extension 10 or to the designated transfer return extension for extension 10 To intercept a call while the message is playing the red light next to the line button is on steady press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved You must program a button on the system display telephone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a factory setting To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Direct Extension Dial Features 7 10 Operator Features Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered for Direct Extension Dial 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 2 0 5 Enter the desired two digit system line number To assign or unassign Direct Extension Dial press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assign
90. calls in progress are lost m Inside intercom calls are not recorded m If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device m Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means two records are generated on the report m Outside calls made by Cell Phone Connect and Remote Call Forwarding will contain a as the last digit of the telephone number in the report m For incoming calls on T1 lines the Number field on call reports does not display telephone numbers The Number field displays IN for incoming calls on T1 lines Call Reports A call reportis a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each call record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 9 16 Figure 9 16 Sample Call Report DATE TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT C 04 26 97 11 11 1028812015558014 00 01 40 08 18 C 04 26 97 11 34 1023319085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 I 04 26 97 13 35 IN 00 02 12 01 10 I 04 26 97 13 38 9085559111 00 01 22 12 15 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 36 Using Auxiliary Equipment Each page contains up to 59 records The report has the following fields Call Type C indicates outgoing calls I indicates incoming calls Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy format where mm is the month dd
91. can be used by the telephone user and the System Administrator F represents the button I represents the button XX represents a system extension number PP represents a Personal Speed Dial code G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a system line number 2 Available only on system phones A 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 3 Intercom Dial Code Features Intercom Dial Code Feature Iexx Call Pickup I66G Group Pickup I68LL Direct Line Pickup Active Line 170 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Simultaneous Paging I G Group Calling Ring I 7G Group Calling Page 177G Group Hunting Ring I 77G Group Hunting Voice Signal I8LL Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I891 Automatic System Answer Record Playback I892 Direct Extension Dial Record Playback Efspeseris tie Sete CUOI Teosi 1E beer uon XX eposni SAS G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a system line number Table A 4 Basic Calling and Answering Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Answering calls And seeing who is calling you from Display Display 6 14 another extension telephones And seeing who is calling you from Display Display 6 14 outside telephones Caller ID 4 10 And transferring to another extension All Transfer 6 27 At another extension All Call Pickup 8 15 For another person or group of people All Call Coverage 8 8 Call Forwar
92. can make a voice signaled call from a single line telephone but if you try to make a voice signaled call to a single line telephone it rings because the single line telephone does not have a system speaker You cannot use the System Password You cannot access the following system features Account Code Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Do Not Disturb Caller ID Logging and Dialing Feature Exclusive Hold Manual Signaling Privacy Save Number Redial VMS Cover Voice Interrupt On Busy Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back or Voice Mailbox Transfer You can however use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 and Automatic VMS Cover 4310 which are similar to the Privacy and VMS Cover features Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a single line telephone because the telephone cannot get dial tone and make calls Single Line Telephones 6 12 Using the Telephones m A display on a single line telephone will not show Caller ID information system messages or Caller ID Call Logging information m A speaker on a single line telephone is not a system integrated speaker therefore it cannot receive voice type calls such as a group page Feature Telephones A feature telephone is a single line telephone that has buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dialpad For example there are feature telephones that have programmable Auto Dial buttons last number buttons buttons and built in speakers
93. correct setting as follows m No Restriction The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Local Only The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes 3 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 or lift the handset and replace it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction Button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation Station Unlock F22 Use this feature to unlock a specific user s locked extension Use this feature when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension Considerations m This feature is available only at extension 10 or 11 m Do not program this feature on a button m Use Station Lock to lock and unlock from an extension Using Station Unlock on a System Telephone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press Feature Z 2 2 Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button for the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked If that extension used a Station Lock button with lights to activate the feature the green light goes off Using Station Unlock on a Single Line Telephone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Liftthe handset You hear the intercom dial tone 2 Press H 3 Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked Station Unlock F22 7 19 P
94. downward to secure the assembly in place The plus icon and the battery icon should now be visible on the front of the battery assembly see Figure 2 13 Initializing the System Before you initialize the system you may insert any of the supported PC Cards Backup Restore card Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial ASA DXD card PARTNER Voice Messaging Small Large card and PARTNER Remote Access PC Card NOTE You must power down the system before you insert or remove a PC Card Follow these steps to initialize a system 1 If you have a 5 slot carrier make sure the carrier s On Off switch is at the Off O position 2 lf you have a PC card perform the following steps a If your PC Card comes with a write protect tab verify that the write protect tab on the PC Card is not in the write protected position If it is use a paperclip or another pointed object to push the write protect tab on the end of the PC Card upward to the nonprotected position b Toinsert the PC Card hold it with the label facing to the right and slide it gently into one of the PC Card slots on the processor module When inserted properly the PC Card projects about 1 5 8 4 cm from the module Installing the Control Unit 2 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 Press the power cord firmly into the power jack on the carrier or the stand alone processor module Figure 2 16 Attaching the
95. feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15926 9096 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit 5 slot carrier 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom 2 slot carrier or Stand alone ACS processor module 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the front top and right side and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals U S and Canada 90 264 VAC 47 63 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC 220 VAC fused at 10 Amps Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 a Aninsulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system b The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment c The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity o
96. following m To assign or unassign another extension to the same Contact Closure Group press Next Item Or Prev Item until the correct extension appears Then repeat Step 4 m To assign extensions to the other Contact Closure Group press Next Procedure press Prev Procedure enter the number for the other Contact Closure 1 or 2 and then begin at Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Contact Closure Adjunct 9 12 Using Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Use this feature to specify how long the Contact Closures remain active when they are activated A Contact Closure can be activated for 1 3 or 5 seconds or the Contact Closure can be set to toggle For example if a Contact Closure that controls a door lock has a Contact Closure Operation Type of 5 Seconds On the door lock is released for 5 seconds when a user activates the Contact Closure If the Contact Closure has a Contact Closure Operation Type of Toggle the Contact Closure must be activated and deactivated One user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure or the same user can both activate and deactivate the Contact Closure Programming To specify the Operation Type for a Contact Closure 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AH 6 1 3 at extension 10 or
97. for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from extensions before assigning them as fax extensions If an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by PARTNER Messaging or the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines For PARTNER Messaging see the PARTNER Messaging Installation Programming and Troubleshooting Online Guide or the PARTNER Messaging System Manager s Quick Reference for instructions For PARTNER Mail see the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions Fax Machines 9 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To identify a Fax Machine extension 1 Press Feature 0 C System Program System Program A 6 C 1 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Loudspeaker Paging System Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a m
98. four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G on page 8 39 m You can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G on page 8 42 m f Station Lock is used at an extension you cannot dial outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 m If dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension the system may prevent you from placing certain calls at that extension For example you may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so you cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction 315 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 m Use the following features to override dialing restrictions Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dial numbers and System Password 403 m Users with system telephones can enter account codes to track incoming and outgoing calls For more information see Account Code Entry F12 on page 8 2 You also can use Forced Account Code Entry 2307 to identify extensions that must enter account codes prior to dialing outside telephone numbers including those on the Emergency Ph
99. hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 7 Possible Cause 7 Local telephone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from each 206 308EC 400 200 and Endeavor 362EC module in the control unit Then plug each line into a single line telephone and try to make a call m If the trouble occurs on the single line telephone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local telephone company m If the trouble does not occur on the single line telephone the trouble is with your control unit Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Telephone Problems 11 12 Troubleshooting Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions Trouble making outside calls from a pool button can be one of the following situations m You hear nothing at all m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone cuts off when you try to dial m You hear a reorder or busy signal if you try to dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 at intercom dial tone m You notice that the red light next to a pool button is on steady most or all of the time indicating that the pool is busy Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code m If you can ma
100. helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Problems 11 28 Troubleshooting m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 in All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights below m If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover A CAUTION The settings retained in the 1600 DSL module s flash memory become the active settings when Restore Programming has been run or when the power is turned off and back on All Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the ON position O if you have a five slot carrier m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover m If the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 m If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Possible Cause 2 The power outlet is faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio m If the appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fu
101. in slot 1 supplies the system tones and system clocks Placement Within the Carrier If a 1600 DSL module is installed in a 5 slot carrier it must be in the first slot on the left The 012E module can be installed in any remaining slots with the exception that it must be to the left of any 200 and 400 modules These placement guidelines help you avoid holes in the dial plan The 012bE Module 2 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Physical Design The 012E module provides one power LED and 12 extension jack positions see Figure 2 24 Consistent with all other PARTNER ACS modules the extension jacks are labeled from the top down The lowest extension number assigned to an 012E module occupies the jack position closest to the top of the module the highest extension number occupies the jack position closest to the bottom of the module Figure 2 24 The 012E Module Power LED gt Q p EN o nsion El Extension Jacks 12 d A e E o dul The 012E Module 2 32 Installation Connecting the Loudspeaker Paging System Perform the steps in this section if you have a loudspeaker paging system Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area The PARTNER system supports all Avaya paging systems including the entire PagePac line The PARTNER system also supports most paging systems from other manufacturers whe
102. indicator 200 2 0 No longer available for ordering 206E 2 6 You can connect telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Green power indicator No longer available for ordering 206EC 2 6 You can connect telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Supports Caller ID No longer available for ordering System Components 1 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table 1 2 Line Extension Modules Continued Name Line Jacks Extension Jacks Additional Information 362bEC 3 8 Provides 6 ETR and 2 T R extension Endeavor jacks You can connect PARTNER module Endeavor telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks No longer available for ordering 400E 4 0 Green power indicator No longer available for ordering 400EC 4 0 Green power indicator Supports Caller ID 308EC 3 8 You can connect telephones and other Expansion devices such as fax machines and Module modems to the extension jacks Green power indicator Supports Caller ID 1600 DSL 1 0 Although the 1600 DSL module has only Module one line jack it supports up to 16 lines Green power indicator Two touch tone receivers Supports Caller ID T1 Module 1 0 Although the T1 module has only one line jack it supports up to 16 lines Green power indicator Eight touch tone receivers Supports Direct Inward Dialing
103. is removed NOTE If the loudspeaker paging system requires a dry contact relay you must connect the loudspeaker paging system to line jack 5 on the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor 2 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager 3 Connect the other end of the cord to the paging system Figure 9 11 Connecting the Paging System LINE Jack ea pug a T i AAVV Y Paging System optional ER Loudspeaker Paging System 9 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 Use this feature to specify the line jack to which you connected the loudspeaker paging system Considerations Whenever the Loudspeaker Paging Line is added or changed the new line is removed from all Automatic Line Selection lists and pools to which it was assigned If an extension has a line appearance button for that line and no autodial button programmed for 170 the associated line appearance button is converted to an autodial button for an external page If the extension has a line appearance button for that line and an autodial button programmed for 170 the associated line appearance button is erased Programming To specify the line to which the loudspeaker paging system is connected 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 6 1 7 at extension
104. limited warranty on this product Refer to the Lim ited Use Software License Agreement card provided with your package For additional warranty information see the PARTNER Customer Sup port Document Trademarks PARTNER PARTNER MAIL VS PARTNER MAIL MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 MDW 9030P and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the U S and other countries Ordering Information Call Avaya Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Voice 207 866 6701 International Fax 207 626 7269 Write GlobalWare Solutions 200 Ward Hill Avenue Haverhill MA 01835 USA Attention Avaya Account Manager Order Avaya Publications Center Document No 518 456 803 Issue 6 July 2004 For additional documents refer to the PARTNER Customer Support Document Customer Support If you need assistance when programming or using your system con tact your local Authorized Dealer or call the Avaya Customer Care Center at 1 800 628 2888 Consultation charges may apply Obtaining Products See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support Docu ment Avaya Web Page For information about Avaya products and service go to www avaya com For the latest product documentation for PARTNER ACS go to www avaya com support Heritage Statement Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies Inc
105. lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X Figure 9 8 Single Fax Machine Line A PARTNER The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line Fax Machines 9 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a single fax machine 1 Doone ofthe following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X m If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Selection to select line A last on all other extensions or remove line A from all other extensions if they should not use it to make outgoing calls 3 SetLine Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not as
106. long on PARTNER telephones up to 12 characters long on MLS telephones Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Table 5 1 shows the valid character entries for Extension Name Display Table 5 1 Valid Character Entries Letters Numbers A 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 O 63 0 00 C 23 RE 1210 D 31 Qe 72 2 20 ELS R 73 3 2 30 Fe oy S274 4 40 G 241 T281 5250 H 42 U 82 6 60 2 43 V 83 7 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X 92 9 90 Le 38 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 Considerations m You can program a name through Centralized Telephone Programming for any extension regardless of the telephone type on that extension If a user wants to program his or her own extension name he or she must have a system display telephone at that extension m Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports m Program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection Then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Pro
107. m press ODO When you have finished entering the time the display reads Wake Up Call 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to the Wake Up Service Button turns off To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 2 Dialthe two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button 3 Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number 4 Press the Wake Up Service Button to exit 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call 1 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension Tet eoo Wake Up Service Button 115 7 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Wake Up Service Button 115 7 22 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 8 Contents A O TIR T QT tI o TTE 8 1 Extension PrograMM a sasuke m RA RR AERA EROR RR ra e 8 1 a POS Pelee serrr eh recs One ees SKE OF 40 di EATER QUE RH ePi d ig 8 2 Account G de Entry IPIS Lo zs cccee ERRRRESRUEE RES RREISERERELE PERIERE 8 2 CONDITIONS lar EA AA deb edat Var Kc RC E RO AO S 8 2 a Froan AA Se PEERS ee OERER MINEO EORR E It 8 3 a Using Account Code Entry
108. m Caller ID is unavailable on T1 lines The message Direct In Dial or DID is displayed for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID m The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display on system telephones for the duration of the call An out of area message appears if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv appears if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information Caller ID Programming 4 10 Programming System Options If you use SMDR telephone numbers of incoming calls print on call reports after the call is completed provided you have Caller ID Private and out of area numbers are reported as IN on call reports Any users who have access to Caller ID line s receive Caller ID information on their system display telephones You can restrict users from viewing Caller ID information by using the following For ringing calls you can block Caller ID from being displayed at specific extensions by restricting access to the Caller ID lines Use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict access to lines Pooled Access Restriction 315 to restrict access to all lines within a specific pool or both procedures for pooled extensions that have pools and lines For active calls you can activate Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the Caller ID inf
109. number of rings factory setting is three rings You must have a voice messaging system to use VMS Cover and you can use it only from a system telephone Considerations m Program VMS Cover on a button with lights m VMS Cover does not apply to coverage calls forwarded calls group calls parked calls transfer return calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls or voice signaled calls m f Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility you can program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as needed Once a VMS Cover button is programmed you mustuse the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover is assigned m VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension m Use VMS Cover Rings to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system m A user can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox m Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailboxes m If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If the covering extension does not answer the
110. on T1 lines Caller ID Caller ID is available on system display telephones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number and name if available When active on a call you automatically receive Caller ID information for the duration of the call When an extension is idle you receive Caller ID information for a call coming in to your extension This feature requires no special programming however you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules NOTE You receive both the caller s number and name on a two line display telephone while the call is ringing The TransTalk telephones only receive either the caller s number or the caller s name depending on the status of the Caller ID Name Display feature Considerations m The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack on a processor module 206EC module 308EC module or 400EC module m To receive Caller ID information wait until the second ring before answering the call m Individuals with Call Waiting from the local telephone company do not receive Caller ID information for the second call m Notall calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local telephone company When Caller ID information is not captured the system date and day default appears instead
111. on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement m If the telephone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 16 Possible Cause 3 m Ifthe telephone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Possible Cause 4 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the telephone Then plug the cord into a telephone that you know works m If the replacement telephone works the problem telephone is faulty Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement m Ifthe replacement telephone does not work go to Possible Cause 4 Display Shows Only 16 Characters per Line Possible Cause A power outage occurred What to do Unplug the modular telephone cord from the telephone and plug it in again If the display is still incorrect see System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 6 System Telephone Problems 11 6 Troubleshooting Display Is Incorrect Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly What to do Re enter the date and time using System Date 101 and System Time 103 m If the display is correct the problem is solved m Ifthe display is still not correct see System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 6 Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11
112. ona System Telephone Te TSC EGRE VES ALA 8 45 Using Group Pickup on a Single Line Telephone aca gos wears JC c rr ET EECPPPE 8 46 CGonsideralons AAA TOTO TITO A E S a E E 8 46 Using a Hotline Telephone ERS EEEE imine BUND Manual Signaling F13XX OF PIS ICA ee camur RO Rh OR I en Oc m Reis 8 46 DEP oir len TET TEE TET TOT TALI tL T 8 46 a POUM M rU 8 47 a Using Manual Signaling ccc cscs ce eweecdececesuce cr HEXG Rd ececdbansens 8 47 Message Light On FO9XX and Message Light Off F10XX 8 48 s SE idad ridad 8 48 a POMO escri Ra ee bg egg aw GM ER 8 48 a Using Message Light Off ona System Telephone 8 49 a Using Message Light Off on a Single Line Telephone ooo oooooo 8 49 Paging Features TUTTI Gd kd eee di dpa dd sa RA 8 49 A Loudspeaker Paging 170 sss 8 49 a Simultaneous Paging I 70 Eros Aielo A B9 Privacy POTS acordas e o D add e A ai 8 53 e A O E 8 53 OAMI notes o AAA A ee 8 53 s MEI A 31 OE ee ee E EAE GE EIE ORC CR d OR al 8 53 do S A TI 115022 0 A AT EET 8 54 Eta o AA rer 8 54 Ciccio nce RS I RT T T TT TT T TI 8 54 a Using Recall on a System Telephone 00 0c eee eee 8 55 a Using Recall on a Single Line Telephone ooocooccocoococnoo no 8 55 Record a Call F24 O O OS AA OE COEUR CAR ORC RR o OS REOR Re 8 56 E AA Mpimebnauibsqdis qim Emi dx 8 57
113. or ASA DXD You must also configure your system in one of these ways m PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 as a stand alone module m T1 module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots m 1600 DSL module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots m 012E 362EC module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots m 308EC Release 3 0 or later 200 206 400 module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots m 308EC module prior to Release 3 0 in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot at least one 308EC Release 3 0 or later in remaining slots m 308EC module prior to Release 3 0 in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 or later in center slot at least one 308EC 012E 362EC in remaining slots Fax Machines 9 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Manual Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines There are two situations when you want to transfer a call to your fax machine You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep Transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax by using the fax machine that is connected to his or her telephone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to your fax extension T
114. oscar 8 3 j mc Prem 8 5 PER 4 op rior eck TEUER TIS I TIT IET 8 5 e Prog capp rU AAA sees tiawee 8 6 a Using Auto DIUI a ione i EieE Rd rie 8 6 Background Musie Pie avs dqebei d eodd erd dt qM Ea d ROCA Pa RR 8 7 Et poo m mm 8 7 A A dd 8 7 SI Background MUSIC rrr 8 8 Cal Coverages F20 AX AK rka SAO ERAT CR e PO CAO Ec e a 8 8 CONSIASTUONE ueeresseAxaxAq tesqREaPias Q4 AAA AAA AA 8 8 A AAA 8 10 a Using Call Coverage at a System Telephone 0 00 eee eee eee 8 10 Using Call Coverage at a Single Line Telephone o o ooooooo 8 11 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX e cosoimorreroorsiroris nesses 8 11 a COBRE cen AAA 8 11 a ci AA 8 12 a Using Call Forwarding on a System Telephone oooocccccccco 8 13 a Using Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone ooo cooocoo o o 8 13 e A A LL RES 8 14 too AA ce 8 14 a Using Call Park on a System Telephone ocooccooccccccoc eee 8 14 a Using Call Park on a Single Line Telephone ssllsslssessss 8 15 Coll Pig CAA m 8 15 ee ORO acne iue GEO tip Re Uds e exibud d pude ted 8 15 s PIOS escri irrita T TROP PEDE ai 8 16 a Using Call Pickup on a System Telephone 00 0c eee eee eee 8 16 a Using Call Pickup on a Single Line Telephone ooooocccooocooo 8 16 CN Sern TIPS 3254 ETE OR ed Ea es des XOesdq E e pen vdd 6d 1a 8 16 a Considerations AA keserenan A couse te DER
115. power it takes to ring a telephone Each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom NOTED You can connect a tip ring two line device to the system but it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Tip Ring Device Requirements 9 2 Using Auxiliary Equipment Combination Extensions When you connect a tip ring device such as a single line telephone or an answering machine and another piece of equipment either another tip ring device or a system telephone on one extension the extension is called a combination extension If you combine a single line telephone and a system telephone on one extension you may want to turn off the single line telephone s ringer during normal use You cannot install two system telephones on the same extension and the combined REN Ringer Equivalence Number of two devices on one extension cannot exceed 2 0 The REN for a system telephone is 0 0 NOTE You can connect a tip ring device to a system telephone that also has an Intercom Autodialer installed PARTNER telephones have a built in auxiliary jack so you can connect a tip ring device directly to the telephone without using a bridging adapter this is called a direct connection If your telephone does not have a built in auxiliary jack or if you want to connect two tip ring devices together you must use a 267F2 Bridging Adapter Using a Direct
116. press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Programming 4 53 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Pool Line Assignment 207 Use this feature to assign lines to or remove lines from the main and auxiliary pools supported for Hybrid mode You can change line assignments in the main pool 880 or in any of three auxiliary pools 881 882 or 883 Considerations m You can assign some or all outside lines to a specific pool but you cannot assign a specific outside line to more than one pool m Because users cannot control which line they get when they access a pool you should group lines with similar purposes WATS lines FX lines lines designated for a particular set of users together in a unique pool m f you have individual lines assigned to a pooled extension and you use this feature to change pool line assignment do not press Next Data or Prev Data to specify a pool assignment If you do the system removes that line from all extensions that have the line assigned m You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools created with this feature to specific extensions m f you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all lines in a specific pool you must restrict the extension by using Pool Access Restriction 315 m You cannot place the Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 into a
117. setting v m 2 Outgoing Only 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Top of Page 609 Use this feature to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper clearing a jam or to print a new header after changing SMDR Output Format or SMDR Talk Time When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Considerations m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly m You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program SMDR Top of Page 1 Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page 2 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 6 O 9 The system responds by printing the call report page header 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Output Format 610 Use this feature to specify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers in the Number field on the call report The longer field is useful for businesses such as law offices and hotels that need to record many digits for outgoing calls for billing purposes Before changin
118. slots 1600 DSL module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots 012E 362EC module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots 308EC Release 3 0 or later 200 206 400 module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining slots 308EC module prior to Release 3 0 in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot at least one 308EC Release 3 0 or later in remaining slots 308EC module prior to Release 3 0 in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot at least one 308EC 012E 362EC in remaining slots m When lines appear on a fax extension make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this Set the fax machine for delayed pickup Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to either delayed ring or no ring Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension this is the recommended way m Incoming fax detection is activated automatically by assigning extensions to Hunt Group 8 m Ifa PARTNER MAIL system is connected to the system and fax detection is being done via PARTNER MAIL no extensions should be assigned to Hunt Group 8 Fax Machines 9 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment m If there are no touch tone receivers capable of detecting a CNG tone the c
119. specific extensions For example if five lines were assigned to all extensions using Number of Lines 104 and there are eight lines in the system use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 6 7 and 8 to specific extensions After you finish Line Assignment use Line Ringing to identify when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing If you add a line to the system its factory setting is Immediate Ring Use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts the handset or turns on the speaker to make a call If you add a line to the system it becomes the last line in the selection sequence Programming To assign lines to a specific extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 O 1 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press MO The red light next to each button that has a line assigned is on steady the red light next to each button that has a pool assigned flashes To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line Enter the line number to be assigned For example to select line 1 press OO Do one of the following m f you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights press until the display reads Line Assignment 15 L01 1 Assigned 1 Assigned is the fac
120. system telephone 8 55 Recall Button description 8 54 switchhook use instead of 6 11 Recall Timer Duration 4 55 Index Recall Timer Duration 107 4 55 Record a Call 8 56 using 8 57 Redial save number 8 59 Redialing features 8 57 release finding release number 11 2 Release 6 0 features 1 3 Remote Administration Password 4 56 Remote Call Forwarding description 8 60 using single line telephone 8 63 system telephone 8 62 Remote Call Forwarding 316 4 57 remote use of the system A 6 REN see Ringer Equivalent Number 9 2 reports A 9 requirements electrical 2 2 out of building installations 2 3 Resetting the System 4 62 resetting the system retaining programming 4 62 Restore problems 11 25 Restore Problems 11 22 Restore Programming 4 7 calls in progress effect on 4 7 restoring system programming 4 4 restricting access 4 50 Restriction line access 302 4 23 outgoing call 401 4 25 Restrictions Dialing emergency phone numbers 4 21 locking an extension 8 69 PBX Centrex services with 3 18 Retrieving a Held Call 8 45 Ring on Transfer 4 58 Ring on Transfer 119 4 58 Ring pattern 4 67 Ringer Volume Controls 6 3 Ringing Abbreviated 305 4 2 line 5 5 transfer 6 7 8 76 ringing changing patterns 4 30 lines 5 5 ring pattern 4 67 Transfer return number of rings 4 67 Ringing Patterns single line telephones 6 11 system telephones 6 7 ringing patterns 4 30 ringing
121. system telephone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See programming for Outgoing Call Restriction for information below If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed telephone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code If you want to restrict the use of star codes include them in the Disallowed Phone Number Lists Programming To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 4 O 1 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed To change the type of call restriction press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction can make toll local and intercom calls this is the factory setting v m 2 Inside intercom Only m 3 Local intercom and local Only To program another extension press Next tem or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Mode 4201 Use this feature to identify individual lines as touch tone or rotary Check with your local telephone company if you are not sure which
122. talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system telephone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G 8 44 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Group Pickup 166G Use this feature to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group you can answer the call at any extension without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system telephone to pick up calls in a Pickup Group with one touch Programming To program a Group Pickup button 1 Press Feature O 0 Press a program
123. telephones have only four buttons available for lines pools and or Auto Dial numbers A combined total of 800 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Auto Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services on page 3 17 for more information You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Call Park Message Light On Message Light Off Station Unlock and Voice Mailbox Transfer To set up a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine status Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 You can include special functions such as a pause in the Auto Dial number An Auto Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting You cannot use Auto Dialing with Call Screening F25 Auto Dialing 8 5 PARTNERS Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program an Auto Dial button 1
124. the product 8 DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak NcAurION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots or openings they prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided DO NOT place the product flat on a surface The control unit must be wall mounted SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Master Table of Contents 1 Overview a Me T sectads 1 1 m udi ds FONT NE O ON TT 1 2 o 1l A 1 3 MES of Oper NR 1 3 e s T 1 5 e TRENT 1 7 2 Installation RU D MN e H 2 1 Evaluating the iren Met 2 2 Installing the Control Mii fe E E 2 4 Connecting Lines and Eden in 2 16 ji Xu o fet er eer ee ey 2 18 The 1600 DSL MOGULS a a 2 24 ij 1053 MS ri iii pas 2 31 Connecting the Loudspeaker Paging SysteM oooooccccnoncccconaccccncconancnnnnannccnnnnnnnnnnnnno 2 33 maalina 2 A 2 34 fu CINE ut PRI A ATE E FRA 2 34 Connecting Auxiliary Equipment esee iota terri ebd arto PEE Sete Ep E Ro IUE t bU I eS MO IE OS S Mtis 2 41 3 Initial System Programming A EE EI DELE M I E 3 1 Programming s PARTNER System iaa 3 1 IA Programming BA Dom 3 3 Bang System Programm suicida aliadas 3 4 Using Centralized Teleph
125. the Reports menu on the terminal emulation program From the Main Menu press 1 and then C On the second page under the SDSL interface ONLINE should appear if the 1600 DSL module has successfully synced to the service provider s gateway If ENABLED appears the module has not successfully synced with the gateway 3 If the 1600 DSL module still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Problems with the 1600 DSL Module 11 18 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 2 The data link ATM or Frame Relay is not established What to do Follow these steps to check the data link connection 1 3 Check the status of the data link If the Data Link is established one of the following appears on the terminal screen m For ATM SDSL ATM Interface ONLINE Data Rate 2320 kbps m For Frame Relay SDSL Frame Relay Interface ONLINE Data Rate 2320 kbps Slower speed connections show a different speed If neither of these messages appears a short time after the SDSL light transitions from flashing to solid the data link has not been established Do the following a Verify that the data link protocol is what the service provider specified from the Main Menu select 5 then 1 and then 1 The data link protocol appears next to the label Current Data Link Protocol It is set for Frame Relay or ATM b Verify the DLCI frame relay or VCI VPI settings are identical to those that the service provider provid
126. the combination of modules installed determine the number of available lines and extensions PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 systems allow up to 31 lines and up to 48 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously System Capacity 1 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table 1 1 Configuration Release 7 0 Capacities Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand alone 2 slot carrier 5 slot carrier 5 lines 9 extensions PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module 21 lines 9 extensions PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module and T1 module 31 lines 25 extensions PARTNER ACS H7 0 processor module T1 module or 1600 DSL module two 308EC modules and one 400 module 9 extensions 5 lines PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module 21 extensions 5 lines PARTNER ACS H7 0 processor module and 012E module 45 extensions 21 lines PARTNER ACS R7 0 Processor module T1 module or 1600 DSL module and three 012E modules OH 48 extensions 11 lines PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module two 308EC modules and two 012E modules NOTES In Release 7 0 the system extension maximum is 48 However in some configurations the 012E module and or the PARTNER Messaging module will physically permit more than 48 stations to be installed in the 5 slot carrier In these configurations only station ports and voice messaging ports up to 48 will function Station ports and voice messaging
127. the lines in a different order first use this procedure to remove all assigned lines then assign lines in the desired order This procedure applies to key extensions or to individual lines on pooled extensions Figure 4 1 Default Line Assignments p 11 EN HN 00 00 00 dg ud o N EH 00 BH ug mg pe 00 00 ag ud ng 00 ug dg ug 00 00 nu oo OO dg oo 0O ua SS OO ng ug 00 go nd m x lt rt O Message Intercom Intercom Line Assignment 301 4 46 Programming System Options Considerations You cannot assign a line that belongs to a pool as an individual line on that pooled extension A line must be assigned to a button with lights If a line is assigned to a button without lights you cannot access that line nor can you program anything else on the button You can assign multiple lines up to 31 to a standard telephone but a single line telephone can handle only one call at a time To make a call you lift the handset and dial 9 at the intercom dial tone the system selects the first available line based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for the extension Alternatively you can use Direct Line Pickup to access a specific line Use Number of Lines 104 only during initial system setup to assign a subset of lines to all extensions Use Line Assignment to assign additional lines to
128. the password Allowed List Assignments Disallowed Phone Number Lists Dial 4 0 8 Dial 0 Dial a system extension Dial a list amp 1 8 Dial a list 1 8 Dial a list entry 01 10 Dial 1 Assigned To add entry 2 Not Assigned Y Dial the telephone up to 12 digits Press to program another list Press To program another extension Press to remove a list entry Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter Press io program anoiher listenin a new extension amp repeat above steps To program another list Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new list 8 repeat above steps Forced Account Code List Disallowed List Assignments Dial 0 9 Dial Z 4 0 5 Dial a list 01 99 Dial a system extension To add entry Dial a list 1 8 Dial the account code up to 6 digits Dial 1 Assigned Press 2 Not Assigned Y Press to program another list To program another extension Press Vext Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps Press to remove a list entry Press to program another list Emergency Phone Number Lists Star Code Dial Delay Dial AOAO Dial AOO Dial a list 01 10 Dial 020 Seconds Delay Y To add entry 121 Second Delay Dial the telephone up to 12 digits 2 2 Seconds Delay Press 3 3 Seconds Delay 4 4 Seconds Delay Press to remove a list entry 5 5 Seconds Delay Press to prog
129. the telephone cord into the LINE jack on the bottom of the telephone 6 Wrap any excess cord around the cord wrap posts on the bottom inside of the stand NOTE With certain telephones you can wall mount the telephone and use the slide tray and tray card Do one of the following If you have an 18 18D 34D or Intercom Autodialer telephone remove the tray from the desk end of the stand and insert it into the wall end If a 630B wall plate is used the tray hangs down from the telephone If you do not use the wall plate with the 18 18D and 34D telephones the tray can slide under the set To do this two mounting holes on the left and right sides of the stand allow the tray to slide underneath 7 To mount the telephone onto the stand insert the tabs on the top of the stand into the middle set of notches on the top edge of the telephone see Figure 2 32 8 Make sure the telephone cord is neatly wrapped inside the telephone then rotate the telephone down until the bottom edge snaps into position Installing Telephones 2 38 Figure 2 31 Plugging in the Telephone Cord Figure 2 32 Mounting the Telephone onto the Stand 9 10 Remove the plastic cover from the telephone see Figure 2 33 Label the button sheet to show any programmed lines or button features Then place the button sheet on the telephone so the holes fit over the butt
130. the telephones have some or all of the following Intercom Buttons Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension in the system If you receive a call on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID and you cannot access that line from the line or pool buttons on your telephone the call will appear on your Intercom button Press the button to answer this outside call Feature Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Conference Press to add other parties to your call Transfr Transfer Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold Spkr Speaker Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature Volume Control Buttons Press to decrease or to increase the volume as follows m Toadjust ringer volume press while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker m To adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset m To adjust background music volume press while listening to music through the telephone s speaker
131. the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 m Night Service is ignored on T1 lines with DID Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 O 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Toassign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting Y 4 To assign or unassign another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pickup Group Extensions 501 Use this feature to assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature helps when a user needs to answer calls on lines or pools not assigned to his or her telephone The system supports up to four Pickup Groups Considerations m You can assign an extension to as many as four different Pickup Groups m You can assign extensions where extra alerts such as a loud bell are installed to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call m For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup I66G on page 8 45 Programming To
132. to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do If one of the telephones involved is a single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Single Line Telephone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The telephone is part of a combination extension which includes a system telephone that has Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system telephone has Background Music on A single line telephone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system telephone m f Background Music is on turn it off If the single line telephone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved m f Background Music is not on go to Possible Cause 2 Single Line Telephone Problems 11 10 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 2 The single line telephone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system What to do Only telephones with LEDs not neon lights support message waiting lights m If the telephone has a neon light you can use it without message waiting capability m If the telephone has an LED message waiting light go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The single line telephone is not connected to the proper module What to do Make sure the telephone is connected to a proces
133. touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by telephone service You can use Touch Tone Enable only from a system telephone Considerations m Touch Tone Enable is needed only when dialing on a rotary line m Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected For example use this feature after dialing a bank by telephone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits m You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system telephone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch m You cannot use Touch Tone Enable with Call Screening F25 m To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press when storing the number Programming To program a Touch Tone Enable button 1 Press feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press Feature 0 8 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Touch Tone Enable From a system telephone press the programmed button or press Feature 0 8 when you need to enter touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up Touch Tone Enable F08 8 71 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use VMS Cover F15 Use this feature to program a button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for users extensions to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified
134. use this feature while using Call Screening F25 m While a TransTalk telephone is ringing you can use Caller ID Name Display to pre select Caller ID name or Caller ID number to appear on the display m Caller ID information is unavailable on T1 lines Programming To program a Caller ID Name Display button 1 Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button with lights 2 3 Press Feature 1 6 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Caller ID Name Display Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on press it again to turn it off Caller ID Features 8 26 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Cell Phone Connect F11 Use this feature to forward all intercom transferred and outside calls from your extension to an outside telephone number This outside number must be programmed to a Personal Speed Dial code for your extension Unlike the Remote Call Forwarding the incoming call will ring at both the outside telephone number you specify and your extension allowing to you answer the call at your extension or have the call answered by the coverage for your extension for example your voice mail system You activate this feature from your extension or from extension 10 or 11 When Cell Phone Connect is active all calls that ring at the extension are forwarded to the telephone number programmed to the specified Personal Speed Dial code As soon as th
135. want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers You can create up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each A Disallowed Phone Number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 X and the wildcard character displayed as Considerations m After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions m To restrict dialing specific telephone numbers enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 press 5 5 5 5 6 7 8 m To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 900 1900 or 0900 depending on the Toll Call Prefix required This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 20 Programming System Options m To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when a toll prefix is required see Table 4 1 The table uses exchange 976 as the example Table 4 1 Preventing Dialing of Numbers in One Exchange When Toll Prefix Required Entry Restriction 976 Prevents local calls 11976 Prevents direct dial calls to t
136. want to manually assign a range of DID numbers to a range of extensions hunt groups calling groups a C In the first DID No box enter a DID number You can only enter each DID number once in the DID Mapping Table From the corresponding Extension Hunt Call Group box select the extension hunt group or calling group you want to map to the DID number You can map an extension hunt group or calling group to multiple DID numbers Repeat Steps a and b for each DID number e From the DID Backup Destination box select the backup extension that will receive DID calls that do not match any of the entries in the DID Mapping Table 9 Program the other features such as extension features and restrictions you want See the procedures in Program PARTNER Features in a PC Administration File in the online help 10 Save the file Select Save from the File menu to save your changes to the file 11 Program the settings in this file to the PARTNER system a Make sure you are connected to the PARTNER system b From the Administration menu select Send System Information The Open dialog box appears The T1 Module 2 22 Installation Select the translation file you want to send to the PARTNER system and click the Open button The PARTNER System Translation Send status box appears showing the status of the transfer When the transfer is complete a message box appears stating that the transfer was successful
137. you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number For system telephones and most single line telephones you can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns System display telephones can also display the type of call that is ringing at the extension See Ringing Patterns on page 6 7 There are no unique ringing patterns for coverage calls or forwarded calls You can join a call in progress at another extension as long as Privacy F07 is not on for that extension see Joining Calls on page 6 30 You can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at any extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup I6XX on page 8 15 and Group Pickup I66G on page 8 45 You can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user s telephone You can program the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 feature on a button with lights to respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 on page 4 68 You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify single line telephone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone and a second incoming call Handling Calls 6 20 Using the Telephones Answering Calls Ringing at Your Extension The way you answer a call varies depending on whether you are u
138. 0 eee eee 11 6 a Display Shows Only 16 Characters per Line 0 2 cee eee 11 6 Es SINISE eT tera rre ae 11 7 a Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11d o oococoooococooo 11 7 Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number 000000000 ee 11 7 Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information brbesad 11 8 mo Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information 11 8 a Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display CERRAR AA 11 8 a Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly lt lt lt 11 8 a Record a Call Light is Always Red Steady and po EI uil e TD 11 9 a MLC 6 Telephone Does Not Ring cesse RR RR RR RR 11 9 Single Line Telephone Problems poem cia 11 9 a Single Line Telephone Does Not Ring sllslleeellsseeslneess 11 9 a Single Line Telephone Rings Back after Intercom Call with No One at Other End islsllsllessessssss 11 10 a Single Line Telephone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light 11 10 Other Telephone Problems eaves Tm omm Tm eee 11 11 a Trouble Making Outside Calls sordos RA HEREWE ER RO EK ROC Y a 11 11 Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions cri IRAN 11 13 Calls Are Answered Automatically ym TO PI 11 14 Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer 0 0000 eee eee ees 11
139. 001 9 4 Answering Machines iuuacsniesRRRRESERIEGERRRER ERA poi Be ches 9 4 a System Answering Machine iuoueesenenceqrese RERO RS RR EE ER ORE RE REA 9 5 a Personal Answering Machine 222 ccecccesed se eta beotedeeeeebadsesedes 9 6 Auto Attendant TET ET bbb ds sa 98 x Using an AU PEDE a erede Pe DR OO CHER Q Fare RP RC eee 9 8 a Programming iti dd ded b SEE ves dedhhseGs dodo o ad bd ebd sa 9 8 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 2607 ooooooomooooooo 9 8 a Considerations ETC E TESI PLURES 9 9 Murau gg fep vr rrrrrm 9 9 Contact Closure AA 9 10 a Connecting the Contact Closure Adjunct igh ek aaa as EET TT 9 11 Contact Closure Group EIS Lua esae reeE REC RTI ORA EO ERR RETE RIG 9 12 Contact Closure Operation Type H613 oooocooccoroccn ooo 9 13 ee A ech eogscbcetUbacesGghe ce 9 14 a Using Credit Card OAMI esper 4 RO EA FI E ORCI LO ER LS 9 14 Programming Credit Card Scanners rd 9 14 Doonhone PIDEN scared ib ii e er Reden 9 15 a Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 ooooooooooronomomnmmmo 9 18 a Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 oooocoococccc eee 9 16 FOE OBERE vc fur ae FORCE Ea ERSEVER EPIA 4E e ARA es 9 17 a Preventing Inappropriate Fax Answering lt ooooooooorrooooos 9 17 a Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine 0 000 9 17 a Setting Up Fax MaehinBe 226 c2cccecieeceeicsiascusce b
140. 08 5 5 5 1234 Next Prev Dial More On the Telephone Number Display the newest call in the log is shown The log shows the calls in last in first out order An Out of Area message appears if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A Privacy message appears if the caller blocked transmission of Caller ID information A No Number message displays if no information was received Caller ID Features 8 22 Programming amp Using Telephone Features You have several options at the Telephone Number Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Telephone Number Display of the previous log record m Press the Dial button to dial the telephone number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the caller s name At the Name Display shown in Figure 8 3 the caller s name is shown If the caller s name is not available one of the following messages displays m AnOut of Area message appears if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID m APrivacy message appears if the caller blocked transmission of Caller ID information m ANo Name message appears if no information was received Figure 8 3 Caller ID Name Display James Jones Next Prev Dial More
141. 1 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary m The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation Programming To change the System Time 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 1 O 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter a new time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press OOOO A display similar to the following appears System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15 p Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes Turn this feature off if you live in an area without daylight savings time Programming To change the status of Automatic Daylight Standard Time 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 Z2 G at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active the factory setting v m 2 Not Active Select another procedure or exit programming mode Setting the Date and Time 3 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Administering the Loudspeaker Paging System Use the feature Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 to specify the line jack to which you connected the loudspeaker paging syste
142. 1 XX XX 8 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call is not forwarded If the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off An extension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is set to No Restriction or In Only If an extension in a Hunt Group activates Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system If an extension has Call Coverage
143. 1 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List Programming To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program A a O 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Selecta list entry 01 10 A display similar to the following appears Emergency List 03 Data Enter the telephone number 4 To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter 5 Doone ofthe following m To enter other telephone numbers press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Emergency Phone Number List 406 3 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Emergency Phone Number List 406 3 20 Programming System Options 4 Contents A A I TET IL T TU TII IT LITE 4 1 Abbreviated Ringing 305 isis khe rascar Kase AA 4 2 CER O0 S p AA Re o4e Rd teak ORO RES Ree bee 4 2 SEO NG Ludo od eec Opis uad L e ia ed ewe qued u quiu 4 2 All Lines Busy Event M Cua ep M P s 4 3 a OTIS 10 27 0001 ERRADA AENA A 4 3 ProgaMMNO ee AAN IAN 4 3 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 22 ccesccd eet RI RET a A 4 3 m
144. 11 2 Atthe Contact Number prompt enter the number 1 or 2 for the Contact Closure The display shows the current setting for that Contact Closure 3 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value appears or press to return to the default setting m 1 1 Second On m 2 3 Seconds On the factory setting wv m 3 5 Seconds On m 4 Toggle 4 To assign the Operation Type for the other Contact Closure press Next item or Prev item and repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Contact Closure Adjunct 9 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system as shown in Figure 9 7 You can install the credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a telephone on the same extension see Combination Extensions on page 9 3 Figure 9 7 Credit Card Scanner Using Credit Card Scanners When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outside line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a telephone you cannot use the telephone while the credit card scanner is operating Programming Credit Card Scanners To program the system for a credit card scanner 1 Doone ofthe foll
145. 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time you should use extension 11 for programming By doing so you can program without disrupting call handling at extension 10 m Telephone Programming allows telephones to be customized to meet individual users needs There are two types of Telephone Programming depending from where you program Centralized Telephone Programming programming individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 Extension Programming programming an individual system telephone from the extension to which it is connected You need a system display telephone for System and Centralized Telephone Programming If you have any 34 button telephones in the system you must use a 34 button display telephone to program An 18 button telephone cannot be used to program a 34 button telephone Also if your System has both PARTNER and MLS telephones you should use a PARTNER display telephone at the programming extension NOTED Endeavor telephones are supported in PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier The Endeavor telephones are programmed the same as PARTNER 34D 18D 18 and 6 telephones and have the same button layouts NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which is a PCMCIA card that allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions You must
146. 11 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter If not you can call for help f you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your local Authorized Dealer or call the helpline Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your local Authorized Dealer If you call have the following information ready so that the representative can better help you m The kind of system you have for example PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 7 0 To determine the release number press Feature 5 9 at any display telephone m The number of lines and extensions in your system m The type of telephone system or single line and the model number if applicable System telephone model numbers are located either on the upper right hand corner of the telephone or on the dialpad overlay m f you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did System Release Status F59 When calling for customer support you need to know the release level of your system This feature enables you to determine that information at any system display telephone A display similar to the following appears P ACS R7 0 C01 This message indicates that this is Release 7 0 of the
147. 1600 DSL Module 2 30 Installation 11 Type the gateway address given by the service provider at the Enter Gateway address for Default Route prompt and press Enter 12 Type Y at the Save this as the default route in the static configuration prompt 13 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu NOTED For any changes you make to take effect you must perform a cold start on the system by powering down and powering up the system or by using the Restore Programming 125 or System Reset Programming Saved 728 feature The 012E Module The 012E module provides 12 ETR extensions and no lines All ports support full T R capability along with ETR The 012E module provides the capability for PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 to support a maximum of 48 extensions NOTED There is no limitation on the number of 012E modules that can be installed in a 5 slot carrier However in some configurations the 012E module will physically permit more than 48 extensions to be installed For example if four 012E modules and one processor module are installed in the carrier there are 56 extensions present In configurations where more than 48 extensions are present only extensions up to 48 stations will function Station ports above 48 will not function with ETR or T R telephones because they are outside the PARTNER ACS dial plan The 012E module provides the following m 10 Touch Tone Receivers TTRs m Support for Fax CNG detection m When installed
148. 2 Do one of the following m lochange the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 m To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remove m To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press Next item or Prev item until the new hotline extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 Use this feature to determine the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone NOTE Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Programming To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 O 9 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Intercom Dial Tone 309 4 44 Programming System Options Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Regular dial tone the factory setting v m 2 Machine outside line dial tone To program another extension press Next
149. 2 If all outside lines in the pool are busy the system selects an idle intercom line However you can change the order to accommodate a different automatic line selection For example your boss prefers her individual line line 15 to be selected when she lifts the handset then she wants auxiliary pool 881 to be selected which is used for making international calls To do this set Automatic Line Selection to 15 881 Intercom Required Telephone Programming 5 2 Initial Telephone Programming If a single line telephone user intends to place intercom calls and access system features Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension should be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a single line telephone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on Line 1 would be Intercom 1 Considerations If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must manually select a line or pool after entering a required account code m For an extension identified as a Hotline 603 or Doorphone Extension 2604 4605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence m Foran extension identified as an External Hotline 311 program the extension to select outside lines or pools first m For single line touch tone or rotary telephones or for any tel
150. 2 7 Tightening the Bottom Screw Installing the Control Unit 2 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Wall Mounting a 5 Slot Carrier and Modules Install the 5 slot carrier within 5 feet 1 5 meters of a properly grounded wall outlet not controlled by a switch and the network interface jacks When you mount the carrier on the wall leave at least 1 foot 0 3 meter of clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom to ensure proper ventilation NOTE The location of each module within the carrier is important place the modules as instructed in the following procedure For a 5 slot carrier you need four 12 screws of the appropriate type for the wall and weight of the control unit a control unit with four expansion modules and a processor module weighs approximately 31 pounds or 14 kilograms The weight of other configurations may vary slightly Follow these steps to wall mount the 5 slot carrier and modules Figure 2 8 Mounting Screw Locations 1 Using the enclosed template mark the screw Carrier e locations on the wall see Figure 2 8 If you are mounting the carrier on plywood start four 12 screws supplied with the carrier leaving the screw heads extending approximately 1 4 inch 0 64 cm from the wall If you are mounting on drywall use wall anchors which must be purchased separately 2 Before installin
151. 28 4 62 System Reset Programming Saved 4 7 4 62 System Restore problems 11 25 Bad File Try Again 11 25 Empty File 11 25 Incompatible Versions 11 25 Insert Valid Card 11 25 Restore Complete but calls disconnected 11 26 Restore Failed Try Again 11 26 settings reverted to default settings 11 26 system settings changing 10 16 System Speed Dial 4 63 8 67 using single line telephone 8 67 system telephone 8 67 system telephone problems 11 5 11 9 System Telephones using 6 1 System telephones connecting to tip ring devices 9 3 speaker 6 9 System Time 3 11 System Time 103 3 11 T1 lines Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 27 T1 module configuring 3 9 description 2 18 Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 27 initial configuration 2 19 3 9 telephone cords connecting 2 17 IN 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use telephone problems single line telephones 11 9 system telephones 11 5 display characters 11 6 display shows low power 11 7 does not work 11 6 incorrect display 11 7 Intercom Autodialer 11 8 MLC 6 telephone does not ring 11 9 no Caller ID display 11 7 no Caller ID information 11 8 noringing 11 5 Priv instead of Caller ID 11 8 Record a Call not working 11 9 Telephone Programming auto dial buttons 7 1 8 5 centrally at extension 10 or 11 3 8 options 3 16 telephone programming 3 3 Telephone Programming Required progr
152. 3 Extension continued swapping 10 18 transfer return 4 66 Extension 10 11 3 3 5 1 button locations for programming 3 6 programming from 3 3 programming overlays using with 3 4 Extension Name Display 5 4 8 38 Extension Programming 3 3 8 1 Extension Transfer Return 306 4 66 extensions adding new extensions 10 18 assigning Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 20 assigning to a Hunt Group 4 36 assigning to a Pickup Group 4 40 assigning to Night Service Group 4 39 copying settings 4 17 customizing 3 16 dial tone 4 44 External Hotline 4 31 identifying as owner of an outside line 4 48 identifying as Auto Attendant 9 8 identifying as fax machines 9 25 identifying as key extensions 4 45 identifying for doorphone connection 9 16 identifying to activate Contact Closure 9 12 identifying to receive doorphone signal 9 15 internal hotline 4 43 line ringing 5 5 locking 8 68 name display 5 4 placing into a Calling Group 4 35 receiving Voice Interrupt On Busy calls 4 68 restricting access to pool 4 50 returning Transfer calls 4 65 swapping extensions 10 18 Transfer returning to a different extension 4 66 External Hotline 4 31 using 8 39 External Hotline 4311 4 31 Fax CNG Detection 9 23 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 9 23 fax line saver 9 20 Fax Machine Extensions 9 25 Fax Machine Extensions 601 9 25 Fax Machines end and receive 9 18 line saver 9 18 programming for 8 5 9 25 si
153. A 10 Special Characters You can add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers and Auto Dial numbers see Table B 1 Table B 1 Special Characters Function Button Display Description Pause P Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Recall R Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number T1 lines ignore Recall Stop S Stops the dialing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press the Auto Dial button or and the two or three digit Speed Dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an MLC 6 or a TransTalk 9000 series phone since it has no button Touch Tone T Sends touch tones over a rotary line to electronic equipment Enable such as answering machines and bank computers Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually NOTE Do not use special characters with the Cell Phone Connect and Remote Call Forwarding features B 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Examples Pause To call an
154. ARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Wake Up Service Button 115 Use this feature to program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to schedule wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Considerations m You must program a Wake Up Service Button on the system display telephone at extension 10 m You must program Wake Up Service on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights m A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the next day you must reschedule the call m Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or six rings m Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones m Wake up time is based on System Time 103 m f users answer a wake up call they hear Music On Hold 602 if it is Active If Music On Hold is Not Active users hear silence m Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at the extension m Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the extension the calls are not forwarded m Wake up calls that are not answered
155. ARTNER ACS fall into two categories m System telephones telephones specifically designed to work with the PARTNER ACS m Single line telephones touch tone or rotary telephones fax machines card scanners modems etc System Telephones System telephones include the following m PARTNER telephones PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 m MLS telephones m MLC 6 m TransTalk 9000 series wireless telephones PARTNER ACS 7 0 supports PARTNER Endeavor telephones when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier The Endeavor telephones include m PARTNER Endeavor 34D m PARTNER Endeavor 18D m PARTNER Endeavor 18 m PARTNER Endeavor 6 PARTNER system telephones have a built in auxiliary jack to which you can connect a single line telephone See Combination Extensions on page 9 3 Only the PARTNER telephones are discussed in this guide see Chapter 6 Using the Telephones For information about an MLS MLC TransTalk 9000 series or PARTNER Endeavor telephone refer to the documentation that came with the telephone Intercom Autodialers PARTNER telephones support the PARTNER CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11 The autodialer provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your System The status lights next to each button also indicate calling activity at that extension You can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling
156. AVAYA PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 518 456 803 Issue 6 July 2004 Document Number 518 456 803 Issue 6 Date July 2004 Copyright 2004 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equip ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This system is Class B compliant in some configurations See the PARTNER Customer Support Document for additional FCC informa tion Canadian Department of Communication DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Can
157. Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To identify an external hotline extension T 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQQ at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline telephone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 c RON Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number of the external hotline Press Feature 8 0 Enter the external hotline telephone number exactly as you would dial it Continue programming or exit programming mode External Hotline 311 4 32 Programming System Options Forced Account Codes When you set up forced account codes on the system users at specific extensions must enter an account code before they can dial outside calls Setting up forced account codes involves two features Forced Account Code Entry and optionally Forced Account Code List See Account Code Entry F12 on page 8 2 for instructions on entering forced account codes at a telephone Forced Account
158. Automatic is set to Active Internal or Active PC Card the information is backed up at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month determined by the system date and time settings to either the internal memory of the processor module or a Backup Restore PC Card If Backup Programming Automatic is Active Internal or Active PC Card and an automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the system date and time on the top line of the telephone display at idle Extensions 10 and 11 The message is one of the following m Backup FailediMemory Err m Backup Failed Check Card m Backup Failed SystemBusy m Backup Failed InsertCard See Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for an explanation of these messages and suggested corrective actions and for the procedure for clearing the Backup Failure Alarm message Programming To change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 1 If you want to back up to a PC Card check that only one Backup Restore PC Card is in the processor module If you do not have a PC Card installed see Using a PC Card on page 10 2 or refer to the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions that came with your PC Card 2 Press feature 0 O System Program System Program amp 1 Z 3 at extension 10 or 11 The current setting appears Backup and Restore 4 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 To change the setti
159. C doped o edad 2 34 a Connecting and Testing Telephones bsp suas bgag qx dress 299 a Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer TT 2 40 Connecting Auxiliary Equipment suieesorudaeRkk Rer EY re RR ReCRERE REY 2 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Installation Overview This chapter explains how to install the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS Release 7 0 The installation of the PARTNER ACS involves the following m Evaluating the environmental requirements m Installing the control unit m Connecting lines and extensions m Installing telephones m Connecting auxiliary equipment If your company already has modular jacks for all outside lines and extensions you may be able to use the existing wiring to install the system hardware and connect telephones to the system yourself Overview 2 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Evaluating the Environment Before you begin the physical installation of the system you must check that all environmental factors are within the acceptable ranges as shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Specification Value Environmental Requirements Control Unit Electrical Requirements Control Unit Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5
160. Call Restriction setting of a conference room telephone from Local Only which prevents users from making long distance calls to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance Considerations You must program an Outgoing Call Restriction Button on the system telephone at extension 10 You must program Outgoing Call Restriction 114 on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction Button and the telephone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction Button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 7 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction Button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 4401 to change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button You should use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system telephone at extension 10 provi
161. Cause You attempted to restore a file that was created with an incompatible software release What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again by using a backup file that was created with the current software release Problems with System Restore 11 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode NOTE This display indicates that all system and telephone programming has reverted to the default settings Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the restore was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the Backup Restore PC Card reapply power to the system and restart the Restore Programming 125 procedure Possible Cause 2 The backup file is corrupted What to do Retry the Restore Programming 125 procedure If you get the same result try again by using a different backup file from the same Backup Restore PC Card or a file from a different Backup Restore PC Card Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards System Programming Settings Reverted to Default Settings Possible Cause You ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure but the restore failed What to do See Possible Causes 1 and 2 under Display Shows Restore Failed T
162. Code Entry 307 NOTED This feature applies only to system telephones Forced Account Code Entry identifies extensions at which users must enter an account code before making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client Considerations You can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code at a Forced Account Code Entry extension You can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List You can enter account codes manually or by using System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers or Auto Dialing but not Marked System Speed Dial numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with Forced Account Code Eniry you must manually select a line or pool after entering an account code Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension If a System Password 403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension you must enter it before entering the account code If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports If a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report You do not need a forced account code to answer incoming calls Forced Account Codes 4 33 PARTNER Advan
163. Connection You can connect a tip ring device directly to a system telephone by plugging the cord from the tip ring device into the AUX jack on the bottom of the system telephone see Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Combination Extension Using Direct Connection System Phone Plug line into E jack labeled LINE Sel ae s into jack labele d AUX Combination Extensions 9 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using a Bridging Adapter You can connect a system telephone and a tip ring device or two tip ring devices by using a 267F2 Bridging Adapter Connect the system telephone and or the tip ring device s according to Figure 9 2 Figure 9 2 Combination Extension Using Bridging Adapter 267F2 Standard Device Only __ System Phone or Standard Device If a Device Has Trouble If a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out use two System Programming features to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls use Distinctive Ring 308 to change the ringing so that all calls ring like outside calls at that extension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 to change the intercom dial tone for the extension to
164. Continued Line Access Mode Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Pooled Y all extensions except 10 2 Key Y extension 10 only Press to program another extension Pool Extension Assignment Dial Dial a system extension to remove existing pool assignments press before selecting a line Dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 Dial 1 Assigned Y 880 2 Not Assigned Y 881 882 883 3 Select Button then press a programmable button auxiliary pools only Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps Pool Access Restriction Dial Dial a system extension Dial a pool number 880 881 882 or 883 Dial 1 No Restriction Y 2 Outgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access Press to program another pool To program another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter a new extension amp repeat above steps Call Waiting Dial 6 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next ltem to program another extension Caller ID Log Answered Calls Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y Press Next Item to program another extension Caller ID Log Line Association Dial Dial a system extension Dial a system line Press Next Item to program another extension To associate another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension and repeat above
165. D DEC e Y viii Master TOC Overview 1 Contents lleno A sce eees cite nce uated kel eeeueete ase 1 1 es of e BOO ieee sacs TERERERRDREERRRE A 1 2 jj OC P 1 3 a Features Available with Release 7 0 oooooooooooommmmmmmm o 1 3 Modes of Operation EY iR EPI eed id dodi 1 3 St d A eee eeeer et eee eee eeeeeeee tate aeeesee nes 1 4 EI 60 00 MESSER REUS T TIT TT TTE 1 4 System Capacity PEU a TR TE PIDO setea T5 oi uber poe MAA nsec by ce tecserte ereenteesebeecss 1 7 PER QD e leu REESE TR TITO Tt TITEL 1 7 a UMEN MUA rr oder eel eet AA 1 9 o AA E EST DUREE e IRR teen ei eS RP 1 11 Miet olo E A 1 11 a POUR Ii osacog KR RA EURO UE Rc ER de ARCA RE Ca REC Re I LU OR E LR 1 12 a Auxiliary Equipment xS ARE PTS sso a anb dors sige 118 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Overview Welcome Welcome to the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS This dynamic communications system comes complete with intuitive call handling combined with a variety of features that give you the efficient and flexible system you need The system also supports a full line of system telephones many with displays that show you programming and operation feedback But don t throw that old telephone away because the PARTNER ACS includes support for many single line telep
166. D and PARTNER 18D telephones During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display telephone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left button becomes and the right button becomes Central Tel Program The Programming Overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming m Next Procedure and Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure If a procedure instructs you to press Next Proceaure Prev Procedure pressing these buttons one after the other enables you to repeat the current programming procedure and cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line a pool an extension or a telephone list entry and cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments returns the current setting to the factory setting When you are programming Line Assignment 301 pressing removes lines from an extension when you are programming Pool Extension Assignment 314 pressing removes pools from an extension ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List starts the System Pro
167. Denial 4 49 Outside Conference Denial 109 4 49 Outward Restriction see Outgoing Call Restriction 401 PAGE Jack description 8 49 Paging 8 49 loudspeaker 8 49 PARTNER model phone 8 39 8 42 simultaneous 8 40 paging A 5 loudspeaker 8 49 simultaneous 8 51 parking calls 8 14 PARTNER ACS Processor 1 7 PARTNER ACS Processor Module 1 9 PARTNER Messaging 9 44 IN 8 PARTNER telephone wall mounting 2 37 PARTNER telephones 6 5 assembling 2 34 system telephones 1 12 PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card 1 11 8 5 10 16 PARTNER 34D Telephone buttons and indicators 6 2 programming overlay 3 4 PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer 1 12 connecting 2 40 password dialing restriction override 4 61 Password Remote Administration 4 56 Password System 403 4 61 8 70 PC Card using 10 2 PC Card slot 1 11 PC Card Slots 1 11 PC Cards 1 11 4 5 PCMCIA 1 11 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Card see PC Cards Personal Speed Dial 8 64 using single line telephone 8 66 system telephone 8 66 Picking up a Held Call 6 24 8 45 Pickup call 8 15 group 4 40 8 15 Pickup Group Extensions 4 40 Pickup Group Extensions 501 4 40 Placing a Call 6 16 plastic protector 2 8 plastic protectors 2 6 pool access code 1 4 Pool Access Restriction 4 50 pool buttons 1 4 4 52 Pool Extension Assignment 4 52 Pool Extension Assignment 314 4 52 Pool Line Assignment 4 54 Pool Program
168. ER PC Card Installation Instructions that came with your PC Card Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 Z 5 at extension 10 or 11 The top line of the display shows Sys Set Restore Or System Settings Restore Choose the backup file you want to use for the restore m 1 Internal MAN mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the manual backup to the internal memory of the processor module m 2 PC Card MAN mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the manual backup on the PC Card m 3 Internal AUTO mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the automatic backup to the internal memory of the processor module m 4 PC Card AUTO mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the automatic backup on the PC Card NOTES If the date of the file AUTO mmddyy or MAN mmddyy indicates that this is not the file you intended to use see the instructions packaged with the PC Upgrade card for how to install the Backup Restore PC Card m If the Backup Restore PC Card is fresh from the factory and no backups have been recorded on it yet the filenames are PC CARD MAN and PC CARD AUTO respectively You cannot use these files for a restore they generate the error message Empt y File after you press in Step 4 m f the processor card is fresh from the factory and no backups have been recorded on it yet the filenames are PC CARD MAN and PC CARD AUTO respect
169. Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system telephones and single line telephones For example an amplified handset is available for all PARTNER phones for hard of hearing users In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when telephones or other devices such as a doorphone are installed in a location other than the building where the control unit is installed IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a single line touch tone telephone beyond 3 000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices Caller ID devices allow you to store and process Caller ID information Although the system provides Caller ID on system display phones you can connect other devices if you subscribe to the service from your local telephone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line not to an extension jack Tip Ring Device Requirements A tip ring device must meet the following conditions It must be nonproprietary that is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system Its Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 REN is a measure of the
170. Hunt Group Extensions 505 Use this feature to assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group When extensions are in a Hunt Group an incoming call searches or hunts for the first available extension The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for transferring and detecting fax calls For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G on page 8 39 Groups of Extensions 4 36 Programming System Options Considerations Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt Group If a ringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 on page 4 38 If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then program the PARTNER MA
171. IL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL s Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes it as a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group With PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system Do not assign any other extensions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures see Voice Messaging Systems on page 9 44 and the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set the Transfer Return Extension 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax machines Do not assign any other extensions to this group See Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 on page 9 23 of this guide You should not assign T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID to Hunt Groups If a Hunt Group contains T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID callers will receive busy signal when all extensions in the Hunt Group are busy for example off hook have Do Not Disturb activated or are in programming mode Programming To assi
172. Id REPE 8 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use ELE c conc ecc ee gos ur TES TELITITITTQQLIS 1 52 51 27 1211 ERA TUTTI 8 18 oc avi AS 8 18 a Caller ID Inspect IPFI aw kesstesensdt serios Om UE ESQ FEDERER RC 8 19 a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 0 0 0 eee ee 8 20 a Caller ID Name Display Fels niai eR kd dk SK AA 8 26 Elli ies OR RP PEERS T T I DL E I 8 27 wm IOS ONS ccc circ adie bad IIo A 8 27 a ote eee abet et pace ese Reeateeteeepe cate uet dis 8 29 a Using Cell Phone Connect on a System Telephone 00005 8 29 a Using Cell Phone Connect on a Single Line Telephone 8 30 Conference Drop F06 oo oooooo eee Rie exe Red 8 31 Pet o MAA ee ee ee eee ae ee ee ee 8 31 wp PONIES corola in TS 0 LUTTE 8 31 Using Conference Drop on a System Telephone nunnan annann 8 31 Using Conference Drop on a Single Line Telephone suus 8 31 Contact Closure F41 and PAZ sis rra revisa de 8 32 a CONSI rr AAA ARA 8 32 a Programming Lasudxxe aqaeuaixkeetuae e ade deen Snes bae aae aM ES 8 32 Using Contact Closure on a System p 5 AAA 8 33 Using Contact Closure on a Single Line Telephone ooocooccooo o 8 33 Direct Line Pickup Features eer rer re EA 8 33 a Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL es oops ere 8 33 4 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line WELL cs iss sk REC RARI RR AA 8 35 Po Not SUS P
173. If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer Programming Fax 1 Send Ext X To program the send fax machine 1 Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X Do one of the following m If extension X is a key extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first line A selected last m f extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select pools and outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines and pools to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTED Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension
174. Immediate Ring and the telephone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Telephone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem telephone Then plug the cord into a telephone that you know rings properly m If the replacement telephone rings properly the problem telephone is defective Call the helpline to arrange for a replacement m If the replacement telephone does not ring properly call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Telephone Problems 11 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Telephone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 The telephone cord is plugged into the wrong jack on the bottom of system telephone What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack m If the telephone works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Telephone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the telephone With the handset hung up plug the cord in again m If the telephone works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the telephone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the telephone works the cord is faulty Call the helpline number listed
175. Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Mode 313 Use this feature to identify individual extensions that are to operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid mode If an extension s Line Access Mode is changed to Key individual lines can be assigned to specific buttons on that extension s telephone regardless of whether they are part of a pool This feature applies only to systems that are configured for Hybrid mode Considerations Extension 10 operates as a key extension regardless of how the system is configured The Line Access Mode for extension 10 cannot be changed Users at extensions programmed as key extensions cannot access pools either by pressing pool buttons or by dialing pool access codes When an extension is changed from Pooled to Key any previously assigned pool buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing When an extension is changed from Key to Pooled any previously assigned line buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Pool Line As
176. Line Pickup Active Line button Press OO Press a programmable button Press left intercom 6 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode i e ios Qm Using Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a System Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a system telephone 1 As desired lift the handset 2 Doone ofthe following m Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line and dial the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join m Press niercom 6 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Using Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a Single Line Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup Active Line on a single line telephone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join Direct Line Pickup Features 8 34 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Direct Line Pickup Idle Line ISLL Use this feature to access a specific outside line where LL is a system line number when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to the telephone Considerations m This procedure applies to individual lines If you have a pooled extension and you want to access lines in pools that are not assigned to your extension dial the pool access code at the
177. Line Ringing and Call Screening F25 always must be programmed by using Centralized Telephone Programming If an extension has a single line telephone you must program all features for the extension by using Centralized Telephone Programming If an extension has a non display system telephone you must use Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display for the extension During Centralized Telephone Programming the display telephone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the telephone See Using System Programming on page 3 4 for more information about System Programming and the use of overlays To program a telephone from extension 10 or 11 follow these steps 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press Feature O C A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature Skip to Step 4 Press again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM Press Central Tel Program A display similar to the following appears CENTRAL TELEPHONE PROG Extension
178. MS Cover 310 and Automatic Extension Privacy 304 respectively For example if Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be on again after the System reset However if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be off after the system reset m A successful use of Restore Programming 125 causes a System Reset Programming Saved to occur m The information stored in the Save Number Redial F04 and the Last Number Redial F05 buffers is lost when a System Reset Programming Saved occurs m You can use System Reset Programming Saved to restore the configuration in the 1600 DSL module System Reset Programming Saved 728 4 62 Programming System Options Programming To reset the system press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 7 Z 8 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in Programming Mode and the date and time appear on the display System Speed Dial Program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system by using System Speed Dial After you have programmed the numbers anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the three digit
179. Machine outside line dial tone Answering Machines Use an answering machine to answer calls when no one can get to the telephone If you have an answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system telephone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up You can connect answering machines to your system in the following ways m System answering machine One or more answering machines can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine s to retrieve messages m Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a telephone to answer calls to that extension NOTE If you have an answering machine and a system telephone on the same extension the answering machine can answer calls only when the telephone is idle Answering Machines 9 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment System Answering Machine One or more answering machines can serve the entire system see Figure 9 3 The answering machine can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install the answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a telephone on the same extension see Combination Extensions on page 9 3 Figure 9 3 System Answering Machines Telephone optional PARTNER CONTROL UNIT More Than Machine One M
180. Message Waiting lights Table A 5 Call Coverage Features Activity For Feature Name Page ft Covering calls As a member of a group All Call Coverage 8 8 And you want to adjust the number of All Call Coverage Rings 4 9 times calls ring before going to coverage Having your calls covered Occasionally All Call Forwarding 8 11 Call Follow Me By voice mail All Automatic VMS Cover 9 45 VMS Cover 8 72 Regularly All Call Coverage 8 8 A 6 Cross Reference of Features Table A 6 Calling Privileges and Restrictions Features Activity For Feature Name Page ft Preventing people from making calls To your extension All except Privacy 8 53 operators Do Not Disturb 8 36 To outside numbers System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 20 Managers Disallowed List Assignments 4 23 only Outgoing Call Restriction 4 25 To toll numbers System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 20 Managers Outgoing Call Restrictions 4 25 only To certain numbers or area codes System Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 20 Managers only Outside of normal business hours System Night Service Group Extensions 4 39 Managers only Allowing calls To certain numbers or area codes System Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 Managers Allowed List Assignments 4 20 only System Speed Dial 4 63 Outside of normal business hours System Night Service Group Extensions 4 39 Managers only Other calling privileges To enter your password for off hours calls All
181. N If you will be using the Direct Inward Dialing DID service from the T1 service provider configure the DID Mapping Table You will map extensions hunt groups or calling groups to DID numbers 9 Program the other features such as extension features and restrictions you want See the procedures in Program PARTNER Features in a PC Administration File in the online help 10 Save the file 11 Program the settings in this file to the PARTNER system Refer to Initial Configuration of the T1 Module on page 2 19 or Program a T1 Module in the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration online help for detailed instructions on how to perform these procedures After configuring the T1 module you may perform the Set Administration procedures in this guide to administer non T1 settings You can also administer non T1 settings from the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software Configuring the T1 Module 3 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Setting the Date and Time After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures to set the system clock m System Date 101 to set the month day and year m System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes m Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 to automatically update the system clock NOTE Turn this feature off if you live in an area without daylight savings time Considerations m Backup Programming Automatic 123 uses the
182. OTE Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first then Line Ringing Automatic Line Selection Call Coverage Press Press a programmable button Press the line pool intercom buttons in the desired order Press 2 0 Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number Key Extension Outside lines v Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 Intercom right Intercom v Call Forwarding Call Follow Me P Pools 881 883 individual lines Press a programmable button Dax OR Press Dial optional two digit originating extension number Extensi n Name Display Dial optional two digit destination extension number Press Enter the character codes for the name P See table Valid Character Entries NI butten Th Press d Dial the two digit extension number Line Ringing Press each line or pool button until the desired ringing Call Screening option appears in the display Press a programmable button with lights Immediate ring green steady v Lines Press No ring green fast flutter Y Pools Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds Caller ID Call Logging amp Dialing green slow flashing Press a programmable button with lights Press Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press Caller ID Inspect Dial a two digit code 80 99 Press a prog
183. Protected in System Programming Mode erm cas ibd dd de Md REA Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode over ore TOU ee ee Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode carnosa MERE RERO Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy in System Programming Mode ocoocccccccoo eee eee tees Problems with System Restore Tm M sai ded a Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode TIPP dri pL d IUE Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode cooocinoricncarcinan em RR a Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode 000 cece eee lees Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Modes iiesssxa ire trti RARE REESE OS PORES Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode oooocoococooo o System Programming Settings Reverted lo Default SUN seam be ries ire FERRO RE REO EE IA Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calle Were Disconnected s 4csees ede nie RI dare EE A acd odd qr OUO ERE X MAR REESE REOR EUCH IHE UC GOR HO 1t ii Contents Call Rings Continuously When Answered Notne AM CIDSEEBO ad adas bled aed 11 27 a Calls on Hold Are Disconnected o oooocoocccoccoc 11 27 a An ASA DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears 200085 11 27 a Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines
184. R ACS R7 0 PC Administration software For more information see the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Getting Started The 1600 DSL Module 2 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You can use any terminal emulation software to configure the 1600 DSL module including Hyperterminal that is packaged with Windows For a local serial port connection the terminal emulator must be configured as follows m Data Bits 8 m Stop Bits 1 m Parity None m Flow Control None m Speed 19 200 bps To configure the 1600 DSL module you must know the voice gateway that is used on the remote end and program the following m SDSL interface m Voice gateway configuration m Router configuration for voice PathStar only m Router configuration for data m LAN configuration NOTE For any changes you make to take effect you must perform a cold start on the system by powering down and powering up the system or by using the Restore Programming 125 or System Reset Programming Saved 728 feature For more information about voice and data configuration of the 1600 DSL module see the PARTNER ACS 1600 DSL Module manual SDSL Interface Configuration Follow these steps to configure the SDSL interface for a 1600 DSL module 1 Select 5 Configure WAN from the Main Menu 2 Select 1 SDSL at the Available WAN Interfaces prompt 3 Select 0 Quick Configuration from the WAN Config
185. Remove the clear plastic protectors from the connectors on the right side of the wall mounted PARTNER ACS processor module and the module to be added by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 6 Slide the second module onto the PARTNER ACS processor module making sure the mounting tracks interlock see Figure 7 Attach the 2 slot carrier to the top right side of the two modules see Figure properly engaging the connectors on the modules to the carrier Installing the Control Unit 2 6 Figure 2 3 Removing the Plastic Protector la Tab p LA l c L Tab Figure 2 4 Module Mounting Tracks E ig Mounting 4 Wy A 1 Tracks i 1 E Su i Figure 2 5 Attaching the 2 Slot Carrier Installation 8 Fasten the carrier to the modules by using the two 4 screws included with the carrier see Figure Figure 2 6 Fastening the 2 Slot Carrier 9 Insert the 3 1 2 inch 8 screw into the bottom of the modules see Figure Tighten it until the mounting tracks of the PARTNER ACS processor module are flush against the wall Do not overtighten or the module will warp Then go to the next procedure Labeling Jacks on page 2 9 Figure
186. S PC Administration software For more information see the PARTNER ACS PC Administration Getting Started guide Possible Cause 1 The connection between the 1600 DSL module and the central office is faulty What to do Check the status of the module by following these steps 1 Check the status of the SDSL port LED on the front panel of the 1600 DSL module m Ifthe LED is off the 1600 DSL module is not detecting any signal Check with the service provider that a signal has been tested up to the point of entrance into the customer s building m Ifthe LED is flashing a DSL signal has been detected but the 1600 DSL module has not yet synced up with the signal or cannot sync up with the signal because of incorrectly set parameters or impediments on the line Wait five minutes for the module to sync up If the module still does not sync up check the following settings for the gateway in the SDSL Configuration menu CPE mode the 1600 DSL module should always be in CPE not CO mode Appropriate auto negotiate method Auto Sense Copper Mountain Auto Cycle Nokia etc if you are not setting the speed manually Appropriate bit order Magnitude Sign or Sign Magnitude If you have set the speed manually confirm with the service provider that it is also providing at least this speed if not higher m Ifthe LED is on steady the SDSL connection has been established successfully 2 Checkthe status of the DSL connection by looking in
187. SDSL from the Available Interfaces list Do one of the following m If you have the SDSL set for ATM select the RFC 1483 port for the data PVC For a CopperCom or Jetstream gateway only one RFC 1483 port appears for a PathStar gateway you must get the number of the port from the service provider m If you have the SDSL set for Frame Relay select the RFC 1490 port for the voice DLCI For a CopperCom or Jetstream gateway only one RFC 1490 port appears for a PathStar gateway you must get the number of the port from the service provider Type the IP address of the data PVC DLCI and press Enter Press Esc to return to the Main Menu LAN Configuration Follow these steps to configure the LAN for the 1600 DSL module Or 00 4 0 T um GOP CIN Select 2 Configure IP Router from the Main Menu Select C Configure Port IP Address from the Router Configuration Menu Select 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet from the Available Interfaces list Type the port number of the IP interface and press Enter Type the customer s LAN s IP address at the new IP address prompt and press Enter Type the customer s subnet mask address at the subnet mask prompt and press Enter Type N at the Select priority Normal High prompt Type Y at the Save new IP Information prompt Select S Add Remove a Static Route from the Router Configuration Menu 10 Select F Add Change the Default Route from the Router Modification Menu The
188. Speed Dial numbers Appendix D Programming Mixed Telephone Types describes for the System Administrator how to program MLS telephones with a PARTNER telephone and vice versa Appendix E Flow Charts contains flowcharts for System Programming Centralized Telephone Programming and Extension Telephone Programming Structure of the Book 1 2 Overview Features As each new version of system software is released more valuable features become available Features Available with Release 7 0 The PARTNER ACS 509 processor module which contains up to five lines and nine extensions Loudspeaker Paging Line to allow you to connect a loudspeaker paging system to any line jack on any PARTNER module Enhanced backup restore capabilities to allow you to back up the PARTNER system programming to either the internal memory of the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module or a PC Card An RJ 45 serial port Admin port on the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module to allow you to connect to the PARTNER system either directly from the COM port of a PC or via an external modem that is connected to the Admin port and administer the system via PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software Modes of Operation The system supports two modes of operation The mode of operation determines how users access outside lines from their telephones Key Mode You access individual outside lines to make and receive calls Hybrid Mode You can access individual out
189. System In the PARTNER ACS System window click on DID Mapping Table The DID Mapping Table window appears The T1 Module 2 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use c From the Expected Number of Digits box choose the number of digits the PARTNER system will receive from the T1 service provider d Perform either of the following steps If you want to automatically assign a consecutive range of DID numbers to a range of extensions hunt groups calling groups a From the Last box in the Automatic Numbering area choose the last item number on this page you want to map From the First box choose the first item number on this page you want to map In the DID No box enter the first DID number you want to map For example if you have the DID numbers 100 through 109 you would enter 100 From the Ext Grp box select the first extension you want to map to the first DID number Click the Update button The Item No you specified in the First box is assigned the DID number you specified in the DID No box and the extension hunt group or calling group you specified in the Ext Grp box is mapped to that DID number The next Item No is assigned to the next DID number in the range and the next extension hunt group or calling group is mapped to that DID number Each Item No in the range you specified is mapped to next DID number and extension hunt group calling group If you
190. TNER Messaging with four or six ports or PMVS Release 5 0 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four ports m The person initiating this feature can add additional parties to the conference call until the conference limit is exceeded A user active on a conference call may turn on this feature during the conference m You can place the Record a Call on hold just as if you were placing a conference call on hold Outside parties do not hear Music On Hold since PMVS is still connected to the call If PMVS detects 15 seconds of silence it drops off the call m Acall that is being recorded cannot be transferred Pressing the transfer button is ignored m Acall that is being recorded cannot receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call Record a Call F24 8 56 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m Ifyou press the Recall button while recording an intercom call the entire conversation is dropped m You cannot join a call that is being recorded m You cannot use Record a Call with Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Record a Call button 1 Press O Q 2 Press a programmable button with LEDs 3 Press Feature DU 4 Program another extension or exit programming mode Using Record a Call To activate the feature press the programmed feature button when active on an intercom or CO call The green LED at the feature button is turned on steady to indicate that feature activation has been in
191. TNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Answering Machine Fax Machine Doorphone System Components 1 8 Overview System Modules A system must contain a processor module A 2 slot or 5 slot system also contains line extension modules Processor Module The PARTNER ACS processor module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for five outside lines nine enhanced tip ring extensions a Music On Hold audio source a grounding screw a jack that supports an adjunct for two Contact Closures and a jack for a call reporting SMDR device such as a printer You can connect a loudspeaker paging system to any line jack on the PARTNER system If your loudspeaker paging system requires a dry contact relay you must connect the loudspeaker paging system to line jack 5 The processor module also has two PC Card slots a two color red and green light emitting diode LED and two AAA user replaceable batteries The module provides support for integrated Caller ID information on system display telephones The system requires one processor module Line Extension Modules Table 1 2 shows the line extension modules used in the PARTNER ACS Table 1 2 Line Extension Modules Name Line Jacks Extension Jacks Additional Information 012bE 0 12 Provides up to 12 extension jacks You can connect telephones and other devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks Green power
192. Toll Call Prefix 114 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 403 System Password 115 Wake Up Service Button 404 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 405 Disallowed List Assignments 406 Emergency Phone Number List 119 Ring on Transfer 407 Allowed Phone Number Lists 121 Automatic System Answer Mode 408 Allowed List Assignments 122 Caller ID Type 409 Forced Account Code List 123 Backup Programming Automatic 410 Star Code Dial Delay 124 Backup Programming Manual 501 Pickup Group Extensions 125 Restore Programming 502 Calling Group Extensions 126 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 503 Night Service Button 127 Hold Reminder Tone 504 Night Service Group Extensions A 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 1 System Programming Procedures Continued Code Feature Code Feature 201 Dial Mode 505 Hunt Group Extensions 203 Hold Disconnect Time 505 Group 8 Fax CNG Detection 204 Automatic System Answer Lines 506 VMS Hunt Delay 205 Direct Extension Dial Lines 507 VMS Hunt Schedule 206 Group Call Distribution 601 Fax Machine Extensions 207 Pool Line Assignment 602 Music On Hold 208 Line Coverage Extension 603 Hotline 209 Unique Line Ringing 604 Doorphone Extension 1 301 Line Assignment 605 Doorphone Extension 2 302 Line Access Restriction 606 Doorphone Alert Extensions 303 Display Language 607 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 304 Automatic Ex
193. UT a dora med Rip SUR Hohe dc Rae line Pipe do e kc eh ed 8 36 a DNE MEN aie eoo eque A Sq eere ado iesu ure 8 36 a PRIMAS 2rd dried AA ed KoERd e redes 8 37 a Mag De Not DISTO os ari Re dE R a RO e d OR KC ERR CI ORORS ADA 8 37 e di GL ubi pEEP IADise ixi DRE IO QAM RES Ei dude meee 8 37 EE o pr AA ice aa eaeoeeedwiedi cakes 8 37 PE ui WE A TTD III T eee he ges 8 38 Usmo EXCUSA du CT nmrm 8 38 Extension Name ASIAN 2 id po ECCE eO ode don Rd eed bes 8 38 EXA EU Seer PITT E EEE T 8 39 Etro i M Pre 8 39 a Using an External Hotline See eet A 8 39 Group Calling Ring Page IGI TO coacricin cis riera 8 39 uer o c ol Pec PIDE 8 39 TE OLD ERSTER TS TRITT TET TIT R 8 40 Using Group Calling Ring Page on a System Telephone 8 40 a Using Group Calling Ring Page on a Single Line Telephone 8 41 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal o AA T 8 42 o eek tee eceees tou ee ert Caos caeensce te coors 8 42 Contents r M s n sU T s PIGOSINIUIND erre RP Ye eV EE EROS d CERE RO ds o 8 43 a Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a System Telephone 8 43 a Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a Single Line Telephone 8 44 Group Pickup l66G A dd ARA 8 45 s So rer 8G 166 ko HS os JR ee pa TCR c GECRGR OP OE d ee o 8 45 s Prog ammmin i scsexad assackbariadowd m 1110 o 8 45 a Using Group Pickup
194. X or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Programming To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active outside intercom and transferred calls ring differently using the system s distinctive ringing patterns the factory setting v m 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls all ring using a single ring burst To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Distinctive Ring 308 4 30 Programming System Options External Hotline 311 Use this feature to identify an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a single line telephone not a system telephone and should not have a dialpad After you identify an external hotline extension you must store the external telephone number for the hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy tel
195. You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature telephone and program them onto a feature telephone button However there are some limitations to what these telephones can do The capabilities of a feature telephone are in the telephone itself For example if you store a number on a feature telephone s Auto Dial button that number is stored in the feature telephone This is different from storing a number on a system telephone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system telephone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a button on a feature telephone the call is held at the telephone itself Callers do not hear the system s Music On Hold Other telephones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you want to program an outside number on a feature telephone s Auto Dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone The feature telephone s last number button may not work for an outside call To redial the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing AMG Single Line Telephones 6 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display PARTNER display telephones have a 2 line 24 character per line adjustable display area for calling a
196. a PARTNER ACS processor module The modules slide into the carrier which channels power to the system System Components 1 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure 1 1 System Configurations CONTROL UNIT PARTNER ACS Processor Module Grounding Screw Contact Closure Jack PC Card Slots 2 Power LED M SMDR Jack Outside Line Jacks 5 MUSIC ON HOLD Jack for RCA phono plug Extension Jacks 9 Battery Compartment Optional Carriers 5 Slot 2 Slot Carrier Carrier SYSTEM PHONES PARTNER 34D Phone with optional PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer TransTalkTM Wireless Phones PARTNER 69 Phone 1600DSL 012E Module Module Optional Devices for the control unit PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System ita Paging System Serial Printer E ia Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus L co Contact Closure Adjunct Magic on Hold deck PC Cards Backup Restore ASA DXD Software upgrade Remote Access PARTNER Voice Messaging Optional Devices or extension jacks Standard Phone PAR
197. a callis being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is active If itis not active and Music On Hold is active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears Music On Hold while the call is being transferred to the voice mailbox If Music On Hold is not active and Ring on Transfer is not active the caller hears silence m Voice Mailbox Transfer cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press O 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Voice Mailbox Transfer To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system telephone press the programmed button or press Feature 1 4 2 Dialthe two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 8 76 Using Auxiliary Equipment 9 Contents o A eons hose ce oes ba ee pee eee ee IIS EE A TE 9 1 Tip Ring Device Requirements E pdas EREET TEPI T ET 9 2 esas aat duds dap ea sient E e E t RE 9 3 a Using a Direct Connection 2 cc ccs cose ad wet esecngedesiestacendexcedins 9 3 Using a Bridging Adapter Gh PAR le Pea pads Died Magee v dpud 9 4 Ha Device Has TIO
198. a star code 67 to block Caller ID information or has instructed the telephone company to block Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is the normal operation for these conditions is Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The call originated outside the area for which the telephone company can provide Caller 1D information What to do Nothing this is normal operation for the Caller ID service Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Possible Cause Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local telephone company What to do If Caller ID information for a large number of calls is not displayed contact your local telephone company Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of Intercom Autodialer What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer on page 2 40 for instructions m If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power What to do Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged into an electrical outlet m If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The cord is defective What to do Unpl
199. abbreviated 4 2 IN 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Ringing ldle Line Preference see Automatic Line Selection Rings Transfer Return 105 4 67 Rings VMS Cover 117 9 46 Rotary lines 4 26 4 27 8 71 phones 1 13 rotary dialing length of timeout 4 58 Rotary Dialing Timeout 4 58 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 4 58 rotary lines sending touch tone signals 8 71 Router Configuration data 2 30 voice 2 29 safety requirements 2 3 Save Number Redial 8 59 using 8 59 SDSL Interface Configuration 2 26 Self Service Center on the Internet Customer Send All Calls 8 63 using 8 64 setting the date day andtime 3 10 Settings changing to support PBX or Centrex services 17 settings changing 10 16 changing the system clock 10 16 copying 4 17 Signaling Manual 8 46 Simultaneous Paging 8 51 using single line telephone 8 52 system telephone 8 51 single line telephone problems 11 9 Single Line Telephones 6 10 Single line telephones switchhook 6 11 single line telephones 1 13 limitations 6 12 problems Message Waiting light 11 10 noring 11 9 SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 42 SMDR Output Format 9 42 SMDR Output Format 610 description 9 42 SMDR Record Type 9 41 SMDR Record Type 608 9 41 IN 10 SMDR Talk Time 9 43 SMDR Top of Page 9 41 SMDR Top of Page 609 9 41 Speaker on standard pho
200. achine Retrieving Messages Do one of the following to retrieve messages m Goto the machine to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code m From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code When you call from the outside you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers Answering Machines 9 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program the system for an answering machine 1 Doone ofthe following m Ifyou use only one answering machine do one of the following f extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover f extension X is a pooled extension use Line Extension Assignment 314 to assign all the pools to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover m If you use more than one answering machine a f your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Access Mode 313 to change extensions X and Y from Pooled to Key b Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that
201. acks labeled Transmit Receive and Monitor for maintenance testing and diagnostics m aninternal CSU for voice call connectivity to the T1 service provider and diagnostics see Figure 2 21 To configure and maintain a T1 module you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software You cannot program a T1 module via System Programming from extensions 10 or 11 The T1 Module 2 18 Installation Initial Configuration of the T1 Module To configure and maintain a T1 module you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software You cannot program a T1 module via System Programming from extensions 10 or 11 For instructions on how to install and use PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration see the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Getting Started To set up a T1 module in a PARTNER system 1 Start PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration a Perform one of the following steps Click on the Start menu and select Programs PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration gt PC Administration This is the default location If you chose to save your files to an alternate location during installation your path will be different f you created a Start menu short cut click on the Start menu and select PC Administration f you created a desktop short cut double click on the PC Administration icon on the desktop The New Translation Creation dialog box appears Choose PARTNER ACS R7 0 and click the OK button T
202. act Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Adjunct 9 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Contact Closure Group 612 Use this feature to specify which system extensions can activate each Contact Closure Before a user can activate a contact closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Considerations m f a Contact Closure is used to control a door lock and a doorphone is installed at that door you may want to assign the extensions in the Contact Closure Group to also be the Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 for that doorphone m When an extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user at that extension can use Contact Closure to activate the contact closure device Programming To assign extensions to a Contact Closure Group 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program A OQA at extension 10 or 11 At the Contact Number prompt enter the number for the Contact Closure 1 or 2 At the Extension prompt enter the two digit extension number that you want to assign to this Contact Closure Group To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to the Contact Closure Group m 2 Not Assigned to the Contact Closure Group the factory setting V Do one of the
203. aging system Programming for Automatic VMS Cover To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AOOO at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system To assign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Cover Rings 3214 Use this feature to define the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox This feature programs the number of rings on a per extension basis Considerations VMS Cover Rings also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 If an extension has VMS Cover F15 or Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Programming For VMS Cover Rings To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQA at extension 10 or 11 At the extension prompt enter an extension number The Cover
204. ain pool and assign lines to auxiliary pools Line Access Mode 313 to change a specific extension s operation from Pooled to Key Refer to Key Extensions to assign lines to those extensions Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove the main pool assign auxiliary pools or change the location of the button used to select an auxiliary pool at specific extensions The location of the two main pool buttons cannot be changed Pool Access Restriction 315 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines in specific pools Assigning Lines 8 14 Initial System Programming Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line or pool starts ringing at each extension that has the line or pool Lines are factory set to Immediate Ring and pools are factory set to No Ring Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line or pool when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call For extensions with tip ring telephones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables tip ring telephones to access equipment features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on tip ring telephones they hear intercom dial tone To access a pool they can dial the pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 or dial 9 to access the first available line or pool in the sequence Assign
205. all is treated as an incoming voice call m It can take up to eight seconds after a call is answered before the system determines that the incoming call is a fax call The voice messaging system message should be at least this long so that the CNG tone can be detected before the message ends and the call can be transferred m You may use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a fax call at the extension and interrupting it Programming 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program HA 5 0 5 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Hunt Group prompt enter 8 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the desired extension number 4 To assign or remove an extension from Hunt Group 8 press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting v 5 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 4 6 Program another extension or exit programming mode Fax Machine Extensions 601 Use this feature to identify the extensions to which fax machines are connected Considerations If you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine program a Fax Management button see Using the Fax Management Feature on page 9 23 To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension
206. already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code B1ank appears Enter the number For example to program 555 4757 press 2 5 6 60 C2 8 2 NOTED To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions precede the number by a X For example to mark the number 555 1001 press WOAOODOOQD Continue programming System Speed Dial numbers m To program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the three digit code m To remove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press Mic HFAN once Press Feature O C to exit programming mode System Speed Dial 4 64 Programming System Options Toll Call Prefix 402 Use this feature to indicate whether users must dial a O or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number Set Toll Call Prefix to reflect the dialing patterns of your local telephone company Considerations This feature affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions Programming To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program a O 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 0or1 required before Area Code and Number the factory setting v m 2 Area Code and Number Only
207. amming amp Using Telephone Features To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Dial Intercom 6 2 Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension where the call is parked Using Call Park on a Single Line Telephone To park a call 1 While on a call press the switchhook or Recall The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial your two digit extension number 3 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you are on another call when the parked call returns you will not receive notification even if Call Waiting is assigned to your extension The parked call rings back when your telephone is idle To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 and the extension number where the call is parked Call Pickup I6XX Use this feature to answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension where XX is a system extension number This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Considerations m You can program a Call Pickup button on a system telephone to pick up with one touch a call that is ringing or parked at another specified extension m Use this feature to retrieve a parked call If you use Call Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls you are connect
208. amming required telephone 5 2 Telephones touch tone phone 6 10 telephones assembling 2 34 buttons 6 1 connecting and testing 2 39 desk mounting 2 35 dial tone single line 6 11 dial tones 6 7 display 6 2 6 14 fixed buttons 6 3 handset 6 8 installation 2 34 microphone 6 8 other problems 11 11 plastic cover 2 36 problems calls answered automatically 11 14 can t hear called party 11 15 dead telephones 11 29 Recall disconnects call 11 16 Recall has no effect 11 15 star codes 11 15 trouble making outside calls 11 11 trouble making outside calls from pool buttons 11 13 ringing patterns 6 7 ringing patterns single line 6 11 single line 1 13 6 10 limitations 6 12 speaker 6 8 testing 2 39 telephones see Feature Telephones Single Line Telephones and System Telephones testing lines 2 17 IN 12 testing telephones 2 39 time setting 3 10 Time System 103 3 11 Tip Ring Device Requirements 9 2 tip ring devices connecting to system telephones 9 3 problems 11 17 call records wrap on SMDR 11 17 device does not answer 11 17 device does not dial properly 11 17 problems with 9 4 Toll Call Prefix 4 65 Toll Call Prefix 402 4 65 Touch Tone Enable 8 71 programming feature on a button 8 71 programming function in phone number B 1 using 8 71 Transfer calls to fax machines 9 17 manual 9 18 number of return rings 4 67 on a System Telephone 6 28 returned calls 4 65 Rin
209. an appropriate earth ground Follow these steps to ground the system 1 Attach one end of a 12 AWG or 14 AWG solid copper wire to the grounding screw on the processor module see Figure 2 12 The length of the wire must not exceed 35 feet 7 6 meters Figure 2 12 Grounding Screw Grounding 2 Route the wire through the wire manager on the MEN 3 front of the module 3 Attach the other end of the wire to the approved earth ground such as building steel or a cold water pipe Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module The processor module uses two AAA size standard alkaline batteries to guard against the loss of system programming and time of day clock settings in case of a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries You should replace the batteries every year NOTE The configuration of the 1600 DSL module is not backed up to the PCMCIA card Instead the configuration is retained in the flash memory of the 1600 DSL module Z caution Batteries and battery cover are packaged in a separate box If you are replacing batteries the old batteries must be removed with the power on or the system programming will be lost You should back up the system programming before changing the batteries See Battery Replacement on page 10 1 Installing the Control Unit 2 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Follow these steps
210. an program System Speed Dial numbers only from extension 10 or 11 but you can use them from any extension System Speed Dial 4 63 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Use a completed System Speed Dial form to program the list of numbers After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See Appendix C for a blank form If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test calls do the following Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Remain on the line and explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code Programming To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 2 Press Feature O C at extension 10 or 11 Select a three digit code by pressing and dialing three digits between 600 and 699 If a number is assigned
211. and you want to program Do Not Disturb on the top leftmost button of an MLS 18D telephone refer to Figure D 1 find the top leftmost button on the MLS 18D telephone and press the button labeled M on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay Overview D 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure D 1 Programming from a PARTNER 34 D Telephone PARTNER 34D Overlay Overview D 2 LEY m Y 66 HH u JJ FF Next Next Next Procedure L Item Data Remove a ey C CL REY os Procedure rd be l Enter a3 ED 0 eel ae M N o P AA Z G H l J K L A B C D E F Central J J S Tel Program a Message Program 2 1 un Feature 1 ro MLS 6 Phone A B LC ml oO Intercom Intercom oO E oo iw nmnnn v A L Spk MLS 18D 12D 12 Phone E n n n a a M a N n O a P a Hn n a a I Hn J n K a L O o o B E O F o G o H a O o oO a A Hn B n C n D qo n Intercom i n n Volume Speakerphone V O Spkr O Mic HFAI MLS 34D Phone oO O a oO o O oU LY LW LX LEE a FF
212. ansfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call and then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller NOTED You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension m lo transfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press Transfr or Next ttem this takes the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page For an extension that has a system telephone you can program plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them Transferring a Call on a Single Line Telephone Follow these instructions to transfer a call by using a single line telephone m To transfer a call to another extension 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear int
213. answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial to retrieve messages enter 5 5 0 8 2 9 Held Hola Hola 3 2 1 Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature you use while on a call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you are already on a call You can store a Recall signal by pressing Sox but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing Hold to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone Gpkr Hold x 3 2 Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter 5 5 5 C 8 9 8 Mr 6 C7 9 8 8 Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter 2 5 5 3 4 6 a ans All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones On Off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press
214. ard for Safety Direct Plug in Transformers UL 1585 Standard for Safety Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers Canada Meets CSA C22 2 No 0 7 M1985 Evaluating the Environment 2 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Installing the Control Unit The stand alone processor module or a carrier and its modules are referred to as the control unit The control unit must always be wall mounted NOTE Before installing the system be sure you read the safety instructions in the front of this guide N wARNINO There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN MODULES To install the control unit you must do the following m Wall mount the control unit m Label the jacks m Ground the system m Insert the batteries into the processor module m Initialize the system m Check the LEDs on the modules Wall Mounting the Control Unit The PARTNER Advanced Communications System can be installed in one of three configurations m Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module m 2 Slot Carrier which can hold up to two modules m 5 Slot Carrier which can hold up to five modules Installing the Control Unit 2 4 Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier Installation Install the processor module within 5 feet 1 5 meters of a properly groun
215. art System System Date Dial AOOO Dial the date MMDDYY Outside Conference Denial Dial 4 1 0 9 Dial 1 Allowed Y 2 Disallowed System Time Dial 7 0 3 Dial the time HHMM 24 hr military time Number of Lines Dial Q Dial two digits 01 31 R4 or later or Dial two digits 01 19 Prior to R4 for of outside lines assigned to every extension 3 per ACS processor amp 308EC module 16 per T1 or 1600 DSL module 2 per 206 or 200 module y 4 per 400 module Y WARNING Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup In Key mode the Number of lines procedure will change Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 In Hybrid mode the Number of Lines procedure will change Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 4302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Automatic System Answer Delay Dial 4 1 CD 0 Dial a ring delay number 0 9 2 rings Y Automatic System Answer Button Dil MOOD Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Ass
216. ary device connected to your system either set the device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all of the settings associated with it Refer to the documentation with your voice messaging system for complete details If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Telephone Problems 11 14 Troubleshooting Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 f you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone What to do Check to see if you are using proper speakerphone technique m Avoid places with high background noise m Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking m Face the telephone and stay within two feet of it m Place your telephone at least six inches from the edge of your desk If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 lf the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty telephone or cord See System Telephone Does Not Work on page 11 6 If the system is set for rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long What to do Reset the interval by using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m If
217. as been programmed to log answered calls or to log all calls Line 5 is associated with extension 11 for Call Logging A user at extension 11 answers a call transfers it to extension 12 and the caller hangs up before it is answered The call is logged as unanswered at extension 12 When a call is answered it is not logged unless the system has been programmed to log answered calls by using Caller ID Log Answered Calls or an extension is programmed to answer all calls by using Caller ID Log Line Assignment and Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID Features 8 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Call Log Display button Press O Q Press a programmable button with lights Press a Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Boom Using the Caller ID Logging and Dialing Feature When Caller ID information is logged for your extension and you have programmed a Call Log button the word Calis is displayed as shown in Figure 8 1 Figure 8 1 System Telephone Display Showing Logged Calls 0 2 26 Wed Calls 10 53 am To view the log 1 Press your preprogrammed Call Log button The green light flutters and the Call Log is activated One of several messages appears 2 Press the More button repeatedly until you see the Telephone Number Display shown in Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Telephone Number Display 9
218. as not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the processor module is corrupted What to do Try to do a backup using the manual backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 4124 to test the system m If the backup completes successfully the problem may be solved An automatic backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 m Ifthe backup fails try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support document to order a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause Changes were being made to system prog
219. astic Protector Tab Tab Adding New Modules 10 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Before you insert the new module make sure that all 400 or 200 modules are installed to the right of all 012E 308EC or 206 modules If you have a T1 module or a 1600 DSL module it must be in the first slot on the left of the carrier see Figure 10 4 If you need to move a module to accommodate the new one see Replacing Modules on page 10 10 NOTE PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports Endeavor telephones when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier Install the Endeavor 362EC module s to the right of the T1 module if installed or 1600 DSL module if installed and to the left of any 400 and 200 module Figure 10 4 Placement of Modules 7 Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks into place and is attached to the rear of the carrier Do not force the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it Connect line and or extension jack cords to the new module see Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 Reconnect the power cord to the wall outlet A CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loo
220. at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear Music On Hold when they answer their wake up calls Programming To change the setting of the Music On Hold jack 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 6 O 2 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active the factory setting v m 2 Not Active Select another procedure or exit programming mode Music On Hold Volume 614 Use this feature to select one of seven volume settings for the external music source provided through the Music On Hold jack on the processor module This setting is system wide Music On Hold 9 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Changes to the Music On Hold Volume setting have immediate effect on all calls currently receiving Music On Hold treatment Programming To change the Music On Hold Volume setting 1 Press Feature C C System Program System Program A 6 1 at extension 10 or 11 The display shows the current setting 2 Press the number of the setting on the dialpad or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting appears Setting ranges from 1 to 7 with 4 being the factory setting 3 If you want to return the volume to the default setting press Remove Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment You can set up m
221. at the beginning of a dialing sequence the system resets to check dialing restrictions as often as necessary For example 3 6 G C2 0 2 6 6 C 6 3 9 can be dialed to block Caller ID information and to turn off Call Waiting the system still checks to see whether the 555 2539 number is restricted Star Code Dial Delay 410 4 59 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use After a star code is dialed some central offices respond by providing a second dial tone as a prompt for the caller to enter more digits Usually the second dial tone is provided immediately but if the tone is delayed the caller should wait for the dial tone before continuing to dial The system may not recognize the numbers dialed before the second dial tone which may cause the call to be misrouted Use the Star Code Dial Delay setting to force a delay in Auto Dialed calls after the star code so that the system waits to dial the rest of the digits until the second dial tone begins You can program an automatic pause of 0 to 5 seconds after each star code that is autodialed whether from a touch tone or a rotary telephone Considerations The Star Code Dial Delay is not inserted in manually dialed numbers If your central office provides the second dial tone immediately you do not need the delay provided by Star Code Dial Delay In this case choose the 0 setting to enable restriction checking but avoid the delay
222. ave Number Redial 8 59 A voice mail box System Voice Mailbox Transfer 8 76 telephones Paging Several people at your company who All Simultaneous Paging 8 51 have speakerphones Over your company s loudspeaker All Loudspeaker Paging 8 49 system Prevent or allow voice announced calls System Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 68 from coming in over your speakerphone X telephones Putting a call on hold At your own extension so that you can All Hold 6 23 pick it up PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table A 4 Basic Calling and Answering Features Continued Activity For Feature or Function Page At your own extension so that you or All Hold 6 23 someone who shares a line can pick it up At your own extension so that anyone All Call Park 8 14 can pick it up after you page them At your own extension so that only you System Exclusive Hold 8 37 can pick it up telephones Using the system from an outside telephone To program the system from a location N A Remote Administration 4 56 outside the system Password To receive calls that come to your All Cell Phone Connect 8 27 system extension Remote Call Forwarding 8 60 Leaving messages Let a co worker with a system telephone System Manual Signaling 8 46 know that you wish to speak with him or telephones her without calling Receiving messages Turn off Message light All Message Light Off 8 48 telephones with
223. ay a message while Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed The message must be at least eight seconds to use the Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 feature The system takes seven seconds to determine if the incoming call is a fax You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Programming To record an Automatic System Answer message 1 As needed install the Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press Intercom Automatic System Answer Features 7 8 Operator Features Dial The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads ASA l Record If a message was recorded previously a display similar to the following appears
224. ble to you To ensure that no on else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold F02 Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any telephone in the system This type of hold typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because it allows the user to retrieve a call without having to know which line the call is on Callers on hold hear Music On Hold 602 only if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Single line telephone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 316 is programmed for their extensions Handling Calls 6 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Hold on a System Telephone Follow these instructions to place and retrieve a call on hold on a system telephone To place a call on hold on a system telephone press Hola The green light next to the Intercom line or pool button winks To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press Intercom line or pool button next to the winking green light 2 If the handset is in the cradle lift it up or press Spb You are reconnected to the held call The green light next to the line or pool button changes to on steady To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the button next to the winking red light or press Intercom 6 8 and the two digit line numbe
225. call until a required account code is entered Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes this ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Call Waiting 316 to identify tip ring telephone extensions that can receive the system not the local telephone company call waiting tone for a second incoming call when active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines Disallowed Allowed List features Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Customizing Extensions 3 16 Initial System Programming m Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 to place the extension in any of these groups See Groups of Extensions on page 4 35 for more information m Fax Machine Extensions 601 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 AA Extensions 607 External Hotline
226. call until the call returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting you when you are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Considerations m Abbreviated Ringing applies only to system telephones m Abbreviated Ringing is typically set to Not Active for operators and others who handle many calls quickly so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls m Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls m The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring m Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ringing is set to Not Active Programming To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 O 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed To set Abbreviated Ringing press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active incoming calls ring once the factory setting v m 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Abbreviated Ringing 305 4 2 Programming System Options All Lines Busy Event Use this feature to determine how often all lin
227. call at a time To make a call the user lifts the handset and dials 9 the system selects the first available pool based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for that extension Alternately the user can dial a pool access code to make a call by using a specific pool You should use Pool Line Assignment 207 prior to this procedure to assign lines to or remove lines from pools You can use Line Assignment 301 to assign individual outside lines to buttons on a pooled extension Users must have access to an outside line or pool in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Line Ringing to identify when each pool and individual line assigned to an extension should start ringing the factory setting for pools is No Ring and for lines is Immediate Ring If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 Remove pools from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 4604 4605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change an extension from a pooled extension to a key extension When you use Unique Line Ringing 209 incoming calls that ring at a pool button ring with the pattern assigned to that line You can assign individual ring patterns to lines within a pool Pool Programming 4 52 Programming System Options Programming To as
228. cations System Installation Programming and Use Contact Closure Adjunct The Contact Closure Adjunct plugs into a jack on the processor module and has two Contact Closures to control devices such as an electronic door lock as shown in Figure 9 5 or an alert The device being controlled must be wired to the Adjunct by an electrician in accordance with local electrical codes Program the following features to enable the use of the Contact Closure Adjunct m Contact Closure Group m Contact Closure Operation Type Figure 9 5 Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure 1 Doorphone PARTNER ACS Ext Y Doorphone Alert Extension Contact Closure Adjunct 9 10 Using Auxiliary Equipment Connecting the Contact Closure Adjunct Follow these steps to connect the Contact Closure Adjunct see Figure 9 6 1 Insert the modular plug into the Contact Closure jack the first jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module 2 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Connect the other end of the cord to the jack in the Contact Closure Adjunct 4 Haveaqualified electrician wire the Contact Closure device or devices such as an electronic lock or alert to the wiring receptacles in the other end of the Contact Closure Adjunct See the information shipped with the Contact Closure Adjunct for wiring instructions Figure 9 6 Connecting the Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Jack Cont
229. ccess the feature with one touch Press the button to save the number and press the button later to redial the number m You can program Save Number Redial on more than one button to save more than one number m Unlike Last Number Redial F05 Save Number Redial lets you make other calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial numbers cannot be saved by using this feature m ASave Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting m When you automatically dial the number displayed in the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature you can save the number by using Save Number Redial m f Save Number Redial is programmed on a button it interrupts Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Save Number Redial button 1 Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode pe npo Using Save Number Redial To save a number from a system telephone press the programmed button or Feature 0 4 after dialing the number but before hanging up To redial a stored number press the programmed button again or press Feature 0 4 again Redialing Features 8 59 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Remote Call Forwarding F11 Use this feature to forward all intercom transferred a
230. ce To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Forwarding by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Using Call Forwarding on a Single Line Telephone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HOO Dial your extension number Dial the number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 8 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To remove Call Forwarding 1
231. ced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 7 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned v To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code List 409 Forced Account Code List lets you create a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once a list is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid account code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Considerations An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect If you do not create a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them The system compares the first six digits of an account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code L
232. ck Then unplug the telephone from the adapter and plug the telephone directly into the wall jack m Ifthe telephone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging adapter use only a 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the helpline m If the telephone still does not work properly call the helpline Problems with Tip Ring Devices Tip Ring Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A tip ring device such as a fax machine or answering machine does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as it does for outside calls m f the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Tip Ring Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A tip ring device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m Ifthe device works properly the problem is solved m lfthe problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Call Records Wrap on
233. code from 600 through 699 for that number You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions A System Speed Dial number can be up to 28 characters in length and can consist of the digits 0 9 3 and the special dialing characters see Appendix B Special Characters You assign the number to one of the codes 600 through 699 Considerations m For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Appendix B m You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature m A System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press Hold 6 2 5 8 6 1 CO 0 C m To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star X before the telephone number Marked System Speed Dial numbers appear on the SMDR call report as nnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code The digits in a Marked Speed Dial number do not appear on displays m A Marked System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the telephone number For example press Q9 G9 6 CZ 6 5 6 1D CO 0 C1 m You cannot program System Speed Dial codes on Auto Dial buttons m You c
234. conds Hold Reminder Tone 127 4 42 Programming System Options 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m O Not Active m 6 90 seconds m 1 10 seconds m 7 120 seconds m 2 20 seconds m 8 150 seconds m 3 30 seconds m 9 180 seconds m 4 45 seconds m 5 60 seconds the factory setting 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Hotline 603 Use this feature to identify an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline telephone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions Use a single line telephone as the hotline telephone since this feature makes use only of the telephone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of telephone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline telephone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For example a supermarket installs a hotline telephone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline telephone the butcher s telephone rings If the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline telephone Considerations m The same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline and a doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotli
235. connection 9 11 description 9 10 Contact Closure Device 9 38 Contact Closure Group 9 12 Contact Closure Operation Type 9 13 Control Unit definition 1 7 Control unit 2 8 IN 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use control unit connecting lines and extensions 2 16 installation 2 4 wall mounting 2 4 Copy Settings 3 17 4 17 Copy Settings 399 3 17 copying settings 4 17 cover installation 2 34 covering calls 8 8 A 6 credit card scanners 9 14 Customer Self Service Center on the Internet 11 1 customize an extension 3 16 Cycle Programming Method 3 7 D Date setting 3 10 Date System 101 3 10 day setting 3 10 Daylight Standard Times 3 11 desk mounting a telephone 2 35 Dial Mode 201 4 26 Dial Tone intercom 6 7 6 11 outside 6 7 6 11 recall 4 16 single line telephones 6 11 system phones 6 7 dial tone at an extension 4 44 dial tones 6 7 dial code features 8 2 Dialing from the display 8 25 dialing 8 67 A 5 Auto Dialing 8 5 Personal Speed Dial 8 64 toll calls 4 65 dialing quickly System Speed Dial 4 63 dialing restrictions overriding 8 70 overriding with password 4 61 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 18 4 25 PBX Centrex services with 3 18 Direct Department Calling see Hunt Groups Direct Extension Dial button 7 11 Lines 7 14 record playback 7 14 Direct Extension Dial Button 7 11 using 7 12 Direct Ex
236. cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it b If you have a 5 slot carrier move the carrier s On Off switch to the On position Using a PC Card 10 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use While the system upgrades the LED on the processor module flashes green and red alternately When the upgrade has finished in about 20 to 40 seconds the LED becomes steady green NOTES If the system has a T1 module the module itself may take up to one minute to initialize 10 11 12 m f the system has a 1600 DSL module the module itself may take from 2 to 7 minutes to initialize Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit m fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide If you are upgrading PARTNER ACS R7 0 do not remove the PC card The card automatically converts to a backup restore If you removed other PC cards PVM or ASA DXD for example power down the system and reinstall the PC cards after the upgrade is complete Perform one of the follo
237. creasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Problems with Combination Extensions Telephone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m If the telephone works properly the problem is the REN was too high m If the telephone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do Remove the auxiliary device from the extension Then plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m Ifthe telephone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device m Ifthe telephone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system telephone or the bridging adapter What to do Plug the telephone into the correct jack see Combination Extensions on page 9 3 for instructions m Ifthe telephone works properly the problem is solved m f the problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Problems with Combination Extensions 11 16 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adapter from the wall ja
238. ct a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m Tochange the account code you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the account code you just entered press Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Groups of Extensions Placing extensions into groups allows users to help each other in answering calls You can set up the following groups m Calling Groups m Hunt Groups m Night Service Group m Pickup Groups Calling Group Extensions 502 Use this feature to place extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group The first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller A typical use of this feature is to have callers ring into a Calling Group of sales representatives The system can have up to four Calling Groups For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G on page 8 39 Groups of Extensions 4 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You can assign a T1 line with DID to a calling group However you cannot assign a coverage path for a calling group that has T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID See Direct Inward Dialing DID on page 4 27 Considerations m Extensions can be in more
239. ction to determine which line to use for the outgoing call Programming To program a Remote Call Forwarding button 1 Program a Personal Speed Dial that contains the telephone number to which you want to forward calls See Personal Speed Dial on page 8 64 Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Do one of the following m Press Feature 1 1 m Press and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature 1 1 the number of the originating extension and the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Remote Call Forwarding F11 8 61 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Remote Call Forwarding on a System Telephone To forward calls manually 1 2 3 Press Feature T 1 Dial your extension number Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Remote Call Forwarding manually 1 2 Press Feature 1 1 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 were programmed on the button Remote
240. ctive ring at that extension if they transfer return m Extensions with Do Not Disturb activated do not receive Caller ID information unless the call is answered m Users with Automatic VMS Cover Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m Users with Call Coverage turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to the covering extension m You cannot use Call Screening F25 when Do Not Disturb is turned on Do Not Disturb F01 8 36 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Do Not Disturb button 1 Press Feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button with lights 3 Press DO 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Do Not Disturb From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Exclusive Hold F02 Use this feature to prevent other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system telephone Considerations This feature is available only on system telephones You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch For system telephones if a call is left on hold for longer than the specified Hold Reminder Tone interval if administered the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Re
241. cts pools when a user lifts the handset to make a call To restrict an extension s access to all lines assigned to a pool use Pool Access Restriction 315 If users are not allowed outgoing access to a pool they hear a reorder tone after dialing the pool access code at the intercom dial tone Considerations Consider the following when you make calls m You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a button so a user can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing on page 8 5 m You can program outside numbers for one extension or for the entire system so a user can dial a number by pressing or on a single line telephone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for System Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial on page 8 64 and System Speed Dial on page 8 67 Handling Calls 6 16 Using the Telephones m If you lift the handset before pressing a line or pool button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or pool or the intercom The order in which the system makes the selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension m Oneither a system telephone or a single line telephone you also can use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL to access a line for making an outside call m You can ring or page any of
242. d unless Do Not Disturb is active m The extension s calling restrictions are applied before the calls are forwarded If the destination number is restricted the call will not be forwarded m You can program Remote Call Forwarding on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when Remote Call Forwarding is enabled When the green light is on Remote Call Forwarding is enabled and your calls are forwarded The displays shows Forward When the green light is off Remote Call Forwarding is disabled and calls ring at your extension m If you press the Remote Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call is not forwarded m fthe Remote Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating extension and destination personal speed dial code are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Remote Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Remote Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different Personal Speed Dial code from the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Remote Call Forwarding off Remote Call Forwarding F1 1 8 60 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m Anextension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Remote Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Rest
243. d adt da d dama ed Usmo System Programming 2d duced ere A A qoe bari 3 4 a Programming Overlays 2 cc cuxseccceiGisose ciececicusesecakapeee sage 3 4 NT Ls PPP 3 6 a Podon Ge ccs eee cee bise Up iae LS esRISERPEECPPIRS AREE eS 3 7 Changing Programming Typ uuo deci 29 errar ds E E RU RYE 3 7 Using Centralized Telephone Programming lsessleeselsenen 3 8 Configuring the TT Module ge po pP eccee eee pes Seen REBEL ERR S 3 9 Setting ihe Date and Time sous hos hh RR MUT 3 10 a PES oed dpt arde 3 dl Obl dc dee de plo ACAD e i o 3 10 a System Date 101 ccc ce ech ms cee eceesaeiedeeicectisedasees chastise 3 10 AN Pence tage conchae rei ii id AE S 3 11 a Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 lille 3 11 Administering the Loudspeaker Paging System 0 0 cee ee eee 3 12 Pel ing WINGS acce ra URS DERE UE S a db E sears 3 12 a Murber or Lines 104 corroe 3 12 Hui o rrr 3 14 PODIA ESEDEDUS Lo ua es eec epi epRopE DR Re Poe DI DR I aede dois ur qud 3 14 Customizing Extensions 4 2 00 Nus ed ga d ed EV pad nA wand 9 16 n Copy OWING 5 re rie ise 3 17 a Changing Settings to Support ae o A 3 17 Emergency Phone Number List 408 co i 0 lt econoescoresosniross 3 18 Consideras usasssAdduueketdexedasuwedqexaseqekabess deLddhdqKe 3 18 PIO ir ARO a doe RR Ede oe ERO d 3 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and U
244. ded the button has lights Programming To program an Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 1 1 4 at extension 10 Do one of the following m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v m Ifyou want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 Using the Outgoing Call Restriction Button To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting 1 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction Button at extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction Button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 7 18 Operator Features 2 Pressthe Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatealy until its lights show the
245. ded wall outlet not controlled by a switch and the network interface jacks Follow these steps to wall mount the module s 1 Using the enclosed template mark the screw locations on the wall Hold the processor module against the wall with the line and extension jacks facing left Leave at least 1 foot 0 3 meters clearance at the top front and right side and at least 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side see Figure This allows you to access the jacks or expand the system with another module and ensures adequate ventilation Insert a 48 sheet metal screw into the screw hole at the top of the processor module see Figure If you are installing a second module go to Step 5 If you are not installing a second module stand alone configuration a Insert another 8 sheet metal screw into the screw hole at the bottom of the module b Tighten the screws until the mounting tracks are snug against the wall There must be a 3 8 inch 1 cm gap between the wall and the rest of the module Do not overtighten the screws or the module will warp and fail to operate c Goto the next procedure Labeling Jacks on page 2 9 Figure 2 1 Processor Module Clearance Figure 2 2 Screwing in a Processor Module Installing the Control Unit 2 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5
246. devices 9 38 call records wrap on printout 11 17 call reports 9 36 connecting to SMDR jack 9 38 ferrite core installing 9 38 including a Talk field 9 43 Output Format 9 38 programming 9 40 SMDR Output Format 9 42 SMDR Record Type 9 41 SMDR Talk Time 9 43 SMDR Top of Page 9 41 serial printers 9 38 specifying calls to be included 9 41 specifying number of digits for dialed numbers 9 42 Station Unlock 7 19 Support Customer 11 2 Swapping Extensions 10 18 Switchhook Flash 6 11 8 54 switchhook flash Recall 8 54 time of signal See Recall Timer Duration 4 55 system customizing A 8 initialization 2 13 system capacity 1 5 System clock 10 16 system configurations 1 7 System Date 3 10 System Date 101 3 10 system modules 1 9 System Password 4 61 8 70 using 8 70 System Password 403 4 61 System Phones dial tones 6 7 lights 6 5 microphone 6 7 overview 1 12 programming Telephones see System Phones and Stan dard Phones ringing patterns 6 7 speaker 6 7 Index System phones programming mixed types D 1 System Problems 11 27 system problems 11 27 System Programming methods of 3 7 overview 3 1 PBX Centrex support for 3 17 system programming backup 4 4 restore 4 4 using 3 4 System Programming see also Programming System Programming Basics 3 3 system programming procedures A 1 System Release Status 11 2 system reset retaining programming 4 62 System Reset 7
247. ding Call Follow Me 8 11 Calling Group Extensions 4 35 Cell Phone Connect 8 27 Remote Call Forwarding 8 60 If you are part of a group All Calling Group Extensions 4 35 A 4 Cross Reference of Features Table A 4 Basic Calling and Answering Features Continued Activity For Feature or Function Page Waiting for you after you hear the Call All Call Waiting 4 16 Waiting tone That come to your extension while you All Call Forwarding 8 11 are at another extension Call Follow Me Conferencing and joining calls Conferencing inside and outside parties All Conference Calls 6 25 where the inside parties do not share a line Joining calls of inside parties who share All Joining Calls 6 30 a line Preventing others from joining your calls All Automatic Extension Privacy 4 3 Privacy 8 53 Dialing An inside call All Making Calls 6 16 An outside call All Making Calls 6 16 An inside or outside number with one Auto Dialing 8 5 touch An Account Code for billing to a project All Account Code Entry 8 2 or client during or before a call By entering a 3 digit code for a party that All System Speed Dial 4 63 and 8 67 people in your company call often By entering a 2 digit code for a party you All Personal Speed Dial 8 64 call often telephones with 10 or fewer buttons Outside of normal office hours All Night Service Group Extensions 4 39 A number you dialed before All Last Number Redial 8 57 S
248. dle Line on a Single Line Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line on a single line telephone 1 2 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial 8 and the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access Do Not Disturb F01 Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal You should use Do Not Disturb only if someone answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Considerations m Do Not Disturb is available only on system telephones m Do Not Disturb requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the telephone will not ring m Use Do Not Disturb when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group m To avoid missing calls when Do Not Disturb is not needed turn it off m f Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled m Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb a
249. do not go to voice mail coverage even if VMS Cover is active at the target extension Programming To program a Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 1 2 at extension 10 2 Doone ofthe following m f you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Wake Up Service Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 2 Not Assigned the factory setting Y Wake Up Service Button 115 7 20 Operator Features m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 Using Wake Up Service To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service Button at extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service Button flutters Wake Up Service is activated 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button 3 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p
250. ds 2 20 seconds 3230 seconds 4245 seconds 5 60 seconds Y 6 90 seconds 72120 seconds 82150 seconds 9 180 seconds Rotary Dialing Timeout Dial Q Dial 1 24 secs 2 8 secs Y 3 12 secs Ring On Transfer Dial ANNO Dial 1 Active Y 2 Not Active Dial MODOQM Dial 1 Hold Y 2 Disconnect 3 Ring Automatic System Answer Mode System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 2 Mode of Operation Press ANO Dial 1 Key factory setting v 2 Hybrid r System Reset Programming Saved IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period Dial 22 7 2 8 LI Se ee CE E Flow Charts System Flow Chart System Speed Dial numbers To program a number To remove a number Press 0 to enter programming mode Press 0 0 to enter programming mode Press Press Dial a three digit code 600 699 Dial the telephone number up to 28 digits including special characters Press To mark it to override restrictions dial before the telephone To remove another number repeat To program another number or to change a number repeat P DO it d i r eature xit programming mode Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension and ras pany progra SE repeat above steps Pre
251. dspeaker paging system requires a dry contact relay you must connect the loudspeaker paging system to line jack 5 on the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor 2 Route the RJ 11 cord through the processor module s wire manager If the loudspeaker paging system requires a dry contact relay you must use a four wire RJ 11 cord If the loudspeaker paging system does not require a dry contact relay you may use a two wire cord 3 Connect the other end of the cord to the paging system Connecting the Loudspeaker Paging System 2 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Installing the Cover If you have a 5 slot carrier it is important to install the cover to keep the modules dust free and properly seated and the system working efficiently If you have a 5 slot carrier install the cover by following these steps 1 Position the carrier cover over the modules so that the openings on the top of the carrier cover align correctly with the tabs at the top of the installed 5 slot carrier and modules 2 Rotate the carrier cover into position so that it aligns correctly with the thumb screw opening on the bottom of the carrier 3 Tighten the thumb screw To ensure proper alignment and safe operation tighten the thumb screw securely Installing Telephones After you have installed the control unit and have connected the line and extension cords you are ready to install the telephones Installing the telepho
252. dule 11 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 4 The LAN connection is not established The network connection of the 1600 DSL module can be checked by standard network troubleshooting tools Lack of network connectivity can result in two problems no data connectivity to the internet and or no voice communications when a Pathstar gateway is used What to do Follow these steps to check the LAN connection 1 From the PC or PCs that are experiencing difficulty ping the LAN interface on the 1600 DSL module If this fails check the following m P address and netmask on the PC and 1600 DSL module Make sure they are on the same subnet m Verify that the Ethernet status activity LEDs are lit on the PC hub if used and 1600 DSL module If the LEDs are not lit check the type standard or crossover and condition of the Ethernet cables used to connect the various devices 2 Ping the SDSL IP address the PVC DLCI associated with data of the router If this fails recheck that the address is what you programmed into the 1600 DSL module 3 Ping the gateway address that is programmed into the 1600 DSL module router This address is the router that is at the other end of the data PVC DLCI that is situated at the ISP If this fails confirm the following m Has the gateway been programmed into the 1600 DSL module From the Main Menu press 2 s and f If the default va
253. e Auto Dialing on page 8 5 System Speed Dial on page 4 63 and Personal Speed Dial on page 8 64 for programming instructions Programming To program an Account Code Entry button 1 Pd ND Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press ma Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Account Code Entry To enter or change an optional account code 1 From a system telephone if a password is programmed for the system enter it before lifting the handset After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature Q 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code by doing one of the following m Dial the account code manually by using the telephone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Account Code Entry F12 8 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 6 Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press to indicate the end of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 To enter or change a forced acco
254. e AAA A A bure d 4 3 a POUR 2ho2h cree seevicen ceed ee tecaesades erT e es en beans 4 4 Backup and AROS oi cei E PEPELEA IEEE QR AA kane 4 4 s COMEMOS vssasedalerexvedasddr esdssieudancusEaTdAxbd d ddddqqn 4 4 a Backup Programming Automatic 123 icuoouose cerchi eEa tuus RTI RE Re 4 5 a Backup Programming Manual 124 llli 4 6 a Restore Programming 125 om caoba RR rere ad e Rr R ere teh ot 4 7 Call Coverage Rings o a hak 6b 2 408 tkir E ERENT VOR RCR OE CR OEC HR d 4 9 a Considerations weer bs ded Q weer ara 49 RS AA 4 9 Caller ID Programming APA BRI EqUAMEREREROA ERA 4 10 a NOT 2 6432 idr rita iberica cerda ribera 4 10 a Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 ooooooooccrononrrnoo noo 4 12 a Caller ID Call Log Line Association 2318 oooooocooooonmmooo 4 13 a Caller ID Log All Calls F319 sa edat ges ra P eR RR ARIAS 4 14 a Caller ID Type 22 TIT 4 15 Eo PDC mm 4 16 ti Loco gatio pd pote DUREE pii RR iR detentus 4 16 a FIONN fett TTC Tre 4 16 Copy SAI DERE L LG dede AAA ARA ARA do RO Rl 4 17 s Considerations AA T TET T 4 17 a Progamm eT rra arre 4 18 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions oro sarissrares ree REY 4 18 a Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 ETT dades 4 18 a Allowed List Assignments 408 cocer rr AAA 4 20 a Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 llle 4 20 a Disallowed List Assignments 405
255. e active on the speakerphone 2 Pressthe Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The System automatically selects a line if you did not specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number The number being dialed appears on a display telephone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use Auto Dialing 8 6 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Background Music F19 Use this feature to provide background music through the speaker of an idle system telephone for your work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Considerations Background Music is available only if Music On Hold is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module m Background Music is available only on system telephones with speakers m The Background Music feature broadcasts music over telephone lines The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law In order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives such as ASCAP or BMI The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually m Background Music stops when you mak
256. e and a fax machine on the same extension This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the telephone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and hang up Fax Machines 9 18 Using Auxiliary Equipment If you are using PARTNER Messaging or the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER Messaging or PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically For PARTNER Mail use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify fax extensions If you have multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hunt Group any group 1 6 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only For information on how to program PARTNER Messaging to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically see the PARTNER Messaging Installation Programming and Troubleshooting Online Guide or the PARTNER Messaging System Manager s Quick Reference Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup shown in Figure 9 8 is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other telephones when all other
257. e automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions Administering the Loudspeaker Paging System 3 12 Initial System Programming m Tochange pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 m In Hybrid mode do not use this feature to add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes the following features for existing pools back to factory settings Pool Line Assignment Pool Extension Assignment Pool Access Restriction Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing m In Hybrid and Key mode do not use this feature to add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes the following features for individual lines back to factory settings Line Assignment Line Access Restriction Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing m To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 m f your system has a 1600 DSL module the module is automatically assigned 16 lines If you have less than 16 lines actually equipped for service you may remove the unequipped line appearances from the extension telephones by using Line Ass
258. e button is programmed the user can turn the feature on by pressing the button Calls are now screened until the user turns the feature off by pressing the button again When the feature is on Call Screening begins once the voice mail system has answered the call While the call is being screened the user is connected to the call in a listen only mode on the speakerphone The user can hear both the outgoing announcement and the incoming caller leaving the message Call Screening F25 8 16 Programming amp Using Telephone Features One call can be screened at a time at an extension If more than one call is ringing the system uses the ringing line order procedure to determine which of the eligible calls to screen Once Call Screening begins the user can m Answer the screened call by going off hook on the handset This causes voice mail to drop off the call m Turn the feature off by pressing the Call Screening button again The telephone drops off the call but the voice mail system does not drop off the call m Answer or place another call This causes the telephone to drop off the call A green steady LED for the button indicates that Call Screening is on but not currently screening any calls While a call is being screened the button LEDs alternately flash red and green to indicate that the connection has been established NOTE You cannot screen a call if the Cell Phone Connect feature is active Considerations m Call Sc
259. e call rings at the extension the PARTNER system places a call to the specified telephone number The destination that is your extension telephone or the telephone number in the Personal Speed Dial code that answers first is connected to the call and the call stops ringing at the other destination Cell Phone Connect has the following requirements m Your PARTNER system must have a T1 module and your extension must be able to access a line on the T1 module m The Remote Call Forwarding 322 feature must be enabled for your extension m For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line Coverage Extension 208 for that line Considerations m You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls m Line Coverage Extension 208 must be assigned to the extension for that extension to use Cell Phone Connect for a line However for Direct Inward Dialing DID lines on a T1 module Line Coverage Extension 208 is not required to be assigned to the extension for that extension to use Cell Phone Connect for a line m f your extension has voice mail and the outside telephone number has voice mail and you do not answer the call at your extension or the outside telephone number one of the two voice mail systems will answer the call Which voice mail system will answer the call depends on the following factors The time it takes for the call to ring at the outside telephone number For exa
260. e interval if administered the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone continues to sound at the specified interval for example 60 seconds until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Hold acts differently on feature telephones single line telephones with feature buttons When you press a button on a feature telephone the call is held at the telephone itself This means other telephones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also callers on hold at a feature telephone do not hear the system s Music On Hold You can use Exclusive Hold F02 to put calls on hold that can be retrieved only from your own extension Placing a call on Exclusive Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that call the call no longer is availa
261. e or answer a call but resumes when the telephone becomes idle again m Ifa system telephone and a single line telephone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the single line telephone s message waiting light does not light if Background Music is on at the system telephone m You can program a Background Music button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch Use a button with lights m Call Screening F25 overrides Background Music Programming To program a Background Music button 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Press 1 9 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Background Music F19 8 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Background Music To turn Background Music on 1 From a system telephone with a speaker press the programmed button or press Feature 9 If the telephone is idle you hear Background Music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on 2 Toadjustthe volume of Background Music use the telephone s volume control buttons while listening to the Background Music To turn Background Music off press the programmed button or press Feature 1 9 If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Call Coverage F20 XX XX Use this feature to redirect al
262. e signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax machines Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system and the auto attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group m Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy m f only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed amount of Transfer Return Rings m You can program a Group Hunting button on a system telephone to ring or voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch m If you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 Intercom 7 7 7 on a button to retrieve messages with one touch m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk A call to your extension will then move dir
263. e them on that line m 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line Do one of the following m To restrict another line at this extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 24 Programming System Options Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Use this feature to specify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension Considerations If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead Outgoing Call Restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup ldle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List 407 and the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Also if a System Password 403 is defined MLS system telephone users can enter it to override restrictions You can program a button on the
264. e to activate Remote Call Forwarding for an extension When activated you can forward all intercom transferred and outside calls from your extension to an outside telephone number via Remote Call Forwarding or Cell Phone Connect See Remote Call Forwarding F11 on page 8 60 and Cell Phone Connect F11 on page 8 27 for more information Considerations Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled before you can forward calls via Cell Phone Connect and Remote Call Forwarding m For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line Coverage Extension 208 for that line m You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls m You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions Voice Interrupt On Busy calls coverage calls transfer return calls Wake Up Service calls and Night Service calls m Remote Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park on page 8 14 m You cannot use Call Screening F25 for calls that are forwarded m The PARTNER system will forward only calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lines Hold Disconnect Time 203 must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection m The extension must have an available line to forward the call to an outside number m The PARTNER system uses the extension s Automatic Line Selection to determine which line to use for the outgoing call Programming To change the Remote Call Forwarding setti
265. e you can activate a Contact Closure your extension must be assigned to the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure Use Contact Closure Operation Type to specify how long the Contact Closure remains active when activated If the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle one user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure When the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle if a user activates the Contact Closure so that the toggle is On and then a power failure occurs the toggle automatically changes to Off as a security measure If you plan to use a Contact Closure to control a door lock you may also want to install a doorphone at that door Use Doorphone Extension to identify the extension to which the doorphone is connected and Doorphone Alert Extensions to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed You can assign some or all of the Doorphone Alert extensions to a Contact Closure Group so that users at those extensions can control the door lock You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Contact Closure button 1 2 3 4 Press o0 Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Co
266. ear intercom dial tone 2 Press HOO 3 Dial your extension number twice Send All Calls You can use Call Coverage or VMS Cover with Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls DID calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to your voice mailbox If Call Coverage is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension This allows callers to receive coverage without waiting for the number of rings specified with Call Coverage Rings If VMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to immediately send that call and subsequent calls to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without waiting for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings If Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that coverage call and all subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension If there is no answer at the covering extension the calls go to your voice mailbox after the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings Send All Calls 8 63 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Send AII Calls To send a covered call immediately to the covering extension If Call Coverage is not turned on while the call is ringing press the Call Coverage button
267. earing a Backup Failure Alarm ssseesseseeeee nennen 11 4 012E Module Power MANAGING IN uis eoi itd miei 11 4 System Telephones Mio in E E D o 11 5 Single Line Telephone Problems ooooconnoccccnonoccccncconcncnnnnonccnnnannnccnnnnnnn non nnne 11 9 Other Telephone PODIAS coco ii ii 11 11 Problems with Combination EXIBIISIORS sisi 11 16 Problems wih TERNG DOVICES T M 11 17 Problems with the 1600 DSL Module nannten nnnm rn nnn tt 11 18 Problems with Automatic Backup Lese A te lo ep py Per eer 11 21 Problems wih Manual Dacia na QUI RUM ANE PELA LM EA RI 11 23 xis o m 11 25 A A n Re Fo A URS ELI 11 27 Other Problems i dlc EET To S 11 30 A Cross Reference of Features B Special Characters EXIME mene Mere CO e Een rer rr MRT rrr irr REDE TEE Een TH FEES B 2 C Speed Dial Form Speco D PONE mat ia C 1 D Programming Mixed Telephone Types O Y EE E REN ON IUD RHEIN D 1 vi Master TOC Master Table of Contents o q Eo zzz E Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use ooooocoocccccccccccconaoonnnnnnccnnanannnnnoncnnnnnns E 1 Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 10 Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 13 IN index HERE __ _ _ ______ M ee Master TOC vii PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM
268. eat the unlocking procedure System Password The System Administrator programs a four digit password that you can enter from PARTNER and MLS telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Considerations The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction and Pool Access Restriction Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List and Marked System Speed Dial numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Using System Password To use System Password 1 Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at a PARTNER or MLS telephone press Hold Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display telephones Press an outside line button or press and a two digit line number or a pool button or press and a three digit access code and lift the handset Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the telephone System Password 8 70 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Touch Tone Enable F08 Use this feature to send touch tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line For example you may need to dial
269. eature is off A user is entering a four digit code to lock or unlock his or her extension Call Screening and Record a Call Red means the extension programmed on the button is busy Extension programmed on the button is idle Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you System Telephones 6 6 Using the Telephones Table 6 2 Light Patterns on System Telephones Continued Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Button Green Flutter short on short off A call is on Exclusive Hold at your extension and can only be retrieved from your extension A call on a line in the pool is on Exclusive Hold at your extension and can be retrieved Caller ID Inspect is on or a Wake Up Service call is being scheduled A call transferred to the extension programmed on the button is now returning to your from extension only from your 0 y telephone or you extension are being manually signaled by the extension Red Broken m ES Flutter short on off long off Fax Management only the fax extension is not answering calls may be out of paper 1 Applies to Caller ID Name Display Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button Privacy Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back and VMS Cover all of which require programming on a button with lights Can also apply to Account Code E
270. ec gB SLM SCN SCO SCP YA ECZ BLG 1 800 800 800 80 gO BLA 808 800 800 SLE amp CF H B Ext Message Intercom Intercom Overview D 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Overview READ LALADAAAALLACAEAEAEA AEAEAEAEAEALALALLDAAALALAALAALAAAA D 4 Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the following sets of Flow Charts follow these instructions first Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 To Start System Programming Press Feature 0 0 Press System Program System Program To End System Programming Press Feature 0 0 To Use a Specific Procedure Dial and a three digit procedure code Example AMOO for System Date To Cycle through System Programming Procedures Press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure To Cycle Through Available Settings Press Next Data or Prev Data To Return to Factory Setting Press NOTES Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling Icon Description v xt Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Ch
271. ectly to the next available extension in the group m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover m When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G 8 42 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Hunt Group button Press OO Press a programmable button 1 Do one of the following To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt Group press left and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a System Telephone To use the programmed button To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press Sekr and press the programmed button If you are voice signaling start talking after the beep To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group Lift the handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone 1 Do one of the following To make a ringing call dial and a grou
272. ed c Verify the Encapsulation settings Frame Relay and ATM PCR ATM and Service ATM are those provided by the service provider d lf you are running ATM as a data link protocol and the network provider has established a third PVC for OAM create this in the ATM Configuration Menu From the Main Menu press 5 1 4 and 2 After performing a cold start of the system attempt an OAM loopback to verify the ATM connection has been established If the 1600 DSL module still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The voice gateway connection is not established What to do Follow these steps to check the voice gateway connection 1 2 Seize any of the lines assigned to the 1600 DSL module If dial tone is not received on any of the lines assigned to the 1600 DSL module do the following a Confirm the gateway manufacturer b Confirm with the service provider which of the DLCIs Frame Relay or PVCs ATM are associated with the gateway There will be two provided one for voice and one for data Make sure the correct DLCI PVC is associated with the voice C For systems with Lucent Pathstar verify the Router settings for the voice DLCI PVC Also verify the MGCP NCS client settings that are found in the Manage MGCP NCS Embedded Client section of the Main Menu If the 1600 DSL module still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 4 Problems with the 1600 DSL Mo
273. ed the factory setting v To specify another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all desired lines Select another procedure or exit programming mode Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Use this feature to program a button to turn Direct Extension Dial DXD on and off Direct Extension Dial permits an outside caller to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without the aid of the operator DXD calls also can be transferred directly into a Calling Group It is ideal for outside callers who frequently talk with specific employees or service groups and know the extension number they are trying to reach When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Direct Extension Dial the system picks it up after a specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension Hunt Group or Calling Group Considerations m This feature is available only on the system telephone at extension 10 m Use only one automated answering option for incoming calls either this feature the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system or a PARTNER Attendant m This feature can handle three outside calls simultaneously m If you have lines programmed for Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial answers the call first m A Direct Extension Dial Button m
274. ed on the front inside cover An ASA DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears Possible Cause You are attempting to record an Automatic System Answer message 1891 or a Direct Extension Dial DXD message 1892 and an ASA DXD PC card is not installed in the processor module What to do To clear the message at extension 10 program an Automatic System Answer 111 button if you used 1891 to try to record the greeting or a Direct Extension Dial 112 button if you used 1892 to try to record the greeting Press the programmed button to turn the feature on then press the programmed button to turn it off again After you turn the feature off the error message should be cleared and you can remove the button assignment using 111 or 112 System Problems 11 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines Are Disconnected Possible Cause Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Disconnect What to do Change Automatic System Answer Mode 121 from Disconnect to either Hold or Ring m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines still get disconnected or the Automatic System Answer Mode already was set to Hold or Ring call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time set
275. ed to the parked call parked calls take precedence over ringing calls Call Pickup I6XX 8 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press Feature O 0 Press a programmable button To specify the extension to be answered press left Intercom followed by 6 and the two digit system extension number For example to answer a call ringing at extension 23 press left niece QO 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Call Pickup on a System Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press niercom 6 and the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Using Call Pickup on a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 plus the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Call Screening F25 Call Screening allows you to listen to a caller leaving a message in your mailbox This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system and an MLS or PARTNER system telephone This feature is not available on tip ring telephones NsEcunmY ALERT Use Station Lock F21 to prevent misuse of this feature If Station Lock is activated Call Screening does not work You must program Call Screening on a line button with LEDs by using Centralized Telephone Programming Once th
276. eder dC EC ARA OH OD 9 44 a Programming a Voice Messaging System TM 2 9 44 Additional Voice Messaging System Programming 00 0000 9 45 Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview You can use various auxiliary equipment with the PARTNER ACS The connection and the programming for the following equipment is explained in this chapter Answering Machines Contact Closure Adjuncts Credit Card Scanners Fax Machines Modems Music On Hold Station Message Detail Recording Call reporting This chapter also discusses the programming of Automated Attendants Doorphones Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment Voice Messaging Systems Besides these the chapter explains the connecting of a loudspeaker paging system to a line jack The auxiliary equipment is discussed in alphabetical order In addition you can connect the following devices to your system Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a telephone ring in a noisy area such as a factory Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a telephone ring in a quiet area such as a library Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a telephone without lifting the handset Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations Overview 9 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Specialty
277. eeen ciaeeseae 9 18 a Using the Fax Management Feature 0000s 9 23 a Fax ONG Detection 8505 Group B c cicsoccrmiarurca RR RR ERN ben P ERES 9 23 a Fax Machine Extensions 601 aseco bu EDRJesd4d rcr OE P A 9 25 Loudspeaker Paging Systemi serei eed e EO AAA 9 26 4 Loudspeaker Paging Lina 617 rsrs seu ae kaksaekid PqEwEEr Ras S ace ads 9 28 ls p PH 9 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Lamm m tea ee eee ee a Modem Tor Sending Calls Only sias ax WR RE RA REA rd 9 29 a Send and Receive Modem 42 5045 564 idee eeu oros e 9 30 Pe AA TET TOT IIT 9 32 a Connecting a Music On Hold Audio Source 0 000 cee eee 9 32 a Musie On Hold F602 qaae dd edi kerri dale HERR EE RE HOS ATE 9 33 a Music On Hold Volume 614 ree PT dade sere Mua Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment coo Ir RR ERR e 9 34 Eat co duc AAA Li rE tense teehee ecoece 9 35 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR cocccocccccccc 9 35 amp ON cin ORG THLE rd e R dod dO ol ace e dai RR Ro ER 9 36 a Call Reports ex esa ERRADA AAA AR Rees 9 36 FE enc dz dcs PM RO E TE E t T TI TI sas 9 38 E or fudit TER ERTEILEN 9 38 a all Accounting DOORS sae 50d FIG PP Ip re Tes OE emcd gd beatos 9 38 a Connecting a Device to the SMDR Jack 0 000 ee 9 38 E unb RTT TET TT TOIT UTITUR 9 40 Voice Messaging SySIBITIS iud
278. egardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List You can create up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each An Allowed Phone Number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 and the wildcard character displayed as Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 18 Programming System Options Considerations For specific telephone numbers enter the number exactly as you would dial it To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 800 or 1800 After programming the Allowed Phone Number Lists you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Number Lists override Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 but not Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction 315 or Night Service Button 503 with a System Password 403 The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial call
279. eives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered m Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups m If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ring in the group See Auto Attendant on page 9 8 for more information m If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options Automated Attendant Service or calls routed directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user See Voice Messaging Systems on page 9 44 for more information m You should not assign T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID to Hunt Groups If a Hunt Group contains T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID callers will receive busy signal when all extensions in the Hunt Group are busy for example off hook have Do Not Disturb activated or are in programming mode See Direct Inward Dialing DID on page 4 27 Examples Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution and Hunt Groups Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group This lets outside callers ring the group directly without being transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hu
280. ell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before sending the fax There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension m Press the Fax Management button When the fax machine answers hang up m If you do not have a Fax Management button press plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up m Onastandard telephone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold Then dial the fax extension number and hang up m If you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press Tansir then plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up NOTE If you have a PARTNER Messaging or PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER Messaging or PARTNER MAIL system you can program its Automated Attendant Service to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines Setting Up Fax Machines There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use m Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax number Fax machine line saver Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax traffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephon
281. em Programming 3 6 PARTNER 6 Phone C A B oo ng np np na an Intercom Ext Intercom o Message Initial System Programming Programming Mode When you are ready to program a system or telephone feature you must enter programming mode Follow these steps to enter programming mode 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 2 To enter programming mode press Feature 0 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 appears instead of 10 3 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 4 Press again A display similar to the following appears SYSTEM PROGRAM 5 Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways m Direct Method Dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by a and a three digit code for example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes m Cycle Method Cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press and to cycle forward and bac
282. ension number Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Press Press a programmable button Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 7 Voice Mailbox Transfer Press Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal For ringing the first available extension Press a programmable button Press Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 For paging the first available extension Press a programmable button Press Dial a Hunt Group number 1 6 Recall Press a programmable button with lights Press 0 Record A Call Press a programmable button Press Remote Call Forwarding Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial two digit originating extension number Dial two digit destination po Personal Speed Dial Number 9E Press a programmable button Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 16 Index Numerics 012E module 2 31 012E module power management 11 4 1600 DSL Module 2 24 initial configuration 2 25 programming connections 2 25 1600 DSL module flash memory retention of configuration 4 5 LAN configuration 2 30 problems 11 18 router configuration voice 2 29 router configuration for data 2 30 SDSL interface configuration 2 26 troubleshooting 11 18 voice ga
283. ension Dial Button with lights at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program AQQ 3 2 Doone ofthe following m If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to unassign Direct Extension Dial press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 2 Not Assigned the factory setting wv m If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to a specific button press 3 The display reads DXD Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 Using the Direct Extension Dial Button To turn Direct Extension Dial on press the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Direct Extension Dial is on If calls are ringing when you turn Direct Extension Dial on the calls are answered immediately by the system To turn Direct Extension Dial off press the Direct Extension Dial Button at extension 10 The green light goes off and Direct Extension Dial is off Any calls being answered by the system continue to hear the recorded message and are prompted to enter a destination extension Direct Extension Dial Features 7 12 Operator Feature
284. ension from which a coverage call is being sent If a user is not active on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing he or she can press the line pool or buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent However if the user picks up the handset he or she joins or answers the call that was previously ringing at the originating extension shown on the display Call Coverage does not apply to parked calls See Call Park on page 8 14 If you want calls answered by Call Coverage to be logged as unanswered calls use Call Log Line Associations to associate the lines with extensions for logging unanswered calls You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Call Coverage F20 XX XX 8 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program a Call Coverage button 1 Press feature 0 0 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights At this point you can do one of the following m Press Feature D m Press Feature Z O and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature Z 0 the number of the originating extension and the number of the covering extension 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Call Coverage at a System Telephone To send calls for coverage manually 1 Press Feature 2 0 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extens
285. ents the use of QOO to block Caller ID information If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers override the Disallowed List Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 m If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering telephone numbers in a list you must press Next Procedure Prev Procedure since entering and a three digit code is considered part of the telephone number Programming To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program A 4 O 4 at extension 10 or 11 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 At the Ent ry prompt select a list entry 01 10 At the Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press E
286. ephone company does not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to 450 msec the factory setting The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call and then hanging it up m Shorten the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect m Lengthen the hold disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected prematurely m Using Set administration you can program and view the hold disconnect time for analog lines only You must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program and view the hold disconnect time for lines on the T1 module m The range of values for the hold disconnect time is different for lines on the T1 module For these lines the values are No Detection or 10 to 2400 msec in 20 msec increments The default setting is 300 msec See the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software for more information Programming To change the hold disconnect time for a non T1 line 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 2 O 3 at extension 10 or 11 Atthe Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line for which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time The current hold disconnect time for the line number you specified is displayed For example if line 1 is set to the factory setting 09 450 msec appears on the display Hold Disconnect Time 203 4 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and
287. ephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the tip ring devices connected to your system dial out at the same time You can identify several extensions as external hotlines Do not assign an external hotline to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308bEC module which are reserved as power failure extensions Use Hotline 603 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines or pools first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number assign a line for use only by this extension Set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines or pools assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call line or pool restrictions assigned to an external hotline Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the outside number from being dialed Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline External Hotline 311 4 31 PARTNER
288. ephone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first m For combination extensions the Automatic Line Selection for both devices including a tip ring device follows the automatic line selection for the extension m You do not need to include all available lines or pools for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically Programming To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1i 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection Press 3 Press the line pool or buttons in the desired order The valid entries for Automatic Line Selection depend upon the type of extension m Key Extension Outside system lines Left Intercom the factory setting f m Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 Left Intercom Right Intercom the factory setting Pools 881 883 individual lines For each button pressed a display similar to the following appears Automatic Line Selection To exit Automatic Line Selection press 3 Press and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode Automatic Line Selection 5 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Extension Name Display You can assign a name to an extension up to 20 characters
289. er m f Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled m f a Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct controls a door lock consider assigning the Doorphone Alert Extensions to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Only extensions assigned to that Contact Closure Group can activate the door lock Programming To identify doorphone alert extensions 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 O 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first alert system extension number Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Notan Alert Extension the factory setting v m 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension m 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension m 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension To identify another alert extension press Next tem or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Doorphone Programming 9 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Use these features to identify an extension to which a doorphone is connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension for the first doorpho
290. er before the answering machine does When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Programming 1 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring 2 Ifthe lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can If the answering machine is to cover transferred or coverage calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension This way the answering machine picks up transferred or coverage calls before they return to the transfer return extension or are sent to the covering extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Answering Machines 9 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Auto Attendant An auto attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the auto attendant answers calls and tells callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts or 3 for Service You can set up an auto attendant for immediate call handling or delayed call handling A common use of an auto attendant is as a backu
291. ercom dial tone Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call and then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller m f you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension Lift the handset to reconnect to the caller Handling Calls 6 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To make a voice signaled transfer to a system telephone in Step 2 above press plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up f you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be b
292. es Hold Disconnect Time 203 must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection You can activate Cell Phone Connect while the Station Lock F21 feature is enabled for your extension If an Allowed Phone Number List 407 is assigned to the extension the destination telephone number must be included in that list If a Disallowed Phone Number List 404 is assigned to the extension the destination telephone number must not be included in that list The extension must have an available T1 line to forward the call to an outside number The PARTNER system uses the extension s Automatic Line Selection to determine which line to use for the outgoing call You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension If you transfer a call without announcing it to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active the caller will hear silence or music if the Music On Hold feature is active during the transfer Cell Phone Connect F11 8 28 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Programming To program a Cell Phone Connect button 1 Program a Personal Speed Dial that contains the telephone number to which you want to forward calls See Personal Speed Dial on page 8 64 1 Press Feature C 0 2 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 3 Doone ofthe following m Press feature MM m Press and
293. es administered in the system excluding the Loudspeaker Paging Line are busy When all lines are busy a record is generated in the PARTNER ACS event log This record will include the time of day when all lines were busy and length of time this event lasted When at least one of the lines is no longer busy an All Lines Cleared event is generated in the PARTNER ACS event log You can use this feature to determine if your PARTNER system has enough lines You can view the PARTNER ACS event log via PC Diagnostics Considerations m You must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program the All Lines Busy Event feature and access the PARTNER ACS event log m Every 10 seconds the PARTNER system checks automatically whether all lines are busy m The Loudspeaker Paging Line is not considered a line Programming To change the All Lines Busy Event setting you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Use this feature to prevent a user from joining an active call at an extension When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for single line telephones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted This feature can provide the Privacy F07 function for single line telephones Conside
294. es not require any from the system Because single line telephones do not have system line or pool buttons buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system telephones In addition you cannot perform the following actions at a single line telephone You cannot enter programming mode Because there are no line buttons on single line telephones you must use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to select a specific line otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when you dial a 9 at intercom dial tone Similarly because there are no pool buttons on single line telephones you must dial pool access codes at the intercom dial tone to request access to an idle pooled line See Making Calls on page 6 16 for instructions on using pool access codes Otherwise the system selects an idle line from a pool automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific single line telephone extensions there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller hears a busy tone if a single line telephone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in for the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties You
295. essage over a large area The system supports all Avaya paging systems including the entire PagePac line The system also supports most paging systems from other manufacturers when the paging systems are connected using a paging interface device Follow these steps to connect a paging system to a line jack on the a PARTNER module see Figure 9 11 NOTE If you connect a loudspeaker paging system from another manufacturer a paging interface may be required 1 Insert the modular plug into an available line jack on a PARTNER module A loudspeaker paging system can be connected to a line jack on the following PARTNER modules m PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module m 308EC module m 362EC module m 400E module 400EC module m 200E module Loudspeaker Paging System 9 26 Using Auxiliary Equipment m 206 module 206E module 206EC module NOTE It is recommended that you connect the loudspeaker paging system to the last line jack in your PARTNER system to prevent any conflict with your line assignments When you provision a loudspeaker paging system to a line jack on the PARTNER system that line is removed from the system For example suppose your system has four lines and you connect your loudspeaker paging system to line jack 4 The lines are connected to Line jack 1 Line jack 2 Line jack 3 and Line jack 5 When you administer the lines the PARTNER system will label these four lines as Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 and Line 5 Line 4
296. extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return If you transfer a call Caller ID information if it is available is passed to the destination extension If you have a voice messaging system you can use Voice Mailbox Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox An extension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer either of two active calls You cannot use Transfer with Record a Call F24 Call Screening F25 and Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 If you transfer a call without announcing it to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active the caller will hear silence or music if the Music On Hold feature is active during the transfer Transferring a Call on a System Telephone Follow these instructions to transfer a call by using a system telephone m To transfer a call to another extension 1 While active on the call press rransr The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line or pool button winks 2 Dialthe extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call and then hang up 4
297. f the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Evaluating the Environment 2 2 Installation Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Continued Specification Value Requirements for L Out of Building Installations n Wiring B L Safety a Requirements n Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the following In Range Out Of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and device from electrical surges System phone two IROB protectors Standard phone two IROB protectors plus one carbon block protector Installation of a Contact Closure Adjunct controlled device outside the building requires a 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 to protect the control unit from electrical surges System phones SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2 pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Class 2 power standards UL 1012 Standard for Safety Power Supplies UL 1310 Stand
298. fic pool press the pool button or press and the three digit pool access code Press Feature Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display telephone Using Personal Speed Dial on a Single Line Telephone You can dial Personal Speed Dial on a single line telephone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Speed Dialing Features 8 66 Programming amp Using Telephone Features System Speed Dial Use this feature to dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a single line telephone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 The System Administrator has programmed up to 100 frequently used numbers as System Speed Dial numbers Any user on the system can dial these numbers Considerations System Speed Dial numbers cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and System Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or System Speed D
299. for coverage See Send All Calls on page 8 63 If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Ifthe covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For transferred calls Ifthe covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings Ifthe covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time at the user s extension before it goes to the transfer return extension If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence If a user at a covering extension has a system display telephone and is busy on a call he or she can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the ext
300. fore starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 To replace a module or modules in a stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 1 Remove the power cord from the wall outlet 2 Check the slack in the wires If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free label and disconnect the wires before continuing 3 Doone ofthe following m For a stand alone configuration remove the screws at the top and bottom of the processor module and remove the module from the wall Go to Step 8 m For a 2 slot carrier configuration remove the long screw at the bottom of the modules see Figure 10 5 Figure 10 5 Removing the Bottom Screw ME 4 Remove the screws that attach the carrier to the modules see Figure 10 6 Replacing Modules 10 10 Upgrading the System Figure 10 6 Removing the Carrier Screws 5 Pull the carrier to the right to remove it see Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 Pulling Off the Carrier 6 Slide the top module to the left to disengage its interlocking mounting tracks from the processor module Replacing Modules 10 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use F
301. g 4 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Caller ID Log All Calls 319 Use this feature to program a maximum of one extension to log all answered Caller ID calls and all unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines You must use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the extension that will log all calls Then use the Caller ID Log All Calls feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines Once the features are activated for an extension when the user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all Caller ID calls that are answered or unanswered by any extension on the associated lines are logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered NOTE Caller ID Log All Calls is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 series or tip ring telephones The Caller ID Log All Calls feature is useful when a user needs information for all calls received in the system For example a supervisor could use the log for quality assurance by contacting callers and inquiring about the customer s satisfaction with the results of the call Considerations m To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button m
302. g Features 8 67 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Station Lock F21 Use this feature to enter a four digit code on your telephone dialpad to lock your extension Later you enter the identical code to unlock the extension Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from these extensions You should lock your extension whenever you leave your desk for an extended period of time Considerations m Station Lock is available only on system and single line touch tone telephones m You can program a Station Lock button on a system telephone Use a button with lights so you can quickly determine whether or not the extension is locked m You can enter a different code each time you lock your extension m A user ata locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive intercom and outside calls m All outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List are restricted from locked extensions m If you forget the code use Station Unlock to unlock the extension m Do not lock External Hotline extensions m Station Lock returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset was used m You cannot use the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature when your extension is locked m For security purposes use Station Lock to prevent misuse of Call Screening F25 m You can program Perso
303. g any modules make sure the clear plastic protector has been removed from Figure 2 9 Removing the Plastic the connector area on the rear of each module Protector To remove the protector grasp the tabs on the E Tab ends of the protector and lift see Figure 2 9 D 3 Insert the PARTNER ACS processor module in 0 E the center slot of the carrier Tab Installing the Control Unit 2 8 4 n the other slots from left to right first install the T1 module or 1600 DSL module then the 012E 308EC or 206 modules followed by the 400 or 200 modules and or a PARTNER Messaging or PARTNER MAIL VS module Align the module carefully in the appropriate slot For proper engagement of the connectors the module must be inserted straight into the carrier see Figure 2 10 Once the module is properly seated firmly push the center of the module until the connectors on the module lock into place A slight click indicates the connectors are engaged NOTE Installation Figure 2 10 Inserting a Module If you use a T1 module or a 1600 DSL module it must be in the first slot on the left The 012E 308EC and 206 modules must be to the left of any 400 and 200 module PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports Endeavor telephones when an Endeavor 362EC module is installed in the carrier Install the Endeavor 362EC module s to the right of the T1 module or 1600 DSL module if one i
304. g on Transfer 4 58 to voice mailbox 8 76 transfer transferring calls 6 27 Transfer Button 6 27 Transfer Return Display Message 6 27 Transfer Return Extension 4 66 Transfer Return Extension 306 4 66 Transfer Return Programming 4 65 Transfer Return Rings 4 67 Transfer Return Rings 105 4 67 Transfer Ringing 6 7 6 11 6 27 Transfer One touch 6 29 Transfer One touch see Auto Dial Numbers Transferring a Call to another extension 6 27 to fax machine 9 17 troubleshooting backup problems automatic 11 21 manual 11 23 combination extensions 11 16 other telephone problems 11 11 single line telephones 11 9 system problems 11 27 all calls disconnected 11 28 ASA DXD missing card message 11 27 calls on ASA lines disconnected 11 28 calls on hold disconnected 11 27 dead telephones 11 29 modem transmission quality poor 11 30 no disconnect after held call hangs up 11 28 other 11 30 troubleshooting continued System Restore 11 25 system telephones 11 5 tip ring devices 11 17 troubleshooting system problems all lines busy 4 3 U Unique Line Ringing 4 67 Unique Line Ringing 209 4 67 upgrading adding new extensions 10 18 adding new lines 10 16 adding new modules 10 7 adding new pools 10 17 changing system settings 10 16 changing the system clock 10 16 replacing modules 10 10 5 slot carrier configuration 10 13 stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 10 10 swapping extensions 10 18
305. g to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that 24 digit output is supported Considerations m Ifthe output format is set to 15 digits and a prints as the last digit of a dialed number on a call report indicating that the digits dialed exceed the 15 digits the Number field can hold you may want to change the output format to 24 digits m If the output format is set to 24 digits and SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active the combined length of the fields for a call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits m When you change the output format the length of the Number field is adjusted for the next call record that prints To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Programming To change the maximum number of digits for dialed numbers that can print on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 C System Program System Program A 6 1 O at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 15 Digits the factory setting wv m 2 24 Digits 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 42 Using Auxiliary Equipment SMDR Talk Time 611 Use this feature to indicate whether or not you want to
306. ge light on or off by using Message Light On or Message Light Off respectively The XX in the code represents the extension number Considerations For message waiting capability single line telephones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a processor module a 308EC module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns on off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been received deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m You can use Message Light On with a doorphone for example the doorphone s light flashes as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a processor module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to turn the light off You can program a Message Light On or a Message Light Off button on a system telephone to turn the Message Light On or off at a specific extension with one touch On a single line telephone the message light flashes only when the telephone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Program
307. ging system and telephone speakers by using the following features respectively m Loudspeaker Paging m Simultaneous Paging Loudspeaker Paging 170 Use this feature to access the Loudspeaker Paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the processor module Considerations m You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system telephone to access the loudspeaker with one touch m If the Loudspeaker Paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone Paging Features 8 49 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m You can specify the Loudspeaker Paging system as a Hotline alert extension so that the Hotline telephone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker m You must administer a Loudspeaker Paging Line via Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 If you do not administer Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 calls to 170 and 1 70 will receive intercept tone Programming To program a Loudspeaker Paging button Press o0 Press a programmable button Press left Intercom 7 0 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode E Using Loudspeaker Paging on a System Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system 1 Press the programmed button or Intercom 7 0 then lift the handset 2 Speakinto the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone
308. gn extensions to a Hunt Group 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program s 5 O 5 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 8 Enter the desired extension number To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting v Groups of Extensions 4 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 5 6 Do one of the following m To assign or unassign another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Group Call Distribution 206 Use this feature to assign outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used for fax transfer and detection Considerations m Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group m Incoming calls hunt for an available extension in a circular manner m f a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned rec
309. go to the DID destination coverage Incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID will ring immediately at the specified extension The Line Ringing options and Pool Ringing options are ignored Pool Access Restriction 315 is disabled for incoming calls on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID To prevent DID calls from ringing at an extension do not include that extension in the DID Mapping Table Line Access Restriction 302 is disabled for incoming calls on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID To prevent DID calls from ringing at an extension do not include that extension in the DID Mapping Table You can assign map a DID line to a calling group Night Service features are disabled for incoming calls on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID During Night Service DID calls will ring only at the DID destination and will follow the coverage for that destination if active Recall is disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Call records for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID will be reported when SMDR Record Type 608 is set to 1 All Calls For incoming calls on T1 lines the Number field on call reports for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR does not display telephone numbers The Number field displays IN for incoming calls on T1 lines You must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program Unique Line Ringing 209 for T1 lines wit
310. gram a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using the Fax Management Feature On any system telephone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering see Table 9 1 You can also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Table 9 1 Fax Management Button Lights Light Pattern Indication Red broken flutter Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering If the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flutter Fax transfer return A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you Programming for Fax Management Button To program a Fax Management button 1 Assign the fax machine extension by using Fax Machine Extensions 601 2 Program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing on page 8 5 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Use this feature to allow voice calls and fax calls to be received on the same line which e
311. grammed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Personal Speed Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing a single button Speed Dialing Features 8 64 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Considerations m Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system m You cannot program Personal Speed Dial numbers onto Auto Dial buttons m You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a single line telephone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 m A combined total of 800 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed m You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature m External Hotline 311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the External Hotline telephone number m A Personal Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting m Personal Speed Dial cannot be used with Call Screening F25 m Cell Phone Connect and Remote Call Forwarding require Personal Speed Dial numbers for the destination telephone number Do not use the special dialing functions when enter
312. gramming process starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 m Feature when followed by 0 0 enters or exits programming mode E enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and the Forced Account Code List 409 The wildcard character is represented as an exclamation mark Using System Programming 3 4 Initial System Programming Figure 3 1 Programming Overlays U Y l GG HH l 1 JJ FF Next Next Next erocedure Item Mm Data Memo U V Ww X EE DL Prev Prev Prev rocedure Item Data Enter Q R S T CC BB M N O P AA Z C G H J K L A B C D E F System O Message Program Program Feature A f l Next Next Next FE hem baa Remo CAMS p B fem f Dai B ee 1 m PARTNER 34D System Central Tel Message Program Program LJ Cy Feature 1 J r Wild 1 O PARTNER 18D Using System Programming 3 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Button Locations When y
313. gramming to program Extension Name Display m Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means that the extension name displays exactly as it is programmed Extension Name Display 5 4 Initial Telephone Programming Programming To assign a name to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press left Intercom For extension 12 the display reads 12 Enter Extension Name If a name was assigned previously to this extension that name appears instead Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter For example the name Ed is GOA If you make a mistake press Mic HFAD to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode Line Ringing This feature determines how each outside line or pool assigned to an extension rings You can specify Immediate Ring Delayed Ring telephone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring The factory setting for line buttons is Immediate Ring the factory setting for pool buttons is No Ring Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines or pools such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when an operator answers all calls or for telephones with no regular users such as t
314. h Direct Inward Dialing DID VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Delay 507 are disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID You can assign a T1 line with DID to a Calling Group However you cannot assign a coverage path for a calling group that has T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID If you use T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID that are not administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID in PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration set Automatic System Answer Delay 110 to 1 ring or more If you use T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID that are not administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID in PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration set Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 to 1 ring or more If you are using Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID set your fax machine to answer in less than four rings Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 28 Programming System Options Programming To program Direct Inward Dialing DID you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software Display Language 303 Use this feature to change the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display telephone The language is set for each extension so telephones in the same System can display different languages Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Programming To change the D
315. has been transferred or licensed to Avaya Inc Any reference within the text to Lucent Technologies Inc or Lucent should be interpreted as reference to Avaya Inc The excep tion is cross references to books published prior to May 1 2001 which may retain their original Lucent titles Avaya Inc formed as a result of Lucent s planned restructuring designs builds and delivers voice converged voice and data customer relationship management mes saging multiservice networking and structured cabling products and Services Avaya Labs is the research and development arm for the company A Important Safety Instructions The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment 1 Read and understand all instructions 2 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product 3 Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning 4 This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required 5 DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location 6 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table 7 Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on
316. hat are idle or have Do Not Disturb turned off in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the button programmed for ringing a Calling Group You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 8 40 Programming amp Using Telephone Features To manually ring or page a Calling Group 1 Liftthe handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Doone ofthe following m To make a ringing call dial 7 and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring m To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press Transfr 2 Dial 7 and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Using Group Calling Ring Page on a Single Line Telephone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone
317. hat callers hear when a call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature The maximum length of the message is 40 seconds Considerations m You can record only one message for Direct Extension Dial m You must record the Direct Extension Dial message from the system display telephone at extension 10 m You cannot record or play a message while Direct Extension Dial or Automatic System Answer is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Programming To record a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 Press the button Dial 8 9 2 The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads DXD 1 Record If a message was previously recorded a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Reco
318. hat you want to change Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dial Mode 201 4 26 Programming System Options Direct Inward Dialing DID Use this feature to have Direct Inward Dialing DID numbers on a T1 line routed automatically to the PARTNER extensions hunt groups or calling groups you specify When a Direct Inward Dialing DID call arrives the PARTNER system collects the digits from the T1 service provider that is the number that was dialed and matches the number to a DID Mapping Table you created If the incoming number matches an entry in the DID Mapping table the call rings at the matching extension or hunt group To use this feature you must purchase a block of Direct Inward Dialing DID telephone numbers from your T1 service provider use PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration to map extensions hunt groups or calling groups to the Direct Inward Dialing DID telephone numbers See the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration online help for more information NOTE Outgoing calls can be made on T1 lines administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID Considerations m AT module is required for Direct Inward Dialing DID m You must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program Direct Inward Dialing DID on T1 lines m You can have a call on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID ring at an extension that cannot access a T1 line from a line or pool button If the line or pool b
319. have the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program the system remotely See your Avaya representative or authorized dealer for more information Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a module to which the outside line is connected The extension number represents the extension jack on a module to which the system telephone or tip ring device is connected NOTE If you are installing a voice messaging system with the PARTNER ACS you must assign the voicemail ports to Hunt Group 7 to avoid having the voicemail ports answering all calls immediately See Programming a Voice Messaging System on page 9 44 System Programming Basics 3 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using System Programming System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines pools or extensions You can also use System Programming to set up dialing restrictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there Programming Overlays To do System Programming you place a Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Figure 3 1 on page 3 5 shows the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER 34
320. he appropriate network interface jack see Figure 2 19 Test the lines by plugging a system telephone into extension jack 10 Press the line button for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Test the extensions by doing the following a Plug a system telephone into the first extension jack on each module b Press the line button on the telephone for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Connect modular telephone cords to the extension jacks starting at the top extension jack on the processor module see Figure 2 20 When that module is full move to the leftmost module Fill each module before moving on to the next module to the right Route each cord through the wire manager on the front of the module see Figure 2 20 Connect the free end of each modular telephone cord to the modular wall jacks for System extensions Gather the line and extension cords hanging below the wire managers of the first two modules and twist tie or wire wrap them Repeat for the remaining cords For the 5 slot carrier place each bundle of wires in the indentations cut out of the bottom edge of the carrier Installation Figure 2 19 Connecting the Line Cord to the Network Interface Jack T e s Ry 0 a PM 69 9 P Figure 2 20 Connecting Cords to Extension Jacks PRA b n AS DA D Sn b p b A PA NOS DCN D Corvus lA EE a E SAN SASN ON gt
321. he New Translation Creation Confirmation dialog box appears Click the OK button A new translation file for the PARTNER ACS R7 0 system appears in the workspace All of the defaults are selected in this file 2 Connect to the PARTNER system See the online help or the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Getting Started 3 Backup and retrieve the translations from the PARTNER system a From the Administration menu select Retrieve System Information The PARTNER System Information Retrieval dialog box appears Make sure the Remote Backup check box is selected to copy the current system translation from the PARTNER system to the Remote Access card Make sure the Retrieve System Translations check box is selected to copy the system translation from the Remote Access card to your PC Click the Next button The Save As dialog box appears Select the file or enter a new name for the translation you are retrieving and then click the Save button The PARTNER System Information Retrieval status box appears showing the status of the retrieval When the retrieval is complete a message box appears The T1 Module 2 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use f Click the OK button The translation you retrieved is displayed in the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration workspace as a read only file 4 Save this file as a new file a b Select Save As from the File menu The Save A
322. he Record a Call F24 feature on an intercom call disconnects the call m Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone and then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service On a system telephone press a programmed button or press Feature C 3 to use Recall Onasingle line telephone first press and release the switchhook to get intercom dial tone Then send a Recall signal by pressing HOB On a single line feature telephone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone Then send a system Recall signal by pressing 0 3 m You can program a Recall button on a system telephone to send a Recall signal with one touch m Recall cannot be used with Call Screening F25 m f users have trouble with Recall use Recall Timer Duration to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local telephone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex Systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 m You can press to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number m Recall is ignored on T1 lines Programming To program a Recall button 1 Press Featu
323. he brightness or to increase the brightness while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Caller ID is available on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number and name if available When active on a call you automatically receive Caller ID information for the duration of the call When an extension is idle you receive Caller ID information for a call coming in to your extension Caller ID is unavailable on T1 lines NOTE You receive both the caller s number and name on a two line display telephone while the call is ringing System Telephones 6 2 Using the Telephones Line Programmable Buttons Used for individual outside lines or if no line is assigned on a button for programming telephone or extension numbers or system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a number feature is programmed press the button to dial the number or use the feature The PARTNER 34D has 36 programmable buttons 32 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18D has 20 programmable buttons 16 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18 has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the PARTNER 6 has 4 programmable buttons all with lights fixed buttons which are already imprinted Fixed Buttons In addition to the line buttons
324. he right most slot of the carrier Once a successful firmware upgrade as been completed for all modules all power LEDs are steady green Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Module Firmware 10 6 Upgrading the System Adding New Modules Adding new modules to an existing 5 slot carrier is very similar to installing the control unit Z caution Adding new modules may change line and extension assignments when the system is powered up NOTE gt Use these instructions if you are adding modules to an existing 5 slot carrier If you are upgrading from a stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module to a 2 slot carrier see Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 for instructions Z caution Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 Follow these steps to add a module to an existing 5 slot carrier 1 Move the On Off switch to the Off position O Remove the power cord from the wall outlet Loosen the thumb screw at the bottom of the carrier cover Boom Rotate the carrier cover to disengage the tabs at the top of the modules from the openings on the top of the carrier 5 Before installing a module remove the clear plastic protector from the connector area on the rear of the module by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting see Figure 10 3 Figure 10 3 Removing the Pl
325. he specified exchange in all area codes 0 976 Prevents operator assisted calls to the specified exchange in all area codes 1976 Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code 0976 Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code m To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when no toll prefix is required see Table 4 2 The table uses exchange 976 as the example Table 4 2 Preventing Dialing of Numbers in One Exchange When No Toll Prefix Required Entry Restriction 976 Prevents local calls 101976 Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the second digit such as 203 111976 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 m To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number OQO m To prevent the use of all star codes enter for touch tone telephones and equivalent to a X on rotary telephones To prevent the use of a specific star code for example X 6 7 to block Caller ID information enter the X plus the 2 or 3 digit code for touch tone telephones or equivalent to a on rotary telephones plus the 2 or 3 digit code For touch tone telephones entering amp prevents the use of QOO to block Caller ID information For rotary telephones entering 7 7 6 prev
326. he system Figure 6 1 shows a PARTNER 34D telephone the largest of the PARTNER telephones Overview 6 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure 6 1 PARTNER 34D Telephone PARTNER 34D Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights l l l l l l l l l l 7 D N E Feature NL xs gt Conf Line Programmable Buttons 32 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 oofoo oo oo oo oofoo oo oo oo oofoo oo oo oo nnnnnn Y so0foo oo oo oo oo E Transfr g L Message Light 3 H 90 us 09 pg uo uu og _4 2 El E 3 E 000 AA 000 PO RP D The following buttons and indicators appear on system telephones m Display PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D telephones only The display shows the following Date day and time when the telephone is idle Number dialed when placing a call Extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you Duration while a call is in progress During programming the settings options and prompts To adjust the display contrast on the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D telephones press then to decrease t
327. hes for about 20 seconds 40 seconds when a 1600 DSL module has been installed one minute when a T1 module has been installed then the power LED becomes steady green If there is firmware on the PC Card that is downloaded to the module then it will take longer for the power LED to become steady green All of your system and extension programming is saved and ready to work with the new release Use a PC Card to store Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial ASA DXD messages Use a PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card to provide messaging features store personal greeting and store and retrieve callers messages for an increased number of mailboxes Use PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions In order to program the system remotely you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software which is available from your Avaya representative or authorized dealer If you use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software the content of the PC Cards that are installed in the PARTNER ACS processor module as well as all modules installed in the carrier will be displayed in an inventory screen For complete information on installing PC Cards see the instructions that came with the card System Components 1 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Telephones The telephones supported by the P
328. hird party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light Voice Interrupt Features 8 73 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Any party involved in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call cannot be involved in a second Voice Interrupt On Busy call until the first is finished The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The recipient s response is not heard by the third party You cannot receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at your extension You are part of a joined call Joining Calls You are part of a Conference Call You are recording a call by using Record a Call F24 You are screening a call by using Call Screening F25 Using Voice Interrupt On Busy To initiate a Voice Interrupt On Busy call From a system telephone press Intercom Press x plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button 1 Listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy assigned You can speak after the beeps The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably als
329. his feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER Messaging PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card m Anextension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 4315 is set to No Restriction or In Only m Use Call Coverage to redirect an extension s calls on owned lines to the covering extension m Use Call Coverage Rings 320 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension m Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect the extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system m Use VMS Cover Rings 321 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system m To use Call Screening F25 the station must be the Line Coverage Extension for that line Line Coverage Extension 208 4 48 Programming System Options Programming To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension 1 Boom Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 2 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the desired line number Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line Do one of the following m To delete the current setting press Remove m To program another line press Vext ite
330. hones And you can connect many auxiliary devices such as fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners to the system The PARTNER ACS can operate in two modes Key and Hybrid and can also operate as part of a Centrex system With the system in Hybrid mode you can group lines into pools to provide easier trunk selection and simpler call answering The PARTNER ACS supports a number of voice messaging systems ensuring that incoming calls are always answered Welcome 1 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Structure of the Book This book contains eleven chapters which supply information as follows Chapter 1 Overview briefly describes the features modes of operation system capacities and system components Chapter 2 Installation intended primarily for the technician explains the physical installation of the control unit and the telephones Chapter 3 Initial System Programming describes the programming the System Administrator must do to get the system up and running This chapter also explains how to use System Programming and Telephone Programming Chapter 4 Programming System Options describes the programming of system features that the System Administrator can do Chapter 5 Initial Telephone Programming explains the telephone programming required of the System Administrator Chapter 6 Using the Telephones explains for the user and the Sys
331. hose in conference rooms Immediate Ring is the factory setting for lines No Ring is the factory setting for pools Considerations System telephone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring Light patterns do not appear for incoming calls on pool buttons that are set to No Ring If a line at an extension is set to No Ring you must manually select the line to answer a call If a line is set to No Ring Call Screening F25 cannot be used Users automatically receive Caller ID information when calls ring at the extension If an extension receives a call on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID the incoming call will ring immediately at the extension The Line Ringing setting is ignored Line Ringing 5 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To change the way outside lines or pools ring at an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line or pool buttons show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines or pools assigned to the extension If a line or pool is not assigned to a button the green light next to that button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line o
332. ial 0 No Password 8 dashes display Active password up to 8 alphanumeric characters Password can only be changed at Extension 10 or 11 System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use To use the Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart follow these instructions first Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 To Enter Programming Mode Press O Press System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number to be programmed Buttons on to which lines or pools are assigned light up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial number or features To Program Another Feature at the Same Extension After you program one feature continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature To Change Setting For Another Extension Press Dial the new extension s number To Erase A Feature or Auto Dial Button Press the programmed button Press Mic HFAl To End Programming Mode Press OJO Icon Description v Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 10 Flow Charts Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart N
333. ial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another System Speed Dial number to dial the account code System Speed Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets you dial a number by pressing a single button System Speed Dial cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Using System Speed Dial on a System Telephone To use System Speed Dial on a system telephone 1 2 Lift the handset or press before dialing Do one of the following m If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number m f you want to call on a line in a specific pool at a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 Press Feature Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed appears on a display telephone unless it is a Marked System Speed Dial number Using System Speed Dial on a Single Line Telephone To use System Speed Dial on a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Speed Dialin
334. ial or Call Park Programming To change Ring on Transfer 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active the factory setting v m 2 Not Active 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Use this feature to change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary lines and you are having trouble calling out on tip ring touch tone telephones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Considerations m Donotchange this setting unless the system is experiencing problems m Use this feature only if the Dial Mode 201 for at least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Ring on Transfer 119 4 58 Programming System Options Programming To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 1 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 4seconds m 2 8 seconds the factory setting v m 3 12 seconds 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Star Code Dial Delay 410 Central offices of some telephone companies support the use of star codes before the dialed telephone number to obtain special
335. iary Equipment Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the astline selected by other extensions so the modem line is available for the modem unless all lines in the system are being used Programming To program for a send and receive modem 1 Do one of the following m f extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select pools and outside lines first line A selected first For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence This way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines or pools assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTED Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or
336. ide Press 00 Press a programmable button To program an outside number Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special functions see Special Dialing Functions To program an extension number Press Dial the extension number to ring the extension or plus the extension number to voice signal the extension Caller ID Inspect Press a programmable button with lights Press Caller ID Name Display Press a programmable button with lights Press 6 Background Music Press a programmable button Press 9 L Call Coverage Press a programmable button Press 0 Dial optional two digit originating extension number Dial optional two digit destination extension number Cell Phone Connect Press a programmable button with lights Press Dial two digit originating extension number Dial plus two digit destination Personal Speed Dial Number Conference Drop Press a programmable button Press 0 6 Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 14 Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart Continued Flow Charts Contact Closure 1 Press Press a programmable button Press Group Pickup Press a programmable button Press OO Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press 0 Contact Closure 2 Pre
337. ide call using a specific pool 1 Pressthe idle pool button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the telephone number To reserve a busy line or pool so your telephone beeps when the line or pool becomes free useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line or pool button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing Gern 2 When the line is free and your telephone beeps lift the handset and dial the number NOTE If more than one person reserves a line all their telephones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the telephone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled Making an Outside Call on a Single Line Telephone To make an outside call on a single line telephone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 9 to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone 3 Dialthe telephone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system Handling Calls 6 18 Using the Telephones To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 plus the two digit line number 3 Dial the telephone number To make an outside call
338. if SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Output Format Use the following RS 232 serial transmission protocol for SMDR records m 1200 baud m No parity m 8 data bits m 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the format described above refer to the printer s instructions or contact the printer s manufacturer if you need help Call Accounting Devices You can send call information to a call accounting device if you want to further analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system The primary application for call accounting devices is accounting or pricing of the calls The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module and can also print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension See the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system Connecting a Device to the SMDR Jack You can co
339. igned Y 3 Select Button then press a programmable button Direct Extension Dial Delay Dial ANNO Dial a ring delay number 0 9 2 rings Y 0 rings answered immediately Transfer Return Rings Dial ANOS Dial 1 digit 0 9 for of rings before call returns 0 9 rings 4 rings Y Recall Timer Durations Dial HOOO Dial two digits 01 80 to set length of a switchook flash w 18 450 msec Direct Extension Dial Button Dial ANO Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y programmable button 3 Select Button then press a Outgoing Call Restriction Button Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y programmable button Lf 3 Select Button then press a Caller ID Type Dial 000 0 Dial 1 USA v 2 Singapore Backup Programming Automatic Dial Dial 1 Active Internal 2 Active PC Card 3 Not Active Y Backup Programming Manual Dial Dial 1 Internal Memory 2 PC Card Press to begin the backup Restore Programming Dial Dial 1 Internal Man mmddyy w 2 PC Card Man mmddyy 3 Internal AUTO mmddyy 4 PC Card AUTO mmddyy Press to begin the restore Automatic Daylight Standard Times Dial 4 1 2 6 Dial 1 Active Y 2 Not Active Wake Up Service Button Dial AOG Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y programmable button 3 Select Button then press a Hold Reminder Tone Dial Dial O Not Active 1210 secon
340. ignment 301 Programming To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 1 O 4 at extension 10 or 11 Enter two digits for the number of outside lines in the system to assign to all extensions or the main pool For example entering 0 6 means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 or lines 1 through 6 are assigned to the main pool NOTE If the Loudspeaker Paging Line was line 5 the system would assign lines 1 2 3 4 6 and 7 to the main pool Line 5 would be excluded because it is used for the loudspeaker paging system Select another procedure or exit programming mode Assigning Lines 3 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Key Extensions In Key mode all extensions are Key extensions in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key by using Line Access Mode 313 are key extensions After you program the Number of Lines use the following features as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Line Assignment 301 to assign lines to specific extensions if the line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines from some extensions or to change the button used to pick up a line at a specific extension Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or
341. igure 10 8 Disengaging the Mounting Tracks lt l l 1 1 Mounting pu 1 Tracks l If you are replacing the processor module go to Step 7 If you are replacing the top module continue with Step 10 7 Mount the new module by following the steps in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 then go to Step 9 8 Remove the screw at the top of the processor module and remove the module from the wall see Figure 10 9 Figure 10 9 Removing the Top Screw 9 Mount the new PARTNER ACS processor module by following the instructions in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 and Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 11 earlier in this guide 10 Mount or remount the top module by following the steps in Wall Mounting a Stand Alone Processor Module and a 2 Slot Carrier on page 2 5 Replacing Modules 10 12 Upgrading the System 11 Connect the line and extension cords one at a time making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module See Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 12 Reconnect the power cord AN CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Replacing
342. il Recording SMDR reports Table A 7 System Manager Features Continued Cross Reference of Features Activity For Feature or Function Page Monitoring Messages Change the extension information that N A Extension Name Display 5 4 appears on display telephones that have messages Set up voice messaging system to take N A Voice Messaging Systems 9 44 calls Set up extensions to receive messages N A Fax Machines 9 17 from a fax machine that has a delivery for them Set up Calling Groups to receive N A Calling Group Extensions 4 35 messages from co workers Obtaining reports Obtain a report on incoming and outgoing N A Station Message Detail 9 35 calls including account codes if Recording programmed Get a report on the way the system is N A Station Message Detail 9 35 programmed Recording Troubleshooting Find out what to do when callers on hold N A Calls on Hold are Disconnected 11 27 are being disconnected Make your system more secure from toll N A Dialing Restrictions and 4 18 fraud Permissions Table A 8 Customizing Your Telephone Activity For Feature or Section Page Using the line buttons on your telephone All Buttons and Indicators 6 1 Using the display to screen incoming Display Caller ID Inspect 8 19 calls telephones Caller ID Name Display 8 26 A 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y
343. include a Talk field on call reports The Talk field records talk time for all incoming outside calls For Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial calls talk time does not include the time during which the greeting plays or the time that the caller spends waiting for someone to answer the call For all other calls talk time is the same as call duration Considerations m If talk time is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits m f you use Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial you may want to set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system m When you change this feature to Active the next call record that prints includes talk time as the last field on the call report To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Programming To include the Talk field on call reports 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 6 1 1 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active m 2 Not Active the fac
344. ines connected to the system You cannot conference calls and use Call Screening F25 at the same time With single line telephones you can do only three way conferencing You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use Conference Drop F06 to remove the last added outside party from a conference call Caller ID information does not display for extensions that are active on a conference call Handling Calls 6 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Conference on a System Telephone Follow these steps to originate a conference call on a system telephone 1 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call Press Conr The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party If you are adding an inside party to a call you must wait until the party answers If you are active on a call using a pool button and you want to set up a conference call by using one of the other lines in that pool you can press and dial the pool s access code to gain access to another line in that pool Press again to add the second party to the
345. ing and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y IN 14
346. ing the calls are answered immediately by the system If you turn ASA off when calls are in the process of being answered the callers continue to hear the recorded message and are placed on hold Automatic System Answer Features 7 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Use this feature to specify the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by Automatic System Answer Considerations Automatic System Answer Delay works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at an extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Automatic System Answer Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the System answers the call m Ifyou use Caller ID make sure Automatic System Answer Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured m lf you use Tl lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID that are not administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID in PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration set the number of rings to 1 ring or more Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 1 1 O To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value appears The number of rings can be from 0 to 9 with 0 mea
347. ing Lines 3 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Customizing Extensions Use the following features to customize an extension Coverage features Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line A user at the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for the specified line Call Coverage Rings 320 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension or VMS Cover Rings 321 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the owner s voice mailbox Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 to select the lines to associate with extensions for logging unanswered calls Users can view the Caller ID information for unanswered calls on the telephone s display panel and autodial the numbers of the unanswered calls Display Language 303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display telephone Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension Also use this feature for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it Forced Account Code features Forced Account Code Entry 307 to prevent the extension from making an outside
348. ing a Personal Speed Dial number for these features m You can program Personal Speed Dial numbers when the Station Lock feature is used Programming To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 2 Press o0 Select a two digit code by pressing and dialing two digits between 80 and 99 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank Enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it The number can be up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 CX and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Mic HFAD Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable Do one of the following m To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code m To remove a Personal Speed Dial number enter the number s two digit code and press once Continue programming or exit programming mode Speed Dialing Features 8 65 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Personal Speed Dial on a System Telephone To use Personal Speed Dial on a system telephone 1 2 Lift the handset or press before dialing Do one of the following m If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number m If you want to call using a speci
349. intercom dial tone m Ifaline is in use you cannot access it with this feature you hear busy tone For information about accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line IG8LL on page 8 33 m f Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call m You can also use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL to access the Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 The call converts automatically to a Loudspeaker Paging call same as 170 Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press left Intercom 8 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Direct Line Pickup Idle Line on a System Telephone To use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line on a system telephone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Doone ofthe following m Press the programmed button and dial the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access m Press and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Direct Line Pickup Features 8 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Direct Line Pickup lI
350. ion VMS Hunt Schedule Dial MOOD Release 2 0 and earlier Dial 1 Always Y 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Release 3 0 and later Dial line number Dial 1 Always Y 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Auxiliary Equipment Fax Machine Extensions Dial 6 0 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension Music On Hold Dial O Dial 1 Active Y 2 Not Active Hotline Dial 2 6 O 3 Dial the hotline extension not ext 10 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules Dial the alerted extension number not the hotline or 7 O to paging system To remove the hotline and alert Press Doorphone 1 Extension Dial 6 0 amp Dial any extension except 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules To remove the doorphone extension Press Doorphone 2 Extension Dil MOOG Dial any extension except 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules To remove the doorphone extension Press Doorphone Alert Extension Dial 6 0 6 Dial any extension except a doorphone extension Dial 1 Not an alert Y 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 Doorphones 1 a
351. ion number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage manually 1 Press feature 2 0 2 Dial your extension number twice To send calls for coverage by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no covering extension was programmed dial the extension number of the covering extension Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Coverage by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no covering extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Call Coverage F20 XX XX 8 10 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Call Coverage at a Single Line Telephone To send your calls for coverage To 4 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 2 0 Dial your extension number Dial the extensi
352. ion to determine the maximum digits supported m You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry Account Code Entry F12 8 2 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify system telephone extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call NOTE Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If the code is valid the System provides the user access to an outside line If the code is invalid the system denies the user access to an outside line For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Dial number Se
353. is the day and yy is the year Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute in 24 hour military time Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial number preceded by an F This field holds a maximum of either 15 or 24 digits depending on the setting of SMDR Output Format 610 The Number field in Figure 9 16 is set to hold 24 digits A T character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the digits that this field holds If both of these conditions occur the takes precedence A ff prints as the last digit for an outside number dialed by Cell Phone Connect or Remote Call Forwarding For an incoming call IN appears unless the system is set up to receive Caller ID information In that case telephone numbers of incoming calls on lines with Caller ID service print in this field For an incoming call on a T1 line IN appears in the Number field Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold or being handled If an incoming call lasts less than one second this field contains all zeroes Line Number This is the outside line used to make
354. isplay Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A OOG at extension 10 or 11 The current Display Language displays Enter the number of the extension to be programmed To change the Display Language press until the appropriate value appears m 1 English the factory setting wv m 2 Spanish m 3 French To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Display Language 303 4 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Distinctive Ring 308 Use this feature to determine whether calls should ring at a tip ring device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls to the tip ring device should ring like outside calls Considerations m Change the setting to Not Active if a tip ring device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls m If distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension with both a system telephone and a tip ring device the system telephone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing patterns but all calls ring at the tip ring device using a single ring burst m The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PB
355. ist If the match is successful you can dial an outside number If no match occurs you cannot dial an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system telephone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter as the list entry You can enter more than the required digits for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least to get an outside line but can enter additional digits to track a specific customer or item number Forced Account Codes 4 34 Programming System Options Programming To create a Forced Account Code List 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 4 O 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Selecta list entry 01 99 A display similar to the following appears Forced Act Code List 03 Data cea aE 64 4 6 46 Enter up to six digits for the list entry 4 Ifthe account code is five digits or less you must press to save the account code in memory 5 Doone ofthe following m Toenter other account codes press to sele
356. it m If the name is not supplied either Priv or is displayed Considerations m The Caller ID Type you set applies to the entire system m Achange to the Caller ID Type setting takes effect when the next Caller ID call comes into the system Programming To change the Caller ID Type setting 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program AQAA at extension 10 or 11 The system shows the current setting 2 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value appears or press to return to the factory setting m 1 USA the factory setting v m 2 Singapore 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programming 4 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Call Waiting 316 Use this feature to activate Call Waiting When you are on a call and a second intercom transferred or outside call comes in you hear two beeps to indicate you have a second call waiting to be answered Press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call press the switchhook again Considerations m This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature m The Call Waiting tone two beeps is not repeated m Use Call Waiting
357. itiated When PMVS connects the LEDs become an alternating red and green flash Any one of the following deactivates Record a Call m You press the Record a Call button again m You hang up the call m PMVS drops the call because the recording time limit was exceeded m Call recording terminates because silence was detected on the line for 15 seconds Redialing Features Use the following features to redial telephone numbers m Last Number Redial m Save Number Redial Last Number Redial F05 Use this feature to redial the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits Last Number Redial is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Redialing Features 8 57 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m Last Number Redial redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes m You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system telephone to redial a number with one touch m You can use Save Number Redial F04 to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial numbers cannot be redialed with this feature m A Last Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay setting m Anumber dialed automaticall
358. ively You cannot use these files for a restore they generate the error message Empt y File after you press in Step 4 Press to start the restore If the system detects an error before beginning the restore the bottom line of the display shows one of the following messages See Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for more information about these messages m Insert Cardor Insert Valid Card m BadFileorBadFile Try Again m Incompat Version or Incompatible Versions m Empty File Backup and Restore 4 8 Programming System Options If the system does not detect an error the restore begins One of the following occurs m When the restore has completed successfully the bottom line of the display shows Restore Complete for two seconds Then the system resets itself which means that all calls in progress are disconnected You are no longer in System Programming mode m If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restor Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the factory settings You are no longer in System Programming mode Try the restore again Call Coverage Rings 320 Use this feature to define the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension You can program Call Coverage Rings 320 on an ind
359. ividual extension basis Considerations m If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Ifthe covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 Ifthe covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Programming For Call Coverage Rings 320 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 The current ring setting displays 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears 1 9 2 is the factory setting 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Call Coverage Rings 320 4 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Caller ID Programming Although the Caller ID service itself requires no programming other system features enhance the use of Caller ID m Caller ID Log Answered Calls m Caller ID Call Log Line Association m Caller ID Log All Calls m Caller ID Type NOTE Caller ID is unavailable
360. ke a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate for all lines in the pool m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Pool Access Restriction 315 for the extension m f someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m If no one changed the Pool Access Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The pool may not be assigned to the extension What to do Check Pool Extension Assignment 314 to see if the pool is assigned to the extension mf the pool is not assigned assign it m If the pool is assigned go to Possible Cause 5 Other Telephone Problems 11 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 5 Not enough lines are assigned to the pool to support usage What to do Check Pool Line Assignment 207 to see if an appropriate number of lines are assigned to the pool m If an appropriate number of lines are not assigned you
361. ker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system telephone by pressing and then either dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system telephone or a single line telephone However if you try to make a voice signaled call to a single line telephone or an MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone it rings instead You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension Consider the following m The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your telephone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the call m If HFAI is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they ring instead m If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension it may result in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call to that extension System Telephones 6 8 Using the Telephones Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls 312 A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call and who ha
362. kground music 9 33 description 9 33 programming 9 33 volume setting system wide 9 33 Music On Hold Volume 9 33 Music On Hold Volume 614 9 33 Mute 6 8 N Name Display 8 23 name display 5 4 Night Service auxiliary equipment 9 34 programming 7 16 Night Service Button 7 15 using 7 17 Night Service Button 503 light patterns 6 7 Night Service Group Extensions 4 39 No Ring 7 1 IN 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Notify See Manual Signaling Number of Lines 3 12 Number of Lines 104 3 12 O Off Premises Range Extender OPRE 9 2 One touch Transfer see Auto Dial Numbers operating mode changing 4 50 operator answering calls backup 7 2 Automatic System Answer Button 7 4 Automatic System Answer Delay 7 6 Automatic System Answer Lines 7 6 Automatic System Answer Mode 7 7 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 7 8 backup answering options 7 2 button programming 7 2 call handling options 7 1 Direct Extension Dial Button 7 11 Direct Extension Dial Delay 7 13 Night Service Button 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 7 17 Station Unlock 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 7 20 Optional Equipment 1 13 4 1 9 1 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 4 25 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 7 17 using 7 18 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 light patterns 6 7 Outside Auto Dial Numbers 8 6 Outside Call making an 6 17 Outside Conference
363. kward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes 6 To exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 O Or you can lift the handset and then place it back in the cradle NOTE You can talk on the telephone while you program This is useful if you call for support while programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program To move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program Using System Programming 3 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Programming from extension 10 or 11 to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions All features that can be programmed at an extension can also be programmed by using Centralized Telephone Programming Most features also can be programmed on a system telephone at the user s extension except for the following Automatic Line Selection
364. l intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned ownership from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is a system extension number for coverage When Call Coverage is activated covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings Callers can then leave a message with the person at the covering extension This feature helps users who want their callers to have personalized service when they are unable to answer calls Considerations m Use a system display telephone for the covering extension so the user can identify coverage calls Coverage Call for XX appears on the display when a coverage call rings at a covering extension instead of Caller ID information if available m If the covering extension has an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the light shows green flutter while the coverage call is ringing at the covering extension If the user at the extension lifts the handset he or she is connected to this call m Intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can be covered m Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls Wake Up Service calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions cannot be covered m Do not designate any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system as a covering extension m A single exten
365. l only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only The status of the Night Service Button at extension 10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 728 being used Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Programming To program a Night Service Button at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 5 O 3 at extension 10 Do one of the following m If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Night Service Button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 2 Not Assigned the factory setting wv m If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a program
366. l to complete the call from your area m Todial the complete number including the 1 press the button under the 1 left button m To include the area code but not the 1 press the button under the area code the second button m Todial the seven digit number only press the button under the seven digit telephone number displayed the third button You also have the following options at the Call Log Dial display m Press the Back button to return to the Telephone Number or Name Display m Press the Call Log Display button to exit the Call Log The green light goes off when the feature is deactivated Caller ID Name Display F16 Use this feature to toggle the display between Caller ID number and Caller ID name Caller ID name is an optional feature of the Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be available in your area even if Caller ID number is available Considerations m Program this feature on a button with lights on a system display telephone When Caller ID Name Display is on the green light is on indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID number m SMDR reports print only Caller ID number where available If a number is not available it is reported as IN on the call report m Caller ID Name Display has no effect on Call Coverage calls Coverage calls always display the extension number of the user who is sending calls for coverage m You can
367. lay feature The following Caller ID features can be implemented by individual telephone users m Caller ID Inspect m Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing m Caller ID Name Display You can use all these features while using Call Screening F25 NOTE Caller ID information is unavailable on T1 lines The message Direct In Dial or DID is displayed for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Caller ID Features 8 18 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Caller ID Inspect F17 Use this feature to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold You can inspect ringing active or held calls Considerations m Program Caller ID Inspect on a button with lights on a system display telephone m Make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect button is fluttering before pressing a line or pool button otherwise the call you are on is disconnected and you are connected to the call on the line or pool button that was pressed m You can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons If the call is an intercom call the factory set display is shown m If you are not active on a call you can press line pool and intercom buttons to view Caller ID or Call Coverage information for those lines however if you pick up the handset you join or answer the call shown on the display m If you program a Caller ID Name Display button
368. le Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on m f Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Single Line Telephone Problems 11 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this telephone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 16 m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the telephone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Telephone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem telephone Plug in a single line telephone that you know rings properly m If the replacement telephone rings properly the problem telephone is defective Replace it m If the replacement telephone does not ring properly call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Single Line Telephone Rings Back after Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Replace the handset carefully If the problem is not solved go
369. ler ID calls that are transferred to another extension are logged at that extension m Caller ID calls transferred to a group are logged at every extension that alerts in the group if no one in the group answers the call However if a user answers the call at any extension in the group it is not logged as unanswered at any extension m Ifa Caller ID call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature and the caller hangs up without dialing an extension the call is not logged at any extension However if a caller dials an extension that is associated with the Caller ID Logging feature the call is logged as unanswered if it is not answered at the extension m To prevent unauthorized persons from viewing the log Caller ID calls cannot be viewed at a locked station m The date and time of an incoming call is logged from the central office Therefore the date and time of the call that you see on the system display telephone may be different from the date and time reported in the SMDR report for the extension m You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 m Caller ID information is unavailable on T1 lines Examples The examples below show how unanswered Caller ID information is logged Line 6 is associated with extensions 11 and 12 for Call Logging If a central office call rings and is not answered on line 6 it is logged as unanswered on extensions 11 and 12 If it is answered it is logged only if the answering extension h
370. liminates the need for a dedicated fax line Fax Machines 9 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use When the start button on a fax machine is pressed the fax machine sets up to send a fax The sending fax machine sends a special tone called a calling tone or CNG tone This tone is sent until the call is answered If another fax machine answers the appropriate signals are sent back to the calling fax machine to send the fax transmission NOTE If you are using this feature on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID set your fax machine to answer in less than four rings When an incoming call is answered by PVM PMVS PARTNER MAIL or ASA DXD the system determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to fax machine s it automatically transfers the call to Hunt Group 8 NOTE If your voice messaging system is PARTNER Messaging and you use the Fax CNG Detection feature do not program PARTNER Messaging to assign a fax extension to an Automated Attendant For more information see the PARTNER Messaging System Manager s Quick Reference Considerations m To use Fax CNG Detection you must have a voice messaging system or ASA DXD You must also have your system configured in one of these ways PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 as a stand alone module T1 module in slot 1 PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 in center slot any modules in remaining
371. line telephone user can connect with a maximum of three parties including the conference originator Considerations Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to add parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other parties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected You cannot transfer conference calls If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than on a two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside l
372. ll Calls are used all answered Caller ID calls and a unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines are logged This combination can be assigned to a maximum of one extension per system The Caller ID information appears on three screens m The first screen shows the caller s number or the reason that the number is not available m The second screen shows the caller s name or the reason that the name is not available m The third screen shows the date and time of the call In addition the system logs the line the call came in on whether the log entry was viewed whether the call was answered or not answered and whether an attempt was made to return the call by using the dialing option Caller ID Features 8 20 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Considerations m This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for the MLS MLC TransTalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones m Any users who have system display telephones and have lines with Caller ID can view and dial the numbers of logged Caller ID calls m You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active m To view the Caller ID Call Log you must program a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button on a button with lights on a system display telephone This feature is not supported on a button without lights m All unanswered Cal
373. llowed by two transfer beeps Transfer returned calls also ring with the two transfer beeps Unique Line Ringing 209 4 67 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m This feature applies only to MLS PARTNER and TransTalk telephones m You can program single line telephones for any ring pattern but they ring with Pattern 1 only m You must program MLC 6 telephones with Pattern 1 If they are programmed with another pattern they do not ring m Since only one audible alert can be heard at a station at one time the ringing pattern present at that extension that has multiple lines alerting is for the line that rang first Once the call is answered the extension begins ringing by using the pattern associated with the next alerting line for that extension m Incoming calls that are ringing at a pool button ring with the pattern assigned to the line Lines within a pool may be assigned individual ring patterns Programming 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program Z O 9 at extension 10 or 11 At the line prompt enter the number of the line to be programmed with the pattern At the pattern prompt enter a ringing pattern number 1 8 1 is the factory setting or press until the desired value appears The display looks like this RING PATTERN LXX PATTERN X 4 To set the ring pattern for another line press Next item or Prev item
374. lowing To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a Voice Interrupt On Busy call has ended To resume your conversation with the third party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light Any party involved in a Voice Interrupt On Busy call cannot be involved in a second Voice Interrupt On Busy call until the first is finished Voice Interrupt On Busy cannot be performed on Record a Call The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call The recipient s response is not heard by the third party Users cannot receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at their extension They are part of a joined call Joining Calls They are part of a Conference Call They are recording a call by using Record a Call F24 They are screening a call by using Call Screening F25 Programming To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 1 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting
375. ls and Extensions As your business grows or changes so do your needs for your PARTNER ACS As you upgrade to newer releases you must program for new features As you expand you can add lines pools and extensions to your system NOTE If you replace a module with a different type be sure you check the telephone and line connections and verify system and telephone programming In many cases you may need to rearrange the connections and or change telephone or system programming Changing System Settings NCAUTION Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade For more information on using the PC Card Software Upgrade see Using a PC Card on page 10 2 For more information on using the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC card see PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation Programming and Use Changing the System Clock You may need to change the system clock for daylight savings time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 and System Time 103 to set the current date and time Adding New Lines How you add new lines to the system depends upon the type of extension you are adding them to Key Extensions You can add individual lines to pooled extensions or add new lines to key extensions all extensions in Key mode in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key using Line Access Mode 301 are key extensions If you add an outside line to yo
376. ls to be included 9 41 Call Restriction Outgoing 401 4 25 call rings no one at other end 11 27 Call Screening 9 48 Call Waiting 3 16 Call Waiting 316 4 16 Caller ID 4 10 8 18 associating lines with extensions 4 13 device 9 2 dialing from the display 8 25 display problems 11 8 erasing records 8 25 information viewing 4 11 8 19 Caller ID continued inspecting Caller ID lines 4 11 modules required for 1 9 printing information 9 35 returning the call 8 25 Singapore operation 4 15 SMDR with 4 11 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 3 16 4 13 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing dialing logged call numbers 4 14 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 description 8 20 8 22 dialing logged call numbers 8 20 8 22 8 26 Caller ID Inspect 8 19 using 8 19 Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID Log All Calls 319 programming 4 14 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 4 12 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 programming 4 12 Caller ID Log viewing 8 20 Caller ID Logging and Dialing 8 20 Caller ID Name Display 8 26 description 8 26 using 8 26 Caller ID number 8 26 Caller ID Type 4 15 Caller ID Type 122 4 15 Calling extensions simultaneously 4 35 8 39 intercom inside 6 19 calling outside 6 17 outside call on a single line telephone 6 18 outside call on a system telephone 6 18 Calling Group 4 35 Calling Group Extensions 4 35 Calling Group Extensions 502 4 35 calls answering with Call
377. lue is what was provided by the service provider ISP press Enter m Verify the address of the router and the PVC DLCI associated with the data connection from the service provider ISP 4 Ifthe customer is experiencing problems loading webpages from a browser ping the DNS servers that the service provider ISP has provided If this fails confirm with the service provider ISP the DNS IP addresses 5 If there is no voice when a Pathstar gateway is used do the following a Verify the MGCP NCS setting There should be at least two 2 distinct addresses m The local IP address of the voice PVC DLCI interface on the SDSL port m The address of the Pathstar gateway b Verify the PVC DLCI settings that the service provider has configured for the voice connection Problems with the 1600 DSL Module 11 20 Troubleshooting Problems with Automatic Backup Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card while trying to do an automatic backup What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely from a PC and perform backup and restore functions You mus
378. m See Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 on page 9 28 NOTE You should administer Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 before you assign lines Assigning Lines Use the feature Number of Lines 104 to determine in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions or to determine in Hybrid mode the number of lines assigned to the main pool After you use the Number of Lines feature you can use other features to refine the assignment of lines Line assignment is also based upon whether an extension is a Key or Pooled extension Refine the line assignment accordingly after you use the Number of Lines feature Number of Lines 104 Use this feature to determine in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions In Hybrid mode use this feature to determine the number of lines assigned to the main pool This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit This feature should be used only for initial system setup A CAUTION Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup Considerations m You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit If you do not use this feature the line numbers associated with empty jacks are assigned to telephones as though there were actually lines connected m You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that ar
379. m or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Outside Conference Denial 109 Use this feature to determine if users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Considerations m This feature setting applies to all system users m A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties Programming To allow or disallow conferences with two outside parties 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 1 O 9 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties the factory setting v m 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties Select another procedure or exit programming mode Outside Conference Denial 109 4 49 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Pool Programming When a system is operating in Hybrid mode you can group lines into pools to help the routing of calls Use the following features to program the use of pools in the system m Mode of Operation m Pool Access Restriction m Pool Extension Assignment m Po
380. m Step 5 in the procedure for recording a message m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure m To exit the procedure hang up the handset Night Service Button 503 Use this feature to program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines and pools assigned to the telephones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Considerations You must program a Night Service Button on the system telephone at extension 10 Program Night Service on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights Night Service Button 503 7 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned If you program a System Password 403 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dia
381. m the telephone see Figure 2 28 Label the button sheet to show any programmed lines or button features then place the button sheet on the telephone so the holes fit over the buttons Carefully replace the plastic cover Adjust the swivel display to the desired angle low medium or high Installing Telephones 2 36 Figure 2 27 Lowering the Stand to the Telephone Cover Wall Mounting Installation Follow these steps to wall mount a PARTNER telephone 1 Reverse the plastic hook that sits in the earpiece part of the handset cradle see Figure 2 29 Turn the telephone upside down If you have a tray on the bottom of your telephone remove the tray that holds the User Instruction cards by pressing the tabs on both sides of the tray near the pull out tab while sliding the tray straight out Holding the stand with the wide edge down mount the stand on the wallplate by using the keyholes on the base of the stand see Figure Figure 2 29 Reversing the Plastic Hoo Figure 2 30 Mounting the Stand on the Wallplate Installing Telephones 2 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 Plugone end of the telephone cord into the jack in the center of the wall plate see Figure 2 31 5 Plug the other end of
382. mable button Press left Intercom 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Ou repe OOD Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Pickup on a System Telephone To use the Group Pickup programmed button press the button To use Group Pickup manually 1 Lift the handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Using Group Pickup on a Single Line Telephone To use Group Pickup 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Group Pickup I66G 8 45 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Hotline The System Administrator programs internal Hotline extensions and their alert extensions When you lift the handset of a Hotline telephone the alert extension rings Considerations m The Hotline telephone can receive transferred calls but do not pick up the handset at that extension until the telephone rings Using a Hotline Telephone To use the Hotline telephone 1 Liftthe handset of the Hotline telephone The designated alert extension rings 2 When the call is answered speak into the handset Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Use this feature to program a button on your PARTNER or MLS telephone to signal a predetermined co
383. mable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Night Service Button at extension 10 Night Service Button 503 7 16 Operator Features Using the Night Service Button To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service Button at extension 10 m Ifa System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m If no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on To turn Night Service off T Press the Night Service Button at extension 10 m lfaSystem Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m If no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off 2 Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Use this feature to program a button on the system telephone at extension 10 to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room telephone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the telephone after the guest checks out Conversely an operator can change the Outgoing
384. making outside calls on specific lines Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line starts ringing at each extension that has the line Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with tip ring telephones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables tip ring telephones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on tip ring telephones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Pooled Extensions If your system will be configured for Hybrid mode use the features described in this section to change the assignment of lines in pools to assign auxiliary pools to pooled extensions or to remove the main pool from pooled extensions See Mode of Operation 198 on page 4 50 to change the mode of operation of the system If a pooled extension also has an individual line see Key Extensions on page 3 14 to assign that individual line After you program the Number of Lines to assign lines to the main pool use the following features as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines from the m
385. may need to add more lines m If an appropriate number of lines are assigned go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 One or more local telephone company lines in the pool are faulty What to do At extension 10 try to access each individual line assigned to the pool m If the lines accessed from individual line buttons on extension 10 are still faulty refer to Possible Cause 7 in Other Problems with Telephones Trouble Making Outside Calls m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Calls Are Answered Automatically A call rings once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause 1 Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on What to do Check to see if Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off by pressing the programmed button at extension 10 m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is not turned on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 An auxiliary device answers when it should not this could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn off its auto answer feature Refer to the device s user manual m For every auxili
386. ment Fax Machines You can set up fax machines in several ways to work with your system This section includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system telephone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single touch and for transferring calls to the fax machine extension To use fax machines on the system you must program lines for fax calling tone CNG detection as desired and identify the extensions that have fax machines Preventing Inappropriate Fax Answering When lines appear on a fax extension you want to make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this m Set the fax machine for delayed pickup m Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to delayed ring or no ring m Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension This is the recommended way Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine Automatic Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines When an incoming call is answered by PARTNER Messaging PVM PMVS PARTNER MAIL or ASA DXD the PARTNER ACS determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to the fax machine it automatically transfers the call to a fax hunt group see Setting Up Fax Machines on page 9 18 For this feature to work you must have a voice messaging system
387. minder Tone This tone continues to sound at the specified interval for example 60 seconds until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If you place a call on a line or a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it no longer is available to you To ensure that no one else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Exclusive Hold F02 8 37 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To program an Exclusive Hold button Press O Q 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press 0 2 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Exclusive Hold While active on an outside call on a system telephone 1 Press the programmed button or Feature O Z to put the call on Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line pool or button flutters At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red 2 Toretrieve the call press the line pool or button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press Sb NOTE You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension at which it was put on Exclusive Hold Extension Name Display You can assign a name to your extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER telephones or up to 12 characters long on MLS telephones When that extension is used to make an intercom group
388. ming To program a Message Light On or a Message Light Off button 1 Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 9 for a Message Light On button or Feature D 0 for a Message Light Off button Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 5 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light On FO9XX and Message Light Off F10XX 8 48 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Message Light Off on a System Telephone To turn on or off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 9 for On or Feature 1 0 for Off If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on off Skip Step 2 2 f no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the telephone whose message light you want to turn on off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Using Message Light Off on a Single Line Telephone To turn on or off the message light 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 0 9 for On or HO for Off Dial the extension number of the telephone whose message light you want to turn on off Paging Features You can page your colleagues over the Loudspeaker Paging system or over the Loudspeaker Pa
389. ming 4 50 Pooled Extensions assigning lines 4 52 buttons 4 52 pooled extensions 4 50 definition 1 5 setup 3 14 pools 1 4 adding new lines 10 17 adding new pools 10 17 assigning lines 4 54 assigning pool buttons 4 52 Power Failure 6 10 11 2 Privacy 8 53 light patterns 6 7 using 8 53 privacy Do Not Disturb 8 36 privacy features Automatic Extension Privacy 4 3 Privacy Automatic Extension 304 4 3 Problems Solving 11 2 Processor Module description 1 9 processor module batteries 2 11 mounting tracks 2 6 Programmable Buttons 6 3 7 1 Programming 3 12 D 1 buttons 7 1 centralized telephone 3 8 extensions 3 3 3 8 3 16 lines 10 16 methods 3 7 mode 3 7 overlays 3 4 3 8 overview 3 1 PBX Centrex support for 3 17 system 3 3 telephone 3 3 voice messaging system 7 2 programming button locations on the telephone 3 6 Centralized Telephone 3 3 changing programming type 3 7 dial codes A 3 entering programming mode 3 7 Extension Programming 8 1 intercom dial codes A 4 PARTNER telephone to MLS telephone D 1 password 4 56 retaining settings 4 62 special buttons 3 4 telephone 3 3 programming MLS telephone to PARTNER tele phone D 1 programming mode 3 7 programming overlays 3 4 R Recall 8 54 PBX and Centrex services with 3 17 programming feature on a button 8 54 programming function in phone number B 1 timer duration 4 55 using single line telephone 8 55
390. mp 2 Press to identify another extension up to 48 alert extensions per doorphone Automated Attendant Extensions Dial 4 6 0 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension SMDR Record Type Dial 6 Dial 1 All calls Y 2 Outgoing calls only SMDR Top Of Page Dial O 6 9 SMDR Output Format Dial 4 6 C1 0 Dial 1215 digits Y 2 24 digits SMDR Talk Time Dial 4 6 Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y Contact Closure Group Dial 6 Dial a group 1 or 2 Dial an extension 10 57 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Contact Closure Operation Type Dial 6 Dial a Contact Closure 1 or 2 Dial 121 Second On 2 3 Seconds On Y 3 5 Seconds On 4 Toggle Music On Hold Volume Dial 2 6 1 Dialt MI 22 MM 3 4 5 6 7 System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 8 Flow Charts System Flow Chart Auxiliary Equipment Continued Application Programming Interface API Dial 6 1 5 Dial 1 API On v 2 API Off Application Programming Interface API Internal Monitor Dial 4 6 1 6 Dial 1 All Calls 2 External Calls Y Loudspeaker Paging Line Dial MOOD Dial the line number of the jack to which the loudspeaker paging system is connected Remote Administration Password D
391. mple it sometimes takes a few seconds for the call to ring at the cellular phone The number of rings at which each voice mail system is set to answer For example if the voice mail system at your extension answers after three rings you may want to increase the number of rings to allow yourself more time to answer the call before the voice mail system does Keep in mind that you may also need to increase the number of rings for the voice mail system of the outside telephone number m The extension s calling restrictions are applied before the calls are forwarded If the destination number is restricted the call will not be forwarded m You cannot forward calls if Send All Calls is active The calls go to voice mail immediately Cell Phone Connect F11 8 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions Voice Interrupt On Busy calls coverage calls paging calls transfer return calls Wake Up Service calls and Night Service calls You can program Cell Phone Connect on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when Cell Phone Connect is enabled When the green light is on the Cell Phone Connect feature is enabled The display shows Forward If you press the Cell Phone Connect button after a call starts to ring that call is not forwarded If the Cell Phone Connect feature code
392. n 107 to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services Customizing Extensions 3 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is a PARTNER system restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the buttons on system telephones or to inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the PARTNER system cannot prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions use those instead of the PARTNER system restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program PARTNER system restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system and PARTNER system restrictions apply However PARTNER system dialing permissions do not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or
393. n operator s extension The Intercom Autodialer is shipped with an adapter a D8W line cord a power cord a power unit and a button labeling sheet NOTE You can wall mount the Intercom Autodialer to work next to a wall mounted system telephone See the instructions provided with the Autodialer Follow these steps to connect an Intercom Autodialer to a PARTNER telephone 1 Plug the adapter into the wall jack see Figure 2 35 2 Plug one end of the D8W line cord into the J1 jack on the adapter 3 Plug the other end of the D8W line cord into the IN jack on the bottom of the Autodialer 4 Plug the blue tinted connector labeled D8AC of the power cord into the jack on the power unit A CAUTION Use only the power unit supplied with the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer 5 Plug the other end clear tinted of the power cord into the J2 jack on the adapter 6 Plug the power unit into an electrical outlet 7 Plug the telephone s modular telephone cord LINE jack into the OUT jack on the bottom of the Autodialer Installing Telephones 2 40 Figure 2 35 Connection of Cords for the Intercom Autodialer Power Wall Jack lt 7 Outlet D8W Cord OUT Modular Telephone Cord Installation 8 Place the Autodialer on the desk to the right of the telephone see Figure 2 36 Figure 2 36 System Telephone and I
394. n signaling m You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Station Lock and Voice Mailbox Transfer m To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button Programming To program a Manual Signaling button als 2 3 4 Press OO Press a programmable button Press a Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension Enter X before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Manual Signaling To beep the target extension press the programmed button while the handset is in the cradle The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed To ring or voice signal the target extension 1 2 3 Lift the handset or press pk Press intercom Press the programmed button To transfer a call to the target extension 1 While active on the call press Trans 2 Press the programmed button Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 8 47 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Message Light On F09XX and Message Light Off F10XX A lit message light indicates that you have a message in your mailbox You can turn the messa
395. n the paging systems are connected using a paging interface device The PARTNER system supports a maximum of one paging device You can connect secondary units by treating them as lines However certain features interactions will not be blocked for example bridging Follow these steps to connect a loudspeaker paging system to the PARTNER system NOTE If you connect a loudspeaker paging system from another manufacturer a paging interface may be required 1 Insert the modular plug from the loudspeaker paging system into an available line jack on any PARTNER module A loudspeaker paging system can be connected to a line jack on the following PARTNER modules PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor module 308EC module 400E module 400EC module 200E module 206 module 206E module 206EC module NOTE It is recommended that you connect the loudspeaker paging system to the last line jack in your PARTNER system to help prevent any future conflict with your line assignments When you administer a loudspeaker paging system to a line jack on the PARTNER system that line is removed from the system For example suppose your system has four lines and you connect your loudspeaker paging system to line jack 4 The lines are connected to Line jack 1 Line jack 2 Line jack 3 and Line jack 5 When you administer the lines the PARTNER system will label these four lines as Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 and Line 5 Line 4 is removed NOTE If the lou
396. n to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record Press the Erase button to erase the log record see instructions that follow Press the More button to view the Telephone Number Display Caller ID Features 8 24 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Erasing Call Log Records When the Erase button is pressed on the Call Status Display Ent ry Erased appears see Figure 8 5 Figure 8 5 Entry Erased Display Entry Erased Next Prev All You have several options at the Entry Erased Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record m Press the A11 button to erase all call log records for this extension Dialing Instructions To dial the telephone number and return the call from the display 1 Press the Dial button on either the Telephone Number Display or the Name Display When you press the Dial button on either display the Dial Display appears see Figure 8 6 Figure 8 6 Call Log Dial Display Select a Button to Dial 1 908 5551234 Back Caller ID Features 8 25 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 2 The button you press to dial the call depends on the number of digits you must dia
397. nal Speed Dial numbers at a locked extension m You can activate and deactivate Cell Phone Connect and Remote Call Forwarding at a locked station Programming To program a Station Lock button Js neos 49 Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button Press 20 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Station Lock F21 8 68 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Station Lock on a System Telephone To lock an extension when the telephone is idle or while active on an intercom or outside call 1 Press the Station Lock button or Feature 2 1 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes Enter a four digit code by using digits 0 9 Re enter the four digit code m f the code entered in Step 3 matches the code entered in Step 2 the extension is locked On a button with lights the green light changes to on steady On a display telephone the display shows m If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in Step 2 the extension remains unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off Repeat the locking procedure To unlock a locked extension 1 Press the Station Lock button or press Feature 2 1 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension m If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension
398. nd Use Programming To program a System Password 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 4 O 3 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Set System Password Data Enter a four digit password or press to delete the existing password Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Reset Programming Saved 728 Use this feature to reset the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel Considerations m Resetting the system disconnects all active calls m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly m The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds m You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process m Most of the system and telephone programming settings that were in effect before the power failure or down period are retained they do not revert to the default settings m Automatic System Answer Button 111 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Night Service Button 503 and Station Lock return to the status on or off that they were in immediately prior to the system reset m The VMS Cover button and Privacy button return to the status on or off determined by the programmed setting of Automatic V
399. nd Use To remove Cell Phone Connect by using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Cell Phone Connect is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Cell Phone Connect is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Using Cell Phone Connect on a Single Line Telephone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HOO Dial your extension number Dial X and the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Cell Phone Connect 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HONDO Dial your extension number twice Cell Phone Connect F11 8 30 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Conference Drop F06 Use this feature to drop the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Considerations m You can program a Conference Drop button on a system telephone to use the feature with one touch m This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Conference Drop button 1 Pre
400. nd or the Caller ID Log All Calls features to log Caller ID calls you use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 to view the log Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing is available on system display telephones for all lines for which you subscribe to a Caller ID service Use this feature to view Caller ID information for central office calls NOTE You must program Caller ID Logging and Dialing onto a line button with LEDs to use the feature Up to 400 call records can be stored for the system Each line associated with an extension to log Caller ID calls is guaranteed a minimum of 20 call records You also can automatically dial the number stored in the log The call records stored in each user s call log and available for viewing depend on the following m Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically whether or not the line and extension are associated with the Call Logging features m f Caller ID Log Answered Calls is used alone all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged m f Caller ID Log Line Association is used alone all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged m If both Caller ID Log Answered Calls and Caller ID Log Line Association are used all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension and all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged m l both Caller ID Log Line Association and Caller ID Log A
401. nd outside calls from your extension to an outside telephone number This outside number must be programmed to a Personal Speed Dial code for your extension You activate this feature from your extension or from extension 10 or 11 However before you can forward calls to outside telephone numbers the Remote Call Forwarding 322 feature must be enabled for your extension When Remote Call Forwarding is active all calls that ring at the extension are forwarded to the telephone number programmed to the specified Personal Speed Dial code As soon as the call rings at the extension the PARTNER system places a call to the specified telephone number and conferences the two calls together Remote Call Forwarding has the following requirements m The Remote Call Forwarding 322 feature must be enabled for your extension m For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line Coverage Extension 208 for that line Considerations m You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls m Line Coverage Extension 208 must be assigned to the extension for that extension to use Remote Call Forwarding for a line m You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions Voice Interrupt On Busy calls coverage calls transfer return calls Wake Up Service calls and Night Service calls m The telephone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarde
402. nd plays a customized message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension or hunt group Call Forwarding Call Follow Me When activated this feature forwards calls to a backup answering extension Call Coverage When activated this feature allows other users to answer calls coming in to the operator s extension Also you can install a voice messaging system to provide an automated backup answering position When the operator is busy on calls or away from the desk the voice messaging system answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings plays a customized greeting requests callers to enter an extension number and transfers the caller to the appropriate extension If no one answers at the destination extension the caller can leave a personal message in that extension s mailbox Button Programming You must program an operator s console with buttons that help with the handling of calls Figure 7 1 on page 7 3 shows a PARTNER 34D telephone with the following buttons Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 28 The operator can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension _ Idle no lights on Busy red on Calling the operator green flash Sending coverage calls to or manually signaling the operator green flutter Ringing back
403. nd programming feedback Specifically the display shows Display 6 14 Current date excluding year day and time when the telephone is idle Account code as it is entered Number dialed when making a call Duration of call call timer Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call Number and name if programmed of the extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension Automated Attendant Voice Messaging System Of Direct Extension Dial when a call is transferred from an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Extension Dial feature respectively Transfer from Auto Att Transfer from VMS Or Transfer from Direct Extension Dial if a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Dial Extension feature respectively Caller ID number or name of calling party if applicable Caller ID number and name of calling party if applicable while the call is ringing Direct In Dial on 24 character displays or DID on 16 character displays for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Caller ID is unavailable on T1 lines Coverage Call for xx on the display of users receiving a coverage call XX represents the number of the extension that activated call coverage Forward xx xx On the display of users forwa
404. nd release the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a little longer before releasing it NOTE If your feature telephone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing and releasing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press and release the switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features Use the Recall feature instead Single Line Telephones 6 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Single Line Telephone Limitations Each tip ring device requires one touch tone receiver to be available in order to dial a call intercom or outside or to activate a feature by using a code Each PARTNER ACS processor module has two touch tone receivers a T1 module has eight touch tone receivers each 012E module has ten touch tone receivers each 206 module has one touch tone receiver and each 400 module has two touch tone receivers The combination of modules in your system determines the number of tip ring devices that can dial simultaneously For example if you have one PARTNER ACS processor module two 206 modules and two 400 modules eight tip ring devices can dial out at the same time If nine tip ring devices try to dial out simultaneously the ninth device does not get dial tone until one of the other eight finishes dialing PARTNER MAIL VS contains its own touch tone receivers and do
405. ndition place one of the telephones connected to the 012E module on hook The LED display and speakerphone volume on all telephones return to normal If this power management event occurs frequently you should consider moving some telephones to available ports on other modules Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm 11 4 Troubleshooting System Telephone Problems The following section discusses system telephone problems System Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume is set too low What to do Press the volume control button while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m If the telephone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m If the telephone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m If Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this telephone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions on page 11 16 m f Line Ringing is set for
406. ne 6 13 on system telephone 6 9 speaker 6 8 Speaker Spkr Button 6 3 Speakerphone 9 1 performance tips using 6 9 speakerphone Voice Interrupt On Busy 4 68 speakerphone performance 6 9 special characters B 1 Speed Dial PBX and Centrex Services with 3 18 Speed Dial form C 1 Speed Dialing auto dial buttons 8 5 system speed dial numbers 4 63 8 67 speed dialing system numbers 4 63 Speed Dialing features 8 64 stand alone processor module wall mounting 2 5 Standard Devices answering machines 9 4 auto attendant 9 8 contact closure device 9 10 credit card scanners 9 14 fax machines 9 17 modems 9 29 voice messaging system 9 34 Standard Phones automatic line selection for 5 3 call handling 6 16 call waiting 6 10 caller ID information 6 13 dial tones 6 11 dial code features 8 2 display 6 13 feature buttons on 6 13 feature phones 6 10 limitations 6 12 message waiting compatibility 8 48 power failure for use during 6 10 11 2 problems with 11 11 ringing patterns 6 11 speaker on 6 13 switchhook 8 54 system messages 6 13 Standard phones overview 1 13 Standard telephones rotary 1 13 Star Code Dial Delay 4 59 Star Code Dial Delay 410 description 4 59 programming for marked system speed dialing 4 60 star codes dial delay 4 59 Station Lock 8 68 using single line telephone 8 69 system telephone 8 69 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 41 9 42 9 43 call accounting
407. ne telephone users must dial 9 at intercom dial tone to make an outside call since their telephones do not have line buttons With Key mode you can easily join calls since each line button can be labeled with a unique line number For example if you want to join a call on Line 2 you simply press the line button labeled Line 2 Key mode also lets you monitor call activity by using the lights next to the line button anyone with a line assigned to his or her extension can tell when an incoming call is ringing on that line when a call on that line is on hold and when that line is in use At installation the system assigns outside lines to the buttons on all system telephones from left to right starting with the bottom row of buttons On an extension basis you can change which lines are assigned and which buttons are used to select the lines if desired All extensions in a system configured for Key mode are referred to as key extensions Hybrid Mode Hybrid mode offers you flexibility in accessing outside lines from your telephone As in Key mode individual lines can be assigned to system extensions Additionally multiple outside lines can be grouped together in pools The system can have up to four pools including a main pool and three auxiliary pools Each pool is identified by a pool access code 880 881 882 and 883 respectively Pools are represented on system telephones by poo buttons Unlike line buttons pool buttons give
408. ne PARTNER 18D telephone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 telephones Use this feature to copy all of the following settings from one extension to another m 301 Line Assignment m 321 VMS Cover Rings m 302 Line Access Restriction m 401 Outgoing Call Restriction m 303 Display Language m 405 Disallowed List Assignments m 304 Automatic Extension Privacy m 408 Allowed List Assignments m 305 Abbreviated Ringing m 501 Pickup Group Extensions m 307 Forced Account Code Entry m 502 Calling Group Extensions m 308 Distinctive Ring m 504 Night Service Group m 309 Intercom Dial Tone m 505 Hunt Group Extensions m 310 Automatic VMS Cover m 601 Fax Machine Extensions m 311 External Hotline m 607 AA Extensions m 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy m 612 Contact Closure Group m 313 Line Access Mode Line m Automatic Line Selection Ringing m Line Ringing m 314 Pool Extension Assignment m 315 Pool Access Restriction m 316 Call Waiting m 317 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing m 318 Caller ID Log Answered Calls m 320 Call Coverage Rings Considerations m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly Pooled extension settings can be copied to key extensions except for extension 10 Key extension settings can be copied to pooled extensions Copy Settings 399 4 17 PARTNER Advanced Communicati
409. ne and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension for the second doorphone Considerations An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions m You should not assign doorphones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 308EC or 206 modules m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions m You cannot bridge two doorphones together m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines and or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the doorphone extension Automatic Line Selection for the doorphone extension will be automatically set to select intercom lines first m You can use Message Light On with the doorphone for example the doorphone s light flashes as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a processor module or to a Release 3 0 or later 206 module Programming To program a doorphone extension ae Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 4 for doorphone 1 or 6 0 for doorphone 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the doorphone two digit extension number or press to unassign an existing doorphone extension Select another procedure or exit programming mode Doorphone Programming 9 16 Using Auxiliary Equip
410. ne at a time making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module See Connecting Lines and Extensions on page 2 16 Reconnect the power cord AN CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Move the carrier s On Off switch to the On position Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit m fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide Make sure all modules are seated properly Position the carrier cover over the modules so that the openings on the top of the carrier cover align correctly with the tabs at the top of the installed 5 slot carrier and modules Rotate the carrier cover into position so that it aligns correctly with the thumb screw opening on the bottom of the carrier Tighten the thumb screw To ensure proper alignment and safe operation tighten the thumb screw securely Replacing Modules 10 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Changing Settings and Adding Lines Poo
411. ne extension cancels the doorphone setting m You should not assign hotline telephones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules which are reserved as power failure extensions m The hotline telephone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the telephone rings m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline telephone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the hotline extension m Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only Hotline 603 4 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 m Use External Hotline 311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset Programming To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A G O 3 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number At the Data prompt enter the alert extension number use 70 for the loudspeaker paging system A display similar to the following appears Internal Hotline Ext 33 Data 3
412. ne has a display indicated by a D in the model name you receive messages and prompts when making calls and when programming A system display telephone is required for system programming Valid system lines and extensions are as follows m Lines range from 01 to 31 m Extensions range from 10 to 57 System Telephones 6 4 Using the Telephones Table 6 1 summarizes PARTNER system telephone features Table 6 1 PARTNER Telephones Feature PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 Number of programmable 32 16 16 4 buttons with lights Number of programmable 4 4 0 0 buttons without lights Key mode line button 24 16 16 4 capacity Hybrid mode pool button 5 5 5 4 capacity Line capacity 31 16 16 Intercom buttons 2 2 2 2 Display v v Speakerphone v v v v 1 The main pool uses two buttons 2 The system supports a maximum of 31 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines You can use up to 31 buttons on these telephones for outside lines 3 The system supports a maximum of 31 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines You can use up to 16 buttons on these telephones for outside lines Lights Each line or pool button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Au
413. ne is set to No Access or In Only the extension cannot place calls on that line neither by pressing the line button nor by using Direct Line Pickup ldle Line m lfanextension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions neither by pressing the line button nor by using Direct Line Pickup Active Line m Caller ID information does not appear for ringing calls on lines programmed for Out Only or No Access m Ifa lineis assigned to a telephone but is restricted to No Access the line button LEDs show calling activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls m You can use Lines Access Restriction to prevent extensions from accessing the Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 Programming To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 O 2 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number to be programmed At the Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension The current restriction appears To change the line restriction for this extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line this is the factory setting v m 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line m 32 In Only can only receive calls not mak
414. nect external equipment such as an external router The 1600 DSL Module 2 24 Programming Connections for the 1600 DSL Module The programming of the 1600 DSL module is separate from the programming of the PARTNER ACS You can program the 1600 DSL module either locally or remotely To locally program the module connect a cable from a PC s serial port to the Console port on the module You can set up the module for remote programming by following these steps see Figure 1 Connect a cable from an extension port on the system to the Line jack on an external modem The modem should have the following parameters 14 4 kbps or greater Auto Answer is enabled DTR override is enabled Echo commands are Suppressed Result and Error codes are Suppressed 2 Connecta cable from the serial port on the modem to a null modem 3 Connect a cable from the null modem to the Console port on the 1600 DSL module Initial Configuration of the 1600 DSL Module Installation Figure 2 23 Remote Programming Setup PARTNER ACS Extension Port Tip Ring ON External Modem 1600 DSL Module Console Port Null Modem Remote administration of the 1600 DSL module is available through the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software You must have the following m Release 5 0 or later software on the 1600 DSL module m Release 7 0 software version of PARTNER ACS m PARTNE
415. nes It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones Considerations Use Caller ID Call Log Line Association to associate lines with the one extension that will n log all calls Then use Caller ID Log All Calls 319 to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines m tis not necessary to associate lines and extensions to log unanswered transferred calls Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically Programming To associate a line with an extension for the purpose of logging Caller ID information 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 1 8 at extension 10 or 11 At the extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed At the Line prompt enter the two digit line number to be associated with the extension Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned line is associated with an extension or the extension is associated with a line m 2 Notassigned line is not associated with an extension the factory setting v Do one of the following To associate another line with this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 To associate another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programmin
416. nes includes assembling connecting and testing the telephone As desired you also can connect an Intercom Autodialer to certain telephones Assembling PARTNER Telephones All PARTNER telephones are shipped with a stand for either desk mounting or wall mounting the telephone For other telephones see the instructions that are provided with the telephone Installing the Cover 2 34 Installation Desk Mounting the Telephone Follow these steps to desk mount a telephone 1 Gently place the telephone upside down 2 Route the telephone cord through the hole in the top center of the stand see Figure 2 25 Figure inr e the Telephone 3 Insert the tabs on the narrow end of the stand into the slots on the inside bottom edge of the telephone see Figure 2 26 Installing Telephones 2 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use While pressing in the tabs that protrude from the wide end of the stand lower the stand to the telephone see Figure 2 27 Release the tabs to lock the stand into one of the three positions provided by the openings in the back of the telephone The height of the stand is adjustable to three positions low medium and high The telephone height can be adjusted by moving the locking tabs to a different position Turn the telephone over Remove the plastic cover fro
417. ng 6 7 volume controls 6 9 handset 6 8 Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI 6 8 Hardware 1 7 1 13 headsets 9 1 help finding 11 2 HFAI see Hands Free Answer on Intercom Hold on a system telephone 6 24 placing calls on 6 23 hold A 5 changing disconnect time 4 41 4 42 on a single line telephone 6 24 Hold Button 8 45 Hold Disconnect Time 4 41 4 42 Hold Disconnect Time 203 4 41 4 42 Hold Reminder Tone 6 23 8 37 Hold Exclusive 8 37 Holding a Call 8 37 8 45 Hotel Motel Features outgoing call restriction button 114 7 17 wake up service button 115 7 20 Hotline 4 43 using 8 46 Hotline 603 4 43 Hunt Group Extensions 4 36 Hunt Group Extensions 505 4 36 Hunt Groups off loading call activity 8 42 programming using 8 42 Hunt Groups see also Group Call Distribution Hybrid Mode 1 3 Idle Line Preference see Automatic Line Selection Industry Standard Devices see Standard Devices Initial System Programming 3 1 3 19 initialize the system 2 13 In Range Out of Building IROB protectors 9 2 Inside Call making an 6 19 inspecting Caller ID 8 19 Installation cover 2 34 loudspeaker paging system 2 33 overview 2 1 IN 6 installation control unit 2 4 environmental requirements 2 2 telephones 2 34 wall mounting 5 slot carrier 2 8 stand alone processor module 2 5 wall mounting the control unit 2 4 installation wall mounting 2 slot carrier 2 5 Intercom Auto Dial
418. ng press Next Data or Prev Data until the setting you want appears or press to return the setting to the factory setting The possible settings are m 1 Active Internal m 2 Active PC Card m 3 Not Active the factory setting wv m 4 Backup Alarm Cleared 4 Exit programming mode For information about using Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 Backup Programming Manual 124 Use this feature to manually back up all the programming except the system date and time to either the internal memory of the processor module or a Backup Restore PC Card Programming To begin a manual backup of system settings 1 If you want to back up to a PC Card verify that only one Backup Restore Card is in the processor module If you do not have a PC Card installed see Using a PC Card on page 10 2 or refer to the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions that came with your PC Card Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQAA at extension 10 or 11 The current setting appears To change the setting press Nex Data or Prev Data until the setting you want appears or press to return the setting to the factory setting The possible settings are m 1 Internal Memory the factory setting wv m 2 POCard If there is a problem one of the following messages appears see Chapter 11 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions
419. ng for an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 2 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign Remote Call Forwarding press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Remote Call Forwarding 322 4 57 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Ring on Transfer 119 Use this feature to specify what callers hear while they are being transferred If Ring on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing as they are being transferred if it is set to Not Active callers hear silence unless Music On Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the system If this is the case callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destination extension Once there callers hear ringing until the call is answered or is sent to the voice messaging system Considerations m If you have an audio source connected to the system set Music On Hold 602 to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active so callers hear music as they are being transferred to the destination extension m This feature has no effect on Direct Extension D
420. ng pool buttons Joining a Call on a System Telephone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call by using a system telephone do one of the following m Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset m Lift the handset and press ntercom 6 8 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call Joining a Call on a Single Line Telephone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call by using a single line telephone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted Handling Calls 6 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Handling Calls 6 32 Operator Features 7 Contents A ence wales ues PRIMA whe ELSE La ede ee 7 1 Programming an Operator s Extension core eke tinge nce aa X a Gal Handing CODD 213 41 39 81 RT CHOICE EGRE O18 SHORE RU HE E ERRE 7 1 a Backup Answering Options 2 24 rence car AER ERR ReRECAT ER ERR eB ans 7 2 a Button PROSA uc egg cub rra AT Peg OE snes 7 2 Automatic System Answer Features 0 c cece eee eee eee eee 7 4 a Considerations Ps aaa qa depo d iia els 7 4 a Automatic System Answer Bu
421. ng programming is performed followed by additional communications system programming See the PARTNER Messaging Installation Programming and Troubleshooting Online Guide or the PARTNER Messaging System Manager s Quick Reference for the programming required to use PARTNER Messaging with your PARTNER ACS To program any of the other three voice messaging systems perform the following tasks m Assign the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions to Hunt Group 7 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 see page 4 36 m Setthe Transfer Return Extension 306 see page 4 66 for each of the messaging system extensions to extension 10 or other extension of your choosing This ensures that unanswered calls transferred by the messaging system to extensions that do not have VMS Coverage return to the extension you designate as the Transfer Return Extension m Program a VMS Cover button Feature 15 see page 8 72 on phones to allow subscribers to turn VMS Coverage on and off m Program Line Coverage Extension 208 see page 4 48 to determine which subscriber s mailbox should receive unanswered calls that come in on the specified line Voice Messaging Systems 9 44 Using Auxiliary Equipment Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button Feature 14 see page 8 76 at extension 10 so that the operator can transfer calls directly to an extension s mailbox without first ringing its telephone This is useful when the operator knows that the subscriber is not available
422. ngle 9 18 Index fax machines 9 17 9 26 CNG detection 9 23 fax line saver 9 20 Fax Management button 9 23 identifying extensions 9 25 inappropriate answering 9 17 setting up 9 18 fax line saver 9 20 send and receive machines 9 21 single machine 9 19 transferring calls to 9 17 manual 9 18 voice and fax on same line 9 23 Fax Management button 9 23 Fax Management feature 9 23 Feature Telephones 6 13 features dial codes A 3 intercom dial codes A 4 number codes A 1 Release 6 0 or later 1 3 system programming A 1 ferrite core 9 38 Follow Me 8 11 Forced Account Code Entry 3 16 4 33 Forced Account Code List 3 16 4 34 Forced Account Code List 409 4 34 Forced Account Codes 4 33 Forwarding Calls 8 11 8 27 8 60 5 Slot Carrier configuration overview 1 7 G GCD see Group Call Distribution Grounding the system 2 11 Group Call Distribution 4206 4 38 Group Calling Ring Page 8 39 using single line telephone 8 41 system telephone 8 40 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 8 42 using single line telephone 8 44 system telephone 8 43 Group Paging 8 39 Group Pickup 8 45 using single line telephone 8 45 system telephone 8 45 Groups calling 4 35 8 39 hunt 4 36 8 42 night service 4 39 paging 8 40 pickup 4 40 8 45 IN 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use H handling calls 6 16 Handset for hard of hearing 9 2 usi
423. ning immediate answering of the call The factory setting is 2 rings Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Use this feature to identify the lines on which incoming calls should be answered by Automatic System Answer Considerations All lines programmed with Automatic System Answer should be assigned to extension 10 Only outside calls on Automatic System Answer lines are answered automatically Intercom transferred and transfer return calls are not answered automatically You can set Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 to Active to log calls on lines answered by Automatic System Answer Automatic System Answer Features 7 6 Operator Features Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered by the system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 2 0 4 Enter the two digit system line number of the desired line To assign or unassign the line press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To identify another line press Next item or Prev ttem until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all the lines that you want to identify Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Use this feature to determine how the system handles Automatic System Ans
424. nnect an SMDR printer a PC or a Call Accounting device connected to a serial printer or PC port to the SMDR jack on the processor module The SMDR printer produces reports that monitor call activity Follow these steps to connect a device to the SMDR jack see Figure 9 17 1 You must install a ferrite core on the SMDR cable right below the PC Card slots by doing the following see Figure 9 18 a Wrap the cable around the ferrite core once b Snap the core closed 2 Insert one end of a D8W modular cord into the SMDR jack the second jack on the processor module 3 Route the cord through the processor module s wire manager Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 38 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 Plug the other end of the cord into a 355A adapter 5 Plug the adapter into the printer s or PC s RS 232C serial port Figure 9 17 Connecting to the SMDR Jack NV ML F Le h SMDR Jack Call Accounting Terminal Printer optional EQ YI um NAVAVAVY AVAVAVAN SWAIN AWAIT Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure 9 18 Installing the Ferrite Cord Processor Module Ferrite SMDR Programming The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR function of the system provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed repo
425. ns call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Problems with System The following procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter The procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings provided that the system batteries are installed and not low on power Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control unit s power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Problems with System 11 30 Cross Reference of Features Tables A 1 A 2 and A 3 show the feature codes you can dial to program those features Table A 1 System Programming Procedures Code Feature Code Feature 101 System Date 314 Pool Extension Assignment 315 Pool Access Restriction 103 System Time 316 Call Waiting 104 Number of Lines 317 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 105 Transfer Return Rings 318 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 107 Recall Timer Duration 319 Caller ID Log All Calls 108 Rotary Dialing Timeout 320 Call Coverage Rings 109 Outside Conference Denial 321 VMS Cover Rings 110 Automatic System Answer Delay 322 Remote Call Forwarding 111 Automatic System Answer Button 399 Copy Settings 112 Direct Extension Dial Delay 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 113 Direct Extension Dial Button 402
426. ns System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y System Components E GERE LLLLLLLLILLLLLLLILLILILIILILILLLILL ILIZLZILILLLIb ILLIZLILULBIIL LLIL LLLLLLLLIeLIIILILILIALLILLU Se eee ee 1 14 Installation Contents A TIN TL TT I TITIUS 2 1 Evaluating the Environment ipid PECES RP PRA PETER TTE iners the Control UBI cd dod oer ds rs 2 4 a Wall Mounting the Control Unit ooooccocconoccro 2 4 a Labeling Jacks TNT READER MR RT 2 9 a Grounding Me Syste visores oe eRe PAARE ERA 2 11 a Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module bd REA popas God ux uu a dniitisdizing 1 ie SES cad eux RR is 2 13 a Checking the LEDs ieee es rd dd TT sare 2 I5 Connecting Lines and Extensions Lan spese Uo aasa Re RE UE PUR E A 2 16 A resiti trr Oc HERE EORR Je KROES PODER A PEED TR EO e s 2 18 a Initial Configuration of the T1 Module pira siria Le The 1600 DSL 6 0 A 2 24 Programming Connections for the 1600 DSL Module 2 25 Initial Configuration of the 1600 DSL Module EE TTE 2 25 THe 02E oc PPP 2 31 a Placement Within the Carrier cierra rd a e 2 31 a FISICA DESIO serrare ee re aeea AAA dial 2 32 Connecting the Loudspeaker Paging System n nananana 2 33 Installing the CM nce de A A ed 2 34 Installing Telephones rd rie dris 2 34 Assembling PARTNER Telephones aed ple eb dpa doped pede V
427. nsferred to a Calling Group manually or by using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group m You can program a Group Calling button on a system telephone to ring or page a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch m Whenacallis transferred to a Calling Group and the call is not answered it goes back to the specified Transfer Return Extension 306 The call must be ringing not a voice page m Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging m DID calls can be routed to calling groups to ring all available members Programming To program a Calling Group button 1 Press Feature O O Press a programmable button Do one of the following m f you want calls to ring the group press left Intercom 7 m If you want calls to page the group press left Intercom X 7 Buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Group Calling Ring Page on a System Telephone To use the programmed button To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed button first then lift the handset f you ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring f you page the group start talking after the beep Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system telephones t
428. nsion Name e AAA 8 38 AA EM M ELI UI LEE 8 39 Group Calling Ring Page TOI TO sonara ca o 8 39 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal dprit unt MT C 8 42 Group Pickup Cae ce ee as eee t dle cM ta eee 8 45 ac qe 8 46 Manual Signaling F 13XX 0f uo t 4m 8 46 Message Light On F09XX and Message Light Off F10XX sssssusss 8 48 a T rH 8 49 Xu calx ACC T M 8 53 o Met M 8 54 o O AAA 8 56 o AA ee arene a Serene ene ee ee eres ere 8 57 Remote Call Forwarding P11 inn arc iii ara lE 8 60 c sm e p mee mx pM de pU ee 8 63 iv Master TOC Master Table of Contents e d HM SNl RM M R Speed Dialing Features OPTAT TENTE PERENNE o A COS On A Rem 8 68 A AAA M HERR nd Touch Tone Enable F08 ER sis dina 8 71 YMS Cover A e Pe O 8 72 Voice Interrupt POSO C ici S A A 8 73 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 A A 8 76 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment A Loaded nod nedi dio rrlu Sure H COR RE MM ECHTE OR N PEA I EAER ENIM DM DE Tip Ring Device Requirements is n peon cs 9 2 Combination Extensions nado Tn iau 9 3 Dnowannd MISAS a RA DUET 9 4 Auto Attendant P oe Contact Clos
429. nt 301 to assign any individual lines you want the fax machine to use to extension X Do one of the following m f extension X is a key extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to line A B C m f extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to Pool D line A B C Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools on extension X to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned NOTE Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Send and Receive Fax Machines If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives see Figure 9 10 Figure 9 10 Send and Receive Fax Machines PARTNER Fax Machines 9 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use When you send a fax an outside line is automatically selected Incoming fax calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2 If a fax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2
430. nt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order Groups of Extensions 4 38 Programming System Options m If you install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system to Hunt Group 7 Then assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without the assistance of the receptionist Programming To set up lines for Group Call Distribution 1 2 3 4 6 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 O 6 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 31 To assign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v m 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 Do one of the following m To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4
431. nt PVCs from the ATM PVC Config Menu The PVC port screen appears showing the present ATM PVC ports and their configurations Press any key to return to the ATM PVC Config Menu Select 2 Modify Existing PVC from the ATM PVC Config Menu if you need to change the ATM PVC At the PVC port screen type the number of the port you want to configure and press Enter This should be the PVC the service provider has designated for voice Type the Virtual Port Identifier VPI at the prompt and press Enter Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI at the prompt and press Enter At the ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu select one of the following m 3 Proprietary Voice for CopperCom and Jetstream gateways m 4 RFC 1483 for PathStar gateways If you selected 4 RFC 1483 in Step h above select 1 CBR from the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Press Enter at the Select Peak Cell Rate prompt Press Esc until you return to the WAN Configuration Menu 11 If you selected 7 Frame Relay in Step 9 follow these steps a b C Select 3 Configure DLCIs from the WAN Configuration Menu Select 4 Show Current DLCIs from the FR DLCI Config Menu The DLCI port screen appears showing the present DLCI ports and their encapsulation Press any key to return to the FR DLCI Config Menu The 1600 DSL Module 2 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use
432. nt groups of users Additionally individual lines can be assigned to a manager s extension so that he or she always has access to an outside line Modes of Operation 1 4 Overview In Hybrid mode extension 10 always operates like an extension in Key mode This means that every outside line in the system is associated with a specific line button at extension 10 All other extensions can be set up with access to only lines only pools or a combination of lines and pools m Those extensions that have pool buttons even if they also have individual line buttons are called pooled extensions m Those extensions that have only line buttons including extension 10 are called key extensions Key extensions cannot access pools If your system is configured for Hybrid mode keep in mind m Aline can be assigned to only one pool m Individual extensions can be restricted access to specific pools m Individual lines can be assigned to an extension with pool buttons as long as the lines are not part of any pool At installation the system assigns all outside lines to the main pool and assigns the main pool to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of all system telephones except extension 10 If desired you can remove some of the lines from the main pool and create auxiliary pools Then you can assign pools and or individual lines on a per extension basis System Capacity The PARTNER ACS release you have the carrier you use and
433. ntact Closure F41 and F42 8 32 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Contact Closure on a System Telephone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Press the programmed button or press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 The green light is on steady If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Step 1 to deactivate the Contact Closure The green light goes off Using Contact Closure on a Single Line Telephone To activate a Contact Closure 1 2 3 Pick up the handset to get an intercom dial tone Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Steps 1 and 2 to deactivate the Contact Closure Direct Line Pickup Features With the Direct Line Pickup features you can access a ringing or held call or a call in progress You can also select a line to use that is not assigned to your telephone The Direct Line Pickup features are Direct Line Pickup Active Line Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Use this feature to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a system line number This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line that is not assigned to the telephone Considerations This feature is useful when
434. nter Pak wD Do one of the following m To add other telephone numbers to this list press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 7 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 22 Programming System Options Disallowed List Assignments 405 Use this feature to assign up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Considerations m You should use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure m When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension the list applies to all lines to which the extension has access Programming To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program a O 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 8 Boom To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to extension m 2 Not Assigned to extension the factory setting Y 5 Doone ofthe following m To assign or unassign another list fo
435. ntercom Autodialer 9 Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet extension numbers and corresponding persons names Place the button sheet on the Autodialer and carefully replace the plastic cover 10 Adjust the height of the Autodialer to match the system telephone If you unplug the telephone NOTED connected to an Autodialer you must reset the Autodialer To do so unplug the D8W line cord connected to the IN jack on the bottom of the Autodialer from the J1 jack on the adapter then plug it back in Connecting Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional telephone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many tip ring single line devices work with the system regardless of the manufacturer See Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment for further details about connecting auxiliary equipment including voice messaging systems Connecting Auxiliary Equipment 2 41 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use SSS IM D DEC e Y Connecting Auxiliary Equipment EUN 2 42 Initial System Programming 3 Contents A TT IIT T i TL ST 3 1 Programming 4 PARTNER SySIBITI Lid ua gas arras ERRARE AA KR RR 3 1 A AAA 3 1 o LIS T S o LT L I TT 3 2 System Programming Basics tia rV ad
436. ntry Background Music and Call Forwarding Call Follow Me if any of them are programmed on a button with lights Ringing Patterns System telephones have these ringing patterns m An outside call ring ring ring See Unique Line Ringing 209 on page 4 67 m An intercom call ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP lf you have a system display telephone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appears on the display m Atransferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back at your extension ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP See Unique Line Ringing 209 on page 4 67 NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to telephones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones There are two different dial tones when you call with a system telephone m Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call System Telephones 6 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system telephone press a line or pool button The dial
437. o a specific extension For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the system Recall feature instead On a system telephone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up Then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a single line telephone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up Then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch you can program the extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing on page 8 5 To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If itis Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears Music On Hold while the call is being transferred to the destination extension If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence Handling Calls 6 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination
438. o hears the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the Voice Interrupt On Busy call If you hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a system telephone that is idle has Do Not Disturb turned off and has Voice Interrupt On Busy not assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Voice Interrupt Features 8 74 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call while the user is active on another call You can use Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back only from a system telephone Considerations m Program Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back on a button with lights This feature is not supported on a button without lights Programming To program a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button 1 Press o0 2 Press a programmable button with lights 3 Press oO 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back To respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2
439. ocessor module and want to retain the system settings you had on the previous processor module A successful restore takes about five seconds NOTE When a restore completes successfully the Restore Complete message appears for two seconds at idle extensions 10 and 11 Then a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs disconnecting any calls in progress You should warn users before beginning a restore or do the restore during nonbusiness hours Considerations m Make sure that you have saved the most recent system settings before you begin the Restore procedure m If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed Or Restore Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the factory settings m The configuration of the 1600 DSL module is not saved on the processor module or PC card it is retained in the flash memory of the 1600 DSL module To restore this configuration you must perform a cold start by using Restore Programming or System Reset Programming Saved 728 Backup and Restore 4 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using Restore To initiate a restore 1 f you want to restore from a PC Card verify that only one Backup Restore Card is in the processor module If you do not have a PC Card installed see Using a PC Card on page 10 2 or refer to the PARTN
440. ode Fabri SD CC RT UL Handling Calls TRENT ere rier ene ee eee CI AI T 6 16 7 Operator Features Overview mut MU dici A eit Li ue n d rae es 7 1 Programming an Operator s Extension aria Tome 171 Automatic System Answer Features onsec ren eth atenta ihnen uiae cel Reb Ria 7 4 Direct Extension Dial Features ici nas rio EN Night Service Button 503 Rast ee ee ee TEENS A EN 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button F114 anni iaa jen FONE Station Unlock F22 cuisine E A a Hi 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 115 A A 7 20 Master TOC iii PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use EL Re EIE ee j 8 Programming amp Using Telephone Features 5 Vl Meu n D 8 1 Extension PIO gui f TT CTS 8 1 seo Entry F12 AA o O ER 8 2 Auto LAN aida ii 8 5 Background MUSIC A A n 8 7 Gall Coverage AAA PH 8 8 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX oooooooccccoocccccnooonnnonnnnnnncnnannnncnnnnnnncnnnnnn nes 8 11 cR m 8 14 Gall Pickup A m 8 15 A AAA 8 16 Caller ID Features Sn epi DUM bue duqa Mode mM dita e m SE D D E 8 18 Gall Phone Connecti FIT susdssbdn EUM DU e 8 27 dou ius a Mem 8 31 Contact Clus re FA and FAZI ras ride CEPR NERE NEEE 8 32 Ell Line Pickup gg 1 lt n ds 8 33 Do Not Distro PO sia aaa ib 8 36 SUIS ANA PUES a a 8 37 Exte
441. odems fax machines and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes the lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By placing auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group auxiliary equipment can start sending and answering calls whenever you press the Night Service button at extension 10 NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Figure 9 15 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line Figure 9 15 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 9 34 Using Auxiliary Equipment Programming To program auxiliary equipment with Night Service 1 Do one of the following m f extension X and Y are key extensions use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover m f extensions X and Y are pooled extensions use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines A and B from all po
442. ogramming and Use eee Su e T t 4 iv Iransmr Hetum Rings 105 siesta incense ios e irri ak A 4 67 Uniq e Line Ringing F209 id ue ns Ear Snob a cipe e E Erb Prol dee ees 4 67 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 sexes ra RARA ph OR AR 4 68 a Considerations A xta S dq d Fr ER 4 69 a PISTA PCT rr m 4 69 Programming System Options Overview As a System Administrator after you have initialized the system you should program features for the entire system In addition you need to be able to back up and restore programming Many of these features affect individual extensions but they are programmed from extension 10 or 11 or from a PC connected to the system For instructions on system programming see Using System Programming on page 3 4 The features are listed alphabetically When a group of features deals with the same overall function they are grouped accordingly for example Doorphone Alert Extensions and Doorphone Extension under Doorphone Programming Overview 4 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Abbreviated Ringing 305 Use this feature to activate or deactivate Abbreviated Ringing at the system telephone at a specific extension When you are on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is Active any incoming call rings only once The green light next to the line or pool button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred
443. oin the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller m You cannot put a joined call on hold m You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line or pool button change to alternately flashing red and green m If asystem telephone joins a call on a single line telephone there is a momentary break in the call on the single line telephone Handling Calls 6 30 Using the Telephones m You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices can interfere with its operation m You can program Privacy F07 onto a system telephone button to allow or prevent others from joining your calls m Caller ID information is displayed if you join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy F07 activated m lfa lineis not assigned to your extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension you can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL to join a call on that line m You can join a call answered by Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial by pressing the line button and lifting the handset The message stops playing when you join the call m Pooled extension users can add other parties to a call by pressi
444. ol Line Assignment Mode of Operation 198 Use this feature to change the operating mode of your system Your system must be operating in Hybrid mode to support the use of pools Programming Follow these steps to change the mode of operation of the system to Hybrid mode 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 1 9 8 Enter the system password which is 863285 Enter the number for the mode of operation m 1 for Key the factory setting v m 2for Hybrid The system resets Pool Access Restriction 315 Use this feature to restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool For example you may want customer service representatives to make calls using the WATS lines that belong to auxiliary pool 881 but not receive incoming calls on the lines in that pool in this case you assign pool 881 to the customer service representative s telephones and restrict the pool to Out Only This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension set to In Only or No Access for a particular pool cannot select that pool to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Pool Programming 4 50 Programming System Options Considerations m For extension 10 and any extensions for which Line Access Mode 313 is set to Key this feature is automatically set to No Access m When a user has access
445. ols and Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from extensions X and Y Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to No Ring NOTE Make sure extension X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information allows you to Detect any unauthorized calls Bill clients or projects Bill back by department Reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code Print Caller ID information Call information is recorded after each call is completed For outgoing calls the system records information for each call that lasts more than 10 seconds The timing begins when you lift the handset or press to access an outside line For calls on T1 lines the timer is reset when the call is answered For incoming calls the timing begins when the call is answered Timing st
446. ols are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings You can program the remaining buttons with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 2 To assign a name to the extension press left and enter the character codes See Extension Name Display on page 5 4 for the codes Program features as described in this chapter 4 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Vicar To exit programming mode do one of the following m Press Feature O 0 m Lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Overview 8 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Dial Code Features You can access some features by dialing a feature code at the telephone dialpad From a system telephone you can dial Or Intercom followed by the two or three digit code or press a programmed Auto Dial button From a single line telephone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you have intercom dial tone See Table A 2 in Appendix A Cross Reference of Features for a listing of dial code features Account Code Entry F12 Use this feature to enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code typically is used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Considerations m You can use Account Code Entry only on system telephone
447. on Considerations m If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer m The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up m f you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings Programming To change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 Press Feature C C System Program System Program amp 1 O 5 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a setting 0 9 4 is the factory setting or press until a display with the desired amount of rings appears similar to the following Transfer Return 5 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Unique Line Ringing 209 Use this feature to assign a ringing pattern maximum of eight to a line for users to differentiate by sound which line is ringing Once a ring pattern is assigned to a line incoming calls on that line ring with the assigned ring pattern Incoming calls that are transferred to another station ring with the assigned ring pattern fo
448. on Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Extension Name Display on page 5 4 for more information Display 6 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Handling Calls The following call handling functions are available from both system and single line telephones m Making calls m Answering calls m Placing calls on hold m Conference calls m Transferring calls m Joining calls Making Calls You can make a call by dialing an outside telephone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number Hybrid Mode Only Making calls on a system operating in Hybrid mode is the same as in Key mode except you can select a pool button rather than a line button to access an outside line When you press a pool button the system automatically selects an idle line belonging to the pool To access a line in a pool that is not assigned to that extension or to access a line in a pool that you are already using press and dial the pool access code If all lines in a pool are busy you hear busy tone You can program Automatic Line Selection to change the way the system sele
449. on a Single Line Telephone To make an announcement over the Loudspeaker Paging system and the idle system telephones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial OOO 3 Speakinto the handset Your voice is heard through the Loudspeaker Paging system and the speakers of all idle System telephones in Calling Group 1 NOTE For touch tone telephones only if your Loudspeaker Paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the paging device to make zoned announcements Paging Features 8 52 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Privacy F07 Press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the your extension as needed You can use Privacy only with a system telephone Considerations Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights You cannot dial the Privacy code manually or use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls Privacy can be turned on and off at any time even during a call Users cannot join calls by using pool buttons regardless of the Automatic Extension Privacy setting or the state of the Privacy button If Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if you need to have co w
450. on about whom you should contact w m Installing the Control Unit 2 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Connecting Lines and Extensions NOTES If extensions are not wired to any modular jacks call a qualified service technician m Residential Class B PARTNER ACS users must connect a Wurth Elektronik s part number 74271142 or equivalent to each extension jack on the PACS processor module Use the following procedure to connect analog lines and extensions 1 Test for a dial tone at the network interface jacks before connecting outside lines to the control unit For the test connect a tip ring telephone to the first network interface jack a Liftthe handset and listen for a dial tone If there is no dial tone contact your local telephone company before continuing b Repeat for each network interface jack Connect line cords to the line jacks on the modules Start at the top with the line jacks on the processor module and then move to the leftmost module Fill each module before moving to the next module to the right see Figure 2 18 Route each cord through the wire manager on the front of the module see Figure 2 18 Connecting Lines and Extensions 2 16 Figure 2 18 Connecting Line Cords to Line Jacks 10 Connect the free end of each line cord to t
451. on number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press BOO Dial your extension number twice Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Use this feature to forward all intercom transferred and outside calls from your extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number You can activate this feature from your extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me See Cell Phone Connect F11 on page 8 27 and Remote Call Forwarding F11 on page 8 60 to forward calls to outside telephone numbers Considerations You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls coverage calls or transfer return calls Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system The telephone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarded unless Do Not Disturb is active Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F1
452. one Number List m You can signal then speak to system telephone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 is Assigned for the recipient Making an Outside Call The following instructions assume that system telephones are set via Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines first and single line telephones are set to select intercom first This means that when you lift the handset of a system telephone you hear outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when you lift the handset of a single line telephone you hear intercom dial tone Handling Calls 6 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Making an Outside Call on a System Telephone To make an outside call on a system telephone 1 Lift the handset or press Sek The green light next to a line or pool button is on steady and you hear the outside dial tone 2 Dial the telephone number On a system display telephone the dialed number appears on the display If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Press the idle line button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the two digit line number 2 f desired lift the handset 3 Dial the telephone number To make an outs
453. one Programming oooococcnnncccnnonocccnnnnnnncconnnnncncnnnnnnnnancnnncnn 3 8 Comiguring De TT PROCS sc s iere e p Rie nana 3 9 ceting ihe Dale anad Mg ewe 3 10 Administering the Loudspeaker Paging System sssssseeeeee 3 12 A LINES aaea aa a er eee ee 3 12 Master TOC i PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use E M D AM e ee c esurire rie ERIT nnde 3 16 Emergency Phone Number List AG asic unen iniciara 3 18 4 Programming System Options e M 4 1 Abbreviated Ringing F305 i esed V Ad pbta da 4 2 ANE A ce eee 4 3 Automatie Extension Privacy FASO cia 4 3 cie sic ASI a m m 4 4 Call Coverage Rings P320 cinis eann ENNE REA ERAEN NAAS 4 9 Se tix d ne E E E TERR 4 10 Gall CCELI 4 16 Mew dro ql co em ig cg none eagle 4 17 Dialing Restrictions and Petmissii iB scan coco n cp bbb tint FR LR De Ea a air 4 18 Dial Mode 201 a Doa E a MEE 4 26 Direcc Brugis rara ai 4 27 Display Language EU sn cd 4 29 II AAA ani na ERO DERTEN 4 30 mcdium 020r eere 4 31 PONG Accum Codos sra in 4 33 Groups so OO aati 4 35 Hold Disconnect Time ranas iiinn snaa 4 41 Hold Reminder Tone 127 eS A A A A 4 42 ESO GOOS AAA 4 43 inisicom ISI Tone AUS rojo orita 4 44 Line ASS Mode PENG PR 4 45 A P cuu r EE ii A id 4 46 Line Coverage Extension 208 uiui ones reena TRER EEE 4 48
454. only for single line telephone extensions Do not assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone interrupts the data connection m You cannot transfer either party connected by Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active m Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature m Forinstructions on using Call Waiting see Answering Calls on page 6 20 m Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls Programming To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 3 1 G at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed To assign or unassign Call Waiting press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v To program another extension press ex Item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Call Waiting 316 4 16 Programming System Options Copy Settings 399 Set up your system by programming one extension for each type of telephone in the system Then use Copy Settings 399 to program other telephones of the same type For example you can program o
455. ons Carefully replace the plastic cover Make sure the swivel display is set to the lowest position Connecting and Testing Telephones Follow these steps to connect and test a telephone 1 To connect a telephone plug the modular telephone mounting cord into a modular wall jack or directly into a module extension jack see Figure NOTE To install two telephones or other devices on a single extension jack see Combination Extensions on page 9 3 Test the power and lights on a system telephone a While the telephone is idle press and hold the button for five seconds b Before releasing the button lift the handset All lights should light the ringer should sound and on system display telephones only a test pattern should appear on the display If these do not occur call for support as instructed on the copyright page of this guide c Replace the handset the telephone is now in normal operating mode Installation Figure 2 33 Removing the Plastic Cover Figure 2 34 Plugging in Telephone Cords V f N ETA SOTA eao 1000 opon Installing Telephones 2 39 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Connecting a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer You can connect a PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer to a PARTNER telephone at a
456. ons System Installation Programming and Use Programming To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AOOO at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from At the Data prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid Do one of the following m To copy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number m To copy another extension s settings press Next Item or Prev ttem until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions You can restrict outside calling from an extension by using these various features m Allowed Phone Number Lists m Allowed List Assignments m Disallowed Phone Number Lists m Disallowed List Assignments m Line Access Restriction m Outgoing Call Restriction NsecuRITY ALERT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System telephones give you more protection against such misuse than single line telephones Therefore you should install system telephones where restricting telephone use is important Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that users can dial r
457. ons that have the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available m Continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available m Disconnects the call The Automatic System Answer features consist of m Automatic System Answer Button m Automatic System Answer Delay m Automatic System Answer Lines m Automatic System Answer Mode m Automatic System Answer Record Playback Considerations m The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately m Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message m Automatic System Answer features are unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Automatic System Answer Button 1111 Use this feature to program a button to turn Automatic System Answer ASA on and off This feature helps the operator answer calls during busy periods Considerations m This feature is available only on the system telephone at extension 10 m Program an Automatic System Answer Button on a button with lights on the system display telephone at extension 10 This feature is not supported on a button without lights m The Automatic System Answer Button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset
458. ops when the call is disconnected The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 35 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations Display Language 303 specifies the language used for display messages The call report header is printed in the same language as that specified for extension 10 m System Date 101 and System Time 103 set correctly to ensure accurate call reports m If a report cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system stores up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls are not recorded m Before including the Talk field on call reports or changing the output format to 24 digits check the documentation shipped with the call accounting device to verify that these options are supported m If SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record is greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits m Inthe event of a power failure records of any
459. optional originating extension and destination personal speed dial code are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Cell Phone Connect on and off with one touch The lights show when Cell Phone Connect is on even if calls are forwarded to a different Personal Speed Dial code from the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Cell Phone Connect off An extension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Cell Phone Connect only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is set to No Restriction or In Only If an extension in a Hunt Group activates Cell Phone Connect the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Cover and Cell Phone Connect active calls ring at the Cell Phone Connect destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system If an extension has Call Coverage and Cell Phone Connect active calls are routed to the Cell Phone Connect destination Cell Phone Connect takes precedence Cell Phone Connect does not apply to parked calls See Call Park on page 8 14 You cannot use Call Screening F25 when the Cell Phone Connect feature is active You cannot forward calls to a System Speed Dial code The PARTNER system will forward only outside calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lin
460. or RTP transport voice Usually this is the same address as the voice PVC DLCI get it from your service provider Enter the TOS byte value for RTP Voice packets at the prompt get this from your service provider Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Router Configuration for Voice PathStar Only When you are connecting to a PathStar gateway you must configure the voice PVC Follow these steps to configure the voice PVC for the 1600 DSL module when you are connecting to a PathStar gateway 1 2 3 Select 2 Configure IP Router from the Main Menu Select C Configure Port IP Address from the Router Configuration Menu Select 1 SDSL from the Available Interfaces list The 1600 DSL Module 2 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Do one of the following m If you have the SDSL set for ATM select the RFC 1483 port for the voice PVC get this from the service provider m If you have the SDSL set for Frame Relay select the RFC 1490 port for the voice DLCI get this from the service provider Type the IP address of the voice PVC DLCI and press Enter Press Esc to return to the Main Menu Router Configuration for Data Follow these steps to configure the data PVC for the 1600 DSL module for any gateway mr ooa Select 2 Configure IP Router from the Main Menu Select C Configure Port IP Address from the Router Configuration Menu Select 1
461. or manual signaling Each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system telephone or on the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow you to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch System Components 1 12 Overview Single Line Telephones You can also use industry standard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature telephones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system Certain single line telephones are recommended because of their compatibility with the Message Waiting Light capability of the system NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect single line telephones with LED compatible Message Waiting Lights Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional telephone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many industry standard tip ring devices work with the system regardless of the manufacturer Auxiliary equipment also includes voice messaging systems The following are supported by the PARTNER ACS m PARTNER Messaging m PARTNER MAIL VS PMVS m PARTNER Voice Messaging PVM PC Card m The PARTNER MAIL system For more information see Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment or contact your local Authorized Dealer System Components 1 13 PARTNER Advanced Communicatio
462. or receive the call including a line in a pool Station Extension This usually is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the last extension on the call appears on the report Fortransferred incoming calls the destination extension Fortransferred outgoing calls the originator extension For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For forwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call For coverage calls the extension answering the coverage call If the calling party hangs up on an Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial call before someone at an extension answers this field shows 00 Account Code This is the account code up to 16 digits assigned to the call This code typically is used for charging calls to a specific client project or department Talk This is the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system The talk time is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds If the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial feature this field does not include the time the caller listens to the greeting or waits for someone to answer the call For all other calls the time in this field is the same as the time in the Duration field This field is included on the call report only
463. or transferred call the name appears on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call The System Administrator usually programs names for the extensions in the system However as the individual user you can change the name from your telephone See Extension Name Display on page 5 4 for more details Extension Name Display 8 38 Programming amp Using Telephone Features External Hotline The System Administrator assigns the External Hotline to extensions When you pick up the handset of a single line telephone at one of these extensions a number is automatically dialed The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the External Hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the tip ring devices connected to your system dial out at the same time A single line telephone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the External Hotline Using an External Hotline 1 Lift the handset of the External Hotline After approximately three seconds the programmed telephone number is dialed automatically If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again When the call is answered speak into the handset
464. orkers join conversations you can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed you must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned Automatic Extension Privacy is appropriate for use with single line telephones Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold If you have Caller ID you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed for active calls at your extension Programming To program a Privacy button 1 Press Feature 0 0 2 Press a programmable button with lights 3 Press 0D 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Privacy From a system telephone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on Press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is on Privacy F07 8 53 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Recall F03 Use this feature to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Considerations m Using Recall on an intercom call or a Loudspeaker Paging Line disconnects the call m Using Recall while using t
465. ormation displayed at your extension For held calls use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent other users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller ID information associated with the held call There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines Ifyou are active on a call you automatically get Caller ID information for that call However If you want to view Caller ID information for a second call without ending the active call or putting it on hold use Caller ID Inspect see Caller ID Inspect F17 on page 8 19 Ifyou are not active on a call you can press line buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines However keep in mind that if you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the display Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on Conference Calls If you receive a call routed to your extension by Direct Extension Dial a voice messaging system or automated attendant the Caller ID information is passed to your extension when you answer the call If you transfer a call the Caller ID information is passed to the destination extension If you send calls for Call Coverage the Caller ID information is not passed to the covering extension Coverage Call for XX appears instead so the user at the covering extension can identify the person for whom the call was originally intended Caller ID information is displayed if you Join a call however
466. ou program from a PARTNER telephone at extension 10 or 11 the button you press on the telephone at the programming extension may be in a different location on the telephone being programmed Figure 3 2 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER telephone For example the button labeled E on the PARTNER 34D telephone in Figure 3 2 is in the bottom row The equivalent button on the PARTNER 18D telephone is in the leftmost position of the second row from the bottom If your system has a mix of PARTNER and MLS telephones see Appendix D Programming Mixed Telephone Types for information about programming from a PARTNER to an MLS telephone or from an MLS to a PARTNER telephone Figure 3 2 Button Locations on PARTNER Telephones PARTNER 34D Phone n O ja n n a n SLM ja n n Oo ja n Intercom Intercom m a n Q H m 3 ja jul m m ja n n n n n n n n n n n nmn a n a n n n oN O 5 B a Gi 8040 go 8 CCK BOL AQ SEO ace B SCE ECE ja n 0 Message PARTNER 18D 18 Phone oo og ug un Mm Uu m HH 2z W oo nog oo un O O NO m oo oO oo oo o m rmm oo na na no n n n Intercom s Intercom m a Vessage Using Syst
467. ou wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions on page 3 16 Swapping Extensions If a user changes location but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plugs from those extension jacks in the control unit Then reconnect the plug from 32 into extension jack 29 and the plug from 29 into extension jack 32 Now the users can take their respective telephones to their new locations keep the same extension numbers and retain the telephones programmed settings Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 18 Troubleshooting 1 1 Contents Esci poo Sees esac RNC UTILE S E 11 1 Customer Self Service Center Bn iio JP BOE uade CE e CP UICE C CP ERR FOR REC OR PRIOR RR EC RH DR 11 1 When You Need Help oid be RE RERERHI RRRR ES ERREUR REO AREE RE di 11 2 a System Release Status F59 P 11 2 Power Failure COSO 4a de ecd quce EUER Rd ee IER RAI PCR aia i 11 2 A S o1 8439 30 1 e ACC ACCIPI CI EPA CREER BH ER 11 3 Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm llle 11 4 012E Module Power Management isses axis ais sas VIA System Telephone Problems essi uh o Re barrios e tr 11 5 a System Telephone Does Not Ring 0 0 0 eee ees 11 5 a System Telephone Does Not Work 000
468. owing m f extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X m f extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the scanner to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the scanner to use to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the pools and outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension If the scanner has an auto answer feature turn it off o m B co Repeat Steps 1 5 for each additional scanner Credit Card Scanners 9 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment Doorphone Programming When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system telephone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls If you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them To use the doorphone functionality program the following features Doorphone Alert Extensions Doorphone Extension Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Use this feature to identify extensions that are signaled when a doorphone button is pressed Considerations m You cannot bridge two doorphones togeth
469. p What to do Exit the procedure and retry the manual backup after a few minutes Problems with Manual Backup 11 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system Restart the Backup Programming Manual 124 procedure Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try the backup again using the backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 m If the backup completes successfully the problem is solved m If the backup fails again try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Obtaining Products in the PARTNER Customer Support document to order a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy in System P
470. p for the operator If the operator cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings the auto attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Please hold for the operator or dial an extension number now This prevents calls from going unanswered Connect an auto attendant to any extension on the system Using an Auto Attendant Follow the instructions packaged with the auto attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode Programming To program the system for an auto attendant 1 2 ak wD Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines that you want the auto attendant to cover to extension X Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Use AA Extensions 607 to identify extension X as the auto attendant Set Transfer Return Extension 306 for extension X to extension 10 Set the auto attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the operator does not pick up a call the auto attendant does AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 This feature lets you identify extensions where auto attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display telephones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant This procedure applies only to auto attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of
471. p in it 10 Move the On Off switch to the On position Adding New Modules 10 8 11 12 13 14 15 Upgrading the System Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit m fa single light is out power down the control unit reseat the module and power up the control unit m f multiple lights are out power down the control unit reseat the leftmost module that has a light out and power up the control unit m fthe lights are still out call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide Make sure all modules are seated properly Position the carrier cover over the modules so that the openings on the top of the carrier cover align correctly with the tabs at the top of the installed 5 slot carrier and modules Rotate the carrier cover into position so that it aligns correctly with the thumb screw opening on the bottom of the carrier Tighten the thumb screw To ensure proper alignment and safe operation tighten the thumb screw securely Adding New Modules 10 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Replacing Modules Replacing system modules is similar to how you originally installed modules into the control unit The procedure varies slightly between the stand alone 2 slot carrier configuration and the 5 slot carrier configuration Replacing Modules in a Stand Alone or 2 Slot Carrier Configuration A CAUTION Be
472. p number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system telephone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G 8 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To manually transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 2 While on a call press rans Dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Using Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal on a Single Line Telephone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Do one of the following m To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension m To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start
473. pool m If you assign Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 that line is removed from all pools to which it was assigned Programming To change the assignment of lines to pools 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 2 0 7 Enter the first line to be programmed A display similar to the following appears Lines to Pools L08 2 Pool 880 Enter the desired value 1 5 m 1 No Pool m 2 Main Pool 880 all lines assigned the factory setting wv m 3 Pool881 m 4 Pool 882 m 5 Pool 883 To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Programming 4 54 Programming System Options Recall Timer Duration 107 Use this feature to change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the telephone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local telephone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations m You should change the factory setting only under two conditions
474. ports above 48 will not function with ETR or T R telephones because they are outside the PARTNER ACS dial plan m You can have only one T1 module or DSL module in a system System Capacity 1 6 Overview System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand The most basic system consists of a PARTNER ACS processor module which supports five lines and nine extensions Using these lines and extensions you can add optional devices and telephones to configure your System to meet your needs To expand the system to include more lines and extensions simply attach additional modules and a carrier to contain them The term control unit refers to the PARTNER ACS processor module and any other modules in the system Z warnine There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES Configurations You can install the PARTNER ACS system in one of three basic configurations all of which must be wall mounted m Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module This configuration does not use a carrier m 2 slot carrier which can hold the PARTNER ACS processor module and one other module m 5 slot carrier which can hold up to five modules including the PARTNER ACS processor module The processor module resides in the center slot In either carrier only one of the modules can be
475. r Using Hold on a Single Line Telephone Follow these instructions to place and retrieve a call on hold on a system telephone m To place a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone The call is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the telephone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call m Toretrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Lift the handset You are reconnected to the held call m To retrieve a call that a person at another extension placed on hold 1 Lift the handset 2 Atthe intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number m To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The first call is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move between the two calls Handling Calls 6 24 Using the Telephones Conference Calls You can set up conference calls by using the button on a system telephone or the switchhook on a single line telephone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties NOTE A single
476. r held call To program another extension Press Next Proceaure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps Distinctive Ringing Dial Q Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 2 Not Active Y Press Next ltem to program another extension Intercom Dial Tone Dial 3 0 9 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Regular Y 2 Machine Press Next Item to program another extension Display Language Dial OS Dial a system extension Dial 1 English Y 2 Spanish 3 French Press Next ltem to program another extension Automatic VMS Cover Dial AOOO Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension Automatic Extension Privacy Dial 0 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension External Hotline Dial Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension Abbreviated Ringing Dial Q Dial a system extension Dial 1 Active 1 ring Y 2 Not Active repeated ringing Press Next Item to program another extension System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 4 Voice Interrupt On Busy Dial HOO Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension System Flow Chart Extensions
477. r pool button m Immediate Ring on steady m Delayed Ring flashes slowly m No Ring flutters quickly Press the line or pool button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently selected line or pool also appears on the display 4 Continue programming or exit programming mode Line Ringing 5 6 Using the Telephones 6 Contents dir o RR TENE TEE TIL oa TI I IP 6 1 System Telephones rra dina dns T TTE 6 1 a Ne and IINE OB Loca eadera aeq oe AR IRA AA 6 1 ES ev CX TITO A PP TE 6 5 a Ringing PABSIPES as usua dre Baro dE EORR EE CR SEE Oed OE TR de dare anne 6 7 a TOMER ccs be cet TIT T IIT II T TNNT 6 7 a Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone o oooccccccocoo o 6 8 Single Line Telephones cive uacrewa REI 444405 4904 569 8001489 HOS ROR 6 10 a Ringing Patterns VR RA eS Ea piigi ida ss MENA a Dial PODES AAA 6 11 a Using the Switehhook auuouecheeedukhecerteb REC qe UE AERE ed a B ux 6 11 a Single Line Telephone Limitations nnana e aua rn ERREUR 6 12 a Feature Telephones econo RI EXRERCATRRILARERRERERRFARCATRRERRE RR 6 13 Display 64 hod ede bugs REI bud Te Cer ere Te Eds 6 14 peril AA 6 16 e kE l Enectceneonee ests sac oconecse coteseouers Levees ae 6 16 s AMI Cee be ooo EI ST So Ub E UE d bur eee ide eek aan 6 20 a Placing Calls on Hold Lee ui knee Rd RE RM EERPEPSET a 6 23 Conference Calls ME Rad re aded Manes Arba om 6 25 a
478. r this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the list number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Restriction 302 Use this feature to restrict an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on a specific line For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager s line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the manager s line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 23 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Considerations m For pooled extensions use Pool Access Restriction 315 to assign restrictions to all the lines assigned to a specific pool Pool Access Restriction overrides Line Access Restriction For individual lines on pooled extensions use Line Access Restriction m To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so the line cannot be accessed by Direct Line Pickup m If an extension s access to a li
479. ram another list entry 6 Not Active System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 6 System Flow Chart Groups Pickup Group Extension Dial Q Dial a group 1 4 Dial an extension 10 57 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press Next Item to program another extension Hunt Group Extensions Dial 2 5 0 5 Dial a group 1 6 7 for VMS 8 for fax detection R 3 0 Dial a system extension 10 57 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press Next Item to program another extension Calling Group Extensions Dial Q Dial a group 1 4 Dial an extension 10 57 Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press Next Item to program another extension Night Service Button Ur Dial 4 5 CO 3 Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y 3 Select button then press a f programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select VMS Hunt Delay Dial 5 0 6 Release 2 0 and earlier Dial 12Immediate Y 2 Delayed Release 3 0 and later Dial 1 Day 2 Night Dial line number Dial 0 6 2v Night Service Group Extensions Dial 0 Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Press Next Item to program another extens
480. rammable button with lights Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special Press TD functions see Special Dialing Functions Caller ID Name Display Auto Dial Numbers Outside and Inside Press a programmable button with lights Press a programmable button Press MO To program an outside number Dial the phone number up to 28 digits including special s Ara ig Cell Phone Connect functions see Special Dialing Functions Press a programmable button with lights To program an extension number Press Press Dial two digit originating extension number Dial plus two digit destination Personal Speed Dial the extension number to ring the extension or plus the extension number to voice signal the Dial Number Account Code Entry Press a programmable button Conference Drop Press Press a programmable button Press 0 6 Background Music Press a programmable button Press Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart Continued Contact Closure 1 Press Press a programmable button Press Contact Closure 2 Press a programmable button Press Direct Line Pickup Active Line Press a programmable button Press 6 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line P
481. ramming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 Problems with Automatic Backup 11 22 Troubleshooting Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a manual backup by using Backup Programming Manual 124 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You tried to do a manual backup by using Backup Programming Manual 124 but the Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object gently push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 11 1 on page 11 21 and try the procedure again You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause An automatic or manual backup was in progress at the time you requested a manual backu
482. rations m f you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine a voice messaging system or an auto attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension m Single line telephones and system telephones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension m f Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active m Automatic Extension Privacy applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used All Lines Busy Event 4 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use If the voice messaging system extension does not have Automatic Extension Privacy turned a on other users can bridge onto the call If a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system causing it to disconnect from the call This causes the screening extension to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party Programming To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 O 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the exten
483. rd 2 Play Press 7 A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a tone Begin recording your message Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 40 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Direct Extension Dial Features 7 14 8 Operator Features Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the playback procedure that follows m To exit the procedure hang up the handset To play back a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 Press the button Dial 8 9 2 A display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 The following display appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Do one of the following m To re record the message follow the instructions fro
484. rding their calls The first xx represents the number of the user s extension the second xx represents the number of the destination extension Wake Up Ca11 on the display of users receiving a wake up call Volume or display contrast level bars as volume or display contrast is adjusted Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Speed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed Using the Telephones At idle extensions 10 and 11 only specific messages appear on the top line of the display instead of the usual day date message in the following circumstances Users at these two extensions should notify the System Manager when such a message appears ChgBat W PowerOn Or ReplaceSysBat W Power On appears when processor module batteries need to be replaced The message may flicker on and off as the batteries near the low power threshold These batteries retain system programming settings during a power failure See Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 11 for instructions for replacing the batteries Backup Failure Alarm messages appear if an automatic backup is unsuccessful The message is displayed until you clear the alarm or until the next successful automatic backup or system restart See Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4
485. re Transfer return calls do not receive call coverage or voice mail coverage If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the Transfer Return Extension For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call Coverage if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 320 the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 320 before it transfer returns Programming To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension 1 2 3 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 3 O 6 at extension 10 or 11 Dial the number of the originating extension Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Programming 4 66 Programming System Options Transfer Return Rings 105 Use this feature which applies to all system extensions to define the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extensi
486. re 0 0 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press o0 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Recall F03 8 54 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Using Recall on a System Telephone To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line 1 Press the programmed button or Feature OQ 3 2 Enter the access code for the feature if required 3 To return to your original call press the programmed button or Feature O 3 again Using Recall on a Single Line Telephone To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature telephone that has one You hear intercom dial tone Press 0 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required 4 Toreturn to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature telephone again Recall F03 8 55 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Record a Call F24 Use this feature to record an active conversation in the PARTNER Messaging or PARTNER MAIL VS PMVS mailbox Record a Call F24 applies to systems that have a PARTNER Messaging system or a PMVS Release 5 0 or later system equipped with four ports or six ports and an MLS or PARTNER system telephone This feature is not a
487. reening must be programmed on a button with lights m This feature is not available at tip ring proprietary cordless or wireless telephones m This feature can be turned on only by pressing the programmed button It cannot be accessed by dialing the Call Screening feature access code m An incoming call can be screened at that extension only if the extension is the Line Coverage Extension for that line the call has been transferred to that extension the call is a DID call or the call is an intercom call to the extension m Ifthe user is currently on a line or intercom call Call Screening is ignored m After a call has been sent to the voice mail system you cannot use the Call Screening feature to screen that call Call Screening must be on before or while the call is ringing at the telephone m Users cannot create a conference call while screening a call m While a call is being screened dialpad button pushes are ignored m A user cannot enter program mode while screening a call m Dialable features that interrupt Call Screening are Last Number Redial F05 Station Lock F21 Personal Speed Dial F80 89 and System Speed Dial F600 699 m Programmed buttons that interrupt Call Screening are Do Not Disturb F01 Save Number Redial F04 Last Number Redial F05 and Station Lock F21 m If the voice messaging system extension does not have Automatic Extension Privacy 304 turned on other users can bridge onto the call If
488. ress a programmable button with lights Press Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Press 0 Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press 0 Group Calling Ring Page For ringing group Press a programmable button Press Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 For paging group Press a programmable button Press Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal For ringing the first available extension Press a programmable button Press Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 For voice signaling the first available extension Press a programmable button Press Dial a Hunt Group number 1 6 Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button Press 0 Station Unlock Press a programmable button Press Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press Dial a two digit extension number to ring extension or Dial X plus Touch Tone Enable Press a programmable button Press the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press 0 Dial optional two digit extension number VMS Cover Press a programmable button Press Message Light On Press a programmable button Press 0 9 Dial optional two digit extension number Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back s Press a programmable button with
489. riction is set to No Restriction or In Only m If an extension in a Hunt Group activates Remote Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group m If an extension has VMS Cover and Remote Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Remote Call Forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice messaging system m lfanextension has Call Coverage and Remote Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Remote Call Forwarding destination Remote Call Forwarding takes precedence m Remote Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park on page 8 14 m You cannot use Call Screening F25 for calls that are forwarded m You cannot forward calls to a System Speed Dial code m The PARTNER system will forward only calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lines Hold Disconnect Time 203 must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection m You can activate Remote Call Forwarding while the Station Lock F21 feature is enabled for your extension m If an Allowed Phone Number List 407 is assigned to the extension the destination telephone number must be included in that list m Ifa Disallowed Phone Number List 404 is assigned to the extension the destination telephone number must not be included in that list m The extension must have an available line to forward the call to an outside number m The PARTNER system uses the extension s Automatic Line Sele
490. rief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller f you hear ringing you have reached a single line telephone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series telephone or a busy system telephone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call and then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Joining Calls Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join a call on an outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Considerations You cannot join a call by pressing a pool button m You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension m You cannot join a call on an extension that has a Voice Interrupt On Busy call in progress m You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you j
491. robably also hears the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Askthe party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party Handling Calls 6 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously To answer a coverage call 1 If your telephone is a covering extension and it rings check your display to see if the ringing call is a coverage call Also if you have an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the green light next to the button flutters while the coverage call is ringing at your extension and it is the next ringing call you answer if you lift the handset Lift the handset You are connected to the coverage call The first coverage
492. rogramming Mode Possible Cause Changes were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do Try Backup Programming Manual 124 later when the system is idle or during nonbusiness hours Problems with Manual Backup 11 24 Troubleshooting Problems with System Restore Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a restore by using Restore Programming 125 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted a restore and the file was corrupted What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again with a different backup file Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You selected a file named AUTO or MAN for the restore The file is empty no backups have been stored in it yet What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again by using a backed up file Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode Possible
493. rogramming to program the features presented in this chapter You need a system display telephone for Centralized Telephone Programming NOTE If you have any 34 button telephones in the system you must use a 34 button display telephone to program since an 18 button telephone cannot be used to program a 34 button telephone Also if your system has both PARTNER and MLS telephones you should use a PARTNER display telephone at the programming extension Overview 5 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Required Telephone Programming For all telephones you should program these features m Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone selects a line or pool when the user picks up the handset If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number m Extension Name Display to assign a user s name to the extension Like Automatic Line Selection you must do this procedure immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display first change Automatic Line Selection press Central Tel Program redial the extension number and then use Extension Name Display m Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line or pool For single line telephones you must now also program
494. rt Use the following features to program the SMDR m SMDR Record Type m SMDR Top of Page m SMDR Output Format m SMDR Talk Time Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 40 Using Auxiliary Equipment SMDR Record Type 608 Use this feature to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Considerations m The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by System Date 101 and System Time 103 m The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m f Account Code Entry optional or forced is used to enter an account code for a call the account code prints on the call report If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List 409 only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report m Marked System Speed Dial numbers appear on the call report as F nnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code m f you use Caller ID SMDR reports include the telephone numbers of incoming calls m Call records for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID are reported only if SMDR Record Type 608 is set to 1 All Calls Programming To identify the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 6 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value appears m All Calls outgoing and incoming the factory
495. ry Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected Possible Cause You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do Nothing This is normal behavior after a restore the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours Problems with System Restore 11 26 Troubleshooting System Problems Call Rings Continuously When Answered No One at Other End Possible Cause Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is used on a system that does not support far end disconnect What to do Call your local telephone company and find out whether they support far end disconnect If the local telephone company does not support far end disconnect you should not set the Automatic System Answer Mode 121 to either Hold or Ring and you should not use Direct Extension Dial If the local telephone company supports far end disconnect but the problem still occurs call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Calls on Hold Are Disconnected Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a longer interval m If calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the longest interval call the helpline number list
496. s Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Use this feature to specify the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature Considerations This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Direct Extension Dial Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call m If you use Caller ID make sure Direct Extension Dial Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured m If you use Tl lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID that are not administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID in PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration set the number of rings to 1 ring or more Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 1 1 2 To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value appears Values range from 0 to 9 where 0 means the call is answered immediately The factory setting is 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Direct Extension Dial Features 7 13 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Use this feature to record and play back the message t
497. s m When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed m If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports m If an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call m Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints changed account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered For forced account code entry with a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code m f a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when entering or changing an account code by pressing after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you hear a denial tone m The Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device s documentat
498. s is required when users make long distance calls If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering telephone numbers in a list you must press Next Proceaure Prev Procedure since entering and a three digit code is considered part of the telephone number NsecurITY ALERT Ifyou are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user can avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers Programming To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 9 Ov 2 00 IN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AQ D 7 at extension 10 or 11 At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 At the Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following m To change the telephone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove m To add other telephone numbers to this list press and repeat S
499. s assigned to the hunt group are sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls do not go to the hunt group m When the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only and Night Service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on lines assigned to the hunt group are not sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls go to the hunt group Programming To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program AH 5 O 7 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the line number The current setting is displayed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Always the factory setting v m 2 DayOnly m 3 Night Only To set VMS Hunt Schedule for another line press Next item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Messaging Systems 9 48 Upgrading the System 1 0 Contents CNA aussi caro dao poa doi oa 10 1 Battery Replacement exis Kidd iria vere TT amp 101 BR uti o MMC T E 10 2 Upgrading T1 e sri pace dud AE ERE OR ROC OO oo Re Far n ie e 10 5 Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Module Firmware ills 10 6 teg Me LEDS nm 10 6 Adding New Modules 4434 1 RP FOR RU dr d dE ole eo d RP Cep 10 7 Piet ENTERS dee ee iD o r E R 10
500. s dialog box appears Enter the name for the file and click the Save button 5 Verify that the PARTNER system has a T1 module a In the PARTNER ACS System window click on System The System Components window appears Click the General Parameters button The General Parameters window appears From the System Mode box in the System Identification area verify that Loop Start Lines and a T1 module is selected 6 Configure the settings for the T1 module a In the PARTNER ACS System window click on System The System Components window appears Click the T1 Parameters button The T1 Parameters window appears From the Clock Type box set whether the T1 service provider Loop or the PARTNER T1 module Local will provide the clock source From the CSU Activation box set whether the PARTNER T1 module will provide CSU functionality From the Framing Type box set the framing type From the Line Encoding box set the line encoding From the Transmit Line Build Out box set the transmit line build out parameter to match the signal level and the transmission line This setting is enabled only when CSU Activation is set to Enabled From the Line Equalization Transmission Length box set the line equalization length to match the signal level and the transmission line This setting is enabled only when CSU Activation is set to Disabled 7 Administer the settings for each line channel you will use on the T1 module
501. s installed and to the left of all 400 and 200 modules In Release 7 0 the system extension maximum is 48 However in some configurations the 012E module and or the PARTNER Messaging module will physically permit more than 48 stations to be installed in the 5 slot carrier In these configurations only station ports and voice messaging ports up to 48 will function Station ports and voice messaging ports above 48 will not function with ETR or T R telephones because they are outside the PARTNER ACS dial plan A CAUTION Do not force the module Use the carrier shelf as a reference and do not tilt slant or rotate the module If the module does not insert easily remove it clear any obstruction and reinsert it Labeling Jacks After you have mounted the control unit on the wall you must label the line and extension jacks The line jacks are on the top of the modules and the extension jacks on the bottom see Figure 2 11 Installing the Control Unit 2 9 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Figure 2 11 Labeling Jacks Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 308EC 1600DSL 308EC Processor 2308EC Module Module Module Module Module Module Modules H a Line Line Jacks Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks
502. s the Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 feature activated When you use Voice Interrupt On Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your system telephone has a sensitive sound activated switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines m Avoid placing your telephone in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans m Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through m Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your telephone system m When talking always face your telephone and stay within two feet of it m Place your telephone at least six inches 15 cm
503. scce cs dees rra RR RIRE gee RR EE 4 41 RC i0 o or o PDT 4 41 Ears sur ME ECT TETTE PER TE 4 41 Hold Reminder Tone 127 E iita dd V ed sian 442 s CISION Li oq o4 RI ER AFERRA TEREE ORDER GE OEE RR 4 42 ra ls vos rr AAN AA oi ee 4 42 zl i cocineros cards urinaria ae 4 43 Ne AAA Kc 1 eek PERRO ETERS eed bene 4 43 ee Wiis ee ee ee ee ee err ee eer eee er 4 44 intercom Dial Tone 3 5c PET al dee 4 44 E arc oru A EPOR rcr prc 4 44 Line Access Mode 313 pesema EA o 4 45 s DONE cre xq cr RAEE ARA 4 45 eek Wills ads ir 21 5 102 0 27 117 1 15 2 AAA 4 45 Ling Assignment 901 460256248266 o RR SACR ea EO E eRe HA 4 46 Pee carr AR errs er ve AAA RC RR 4 47 x IOSEPH rra Tea ri 4 47 Ling Coverage Extension 208 cocinar ia Edu Sa dm erbe dc ehe 4 48 Contents I A A tC Ld FPES p uer Me PTT 2 4 48 a Fron AA 4 49 Outside Conference Denial 109 00 2 cece ee 4 49 a Considerations dd desqes xui adiu iUd dad b ded 4 49 a PrO MN acd dodo Ee CORR KS IC EAE OD Po Ron CECI EROR tee eee id 4 49 acc aie np P X CETT TT TI TT I I T III 4 50 Mode of Operation 198 A ed cadis d 4 50 a Pool Access Restriction 315 cooorsrasarrin aerea ear 4 50 a Pool Extension Assignment 2 314 llli eee eee 4 52 a Pool Line Assignment EPI air Fr RPREdRER ERE RE SER pu 4 54 Recall Timer Duration 107
504. se SSS IM D DEC e Y Initial System Programming Overview After you install the system hardware you must program basic system settings assign lines and customize extensions To do this you must understand the basics of programming Programming a PARTNER System You can program a PARTNER system in either of the following ways m from aPC running PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software PC Administration m from a system display telephone at extension 10 or extension 11 Set Administration PC Administration The PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software enables you to program and administer all features for a PARTNER system from a local that is on site or remote PC Using this application you can m program features to the PARTNER system m set the date and time on the PARTNER system m Copy buttons from one set to another m back up the programming translations from the PARTNER system to the PC card or the internal flash memory in the PARTNER system m retrieve a copy of the translation from the PC card or the internal flash memory in the PARTNER system to your PC m print the system programming information to a text file m retrieve and view diagnostic information from the PARTNER system m administer the DSL module m administer the T1 module Overview 3 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m administer the Direct Inward Dialing DID ser
505. se box or call an electrician m Ifthe appliance works call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Multiple Telephones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit m Ifthe LED lights the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover System Problems 11 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 2 The green LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out m If the LEDs light the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard central office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the line quality m If the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remai
506. sentative who takes telephone orders could find a number in the log for a caller whose credit card information was later determined to be invalid Considerations m Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log Answered Calls is set to active Programming To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program 3 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Active answered calls logged m 2 Not active answered calls are not logged the factory setting v 4 To set Call ID Log Answered Calls for another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programming 4 12 Programming System Options Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Use this feature to associate lines with extensions for the purposes of logging unanswered Caller ID calls You can associate multiple lines with an extension and multiple extensions with the same line Caller ID calls can be logged only if they ring on an extension that is associated with a line that has been programmed for Call Logging NOTE Caller ID Call Log Line Association is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telepho
507. services For example in some areas you can dial G9 6 7 to prevent Caller ID information from being sent to the called party Rotary telephones use 11 in place of the 3 Star Code Dial Delay is designed to help prevent misdialing when star codes are used For information about the star codes that your central office supports contact your local telephone company If Star Code Dial Delay is Not Active the system uses the normal processing of restricted numbers it checks digit by digit to see whether the number is restricted If the first digit dialed is a and is not restricted the call goes through without further checking since it can no longer match any number on the list If Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system permits the following star codes m 2 digit codes where the first digit is 0 1 or 4 9 and the second digit is 0 9 for example X 6 2 HOO m 3 digit codes where the first digit is 2 or 3 the second digit is 0 9 and the third digit is 0 9 for example VAQO When Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system checks the first two digits dialed If the first digit is a Y or the first two digits are 11 the system checks whether the following two or three digits are a star code If the digits are a recognized star code the system resets dialing restrictions after accepting the star code digits The digits that follow the star code are compared again to the restrictions More than one star code can be dialed
508. side lines as in Key mode However you also can create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When you access a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Since multiple lines are associated with the pool you do not know which line within the pool is being used to make the call System mode is determined by administered information The system is factory set for Key mode Changing to Hybrid mode requires a system programming change modifying the processor module For more information about programming the mode of operation see Mode of Operation 198 on page 4 50 The mode for your system should be decided before installation Changing the system mode after the system is installed and configured requires significant administration changes to the system programming In Key mode no outside lines can be pooled and in Hybrid mode lines can be pooled and individual lines can be assigned directly to line buttons Features 1 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Key Mode When the system operates in Key mode individual outside lines are assigned to users extensions for making and receiving calls At extensions with system telephones each individual line Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 etc assigned to the extension is represented by its own line button You can press any of the available line buttons on a system telephone to make outside calls Single li
509. sign pools to a pooled extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 3 1 4 Enter the system extension number to be programmed There is a steady red light next to each button that has a line assigned and a flashing red light next to each button that has a pool assigned To remove all existing pool assignments press before selecting a pool Enter the desired pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 For example to select pool 881 press OOOD Do one of the following m f you want to assign the pool to the first available button with lights press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 1 Assigned m f you want to remove a pool assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 2 Not Assigned m For auxiliary pools only if you want to assign the pool to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the auxiliary pool to that button If you use option 3 after an auxiliary pool has been assigned the auxiliary pool moves from the old button to the new button you select Do one of the following m To assign another pool for this extension press Next ltem or Prev item until the pool access code appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension
510. signed Y pa d al a system line Press to program another line Did 1 d l 2 8 System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Extensions Line Assignment Dial Q Dial a system extension To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line Dial a line number Dial 1 Assigned Y 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programable button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select Press to program another line for this extension To program another extension Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension and repeat above steps Transfer Return Extension Dial 3 0 6 Dial a system extension Dial of extension 10 57 to which call should return if not answered Extension transferring call Y Press Next Item to program another extension Forced Account Code Entry Dial MOOD Dial a system extension Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Press Next Item to program another extension Line Access Restriction Dial 0 2 Dial a system extension Dial a system line Dial 12No Restriction Y 2 0utgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access line appears on button but you can use line only to pick up a transferred o
511. signed as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 5 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Fax Line Saver If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line place the machine on its own extension see Figure 9 9 With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine Figure 9 9 Fax Line Saver PARTNER ACS When you answer a call and hear a fax machine signaling on the other end transfer the call to the fax machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line is automatically selected Fax Machines 9 20 Using Auxiliary Equipment Programming To program a fax line saver setup T Do one of the following m f extension X is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X m If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the fax machine to use to extension X Also use Line Assignme
512. signment 314 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing Programming To change the Line Access Mode setting for a specific extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 3 1 3 Enter the desired extension number For example to program extension 18 press 1 8 Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Pooled When this is chosen the factory setting is all extensions except 10 m 2 Key When this is chosen the factory setting is extension 10 only Line Access Mode 313 4 45 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all extensions that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Assignment 301 Use this feature to assign the outside lines that are available at an extension If Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 is not assigned the default order of line assignment to the buttons on a System telephone is from left to right starting in the bottom left corner see Figure 4 1 below If Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 is assigned within the number of lines it is skipped or replaced depending on the order in which you performed Number of Lines 104 and Loudspeaker Paging Line 617 To put
513. sing a system telephone or a single line telephone Answering a Call on a System Telephone You can answer a call on any line or pool that is ringing or select a specific line or pool if more than one is ringing When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line or pool is ringing you are connected to the line or pool that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display telephone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appear on your display until you pick up the handset or press Sekr To answer a call on a specific line pool or button 1 Press line pool or button for the line you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press pk You are connected to the call To answer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hold The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 Toreturn to the first call put the second call on hold then press line pool or button for the first call To answer a voice signaled call your telephone beeps and you hear the caller s voice Ifthe microphone is on you can speak after the beep f the microphone is not on press vic rrai or lift the handset To respond to a Voice Interrupt On Busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking p
514. sion can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for Call Coverage can have only one covering extension Only one Call Coverage button can be programmed per extension m If you activate Call Coverage at your extension you still can intercept an outside call routed for coverage by pressing the outside line button that has the call appearance Call Coverage F20 XX XX 8 8 Programming amp Using Telephone Features You can program Call Coverage on a button on a system telephone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off Call Coverage is not active If the Call Coverage feature code and optional originating and covering extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Coverage on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Coverage is on even if calls are covered by a different extension from the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Coverage off If Call Coverage and Do Not Disturb are active covered calls are routed immediately to the covering extension without ringing the covered extension You can turn on Call Coverage while a call is ringing to send a call immediately for coverage Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call immediately
515. sion to be programmed 3 Press until the appropriate value displays m 1 Assigned m 2 Not Assigned the factory setting v 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Backup and Restore You should back up the system programming periodically especially if you are changing the processor module or upgrading the system or before and after any major programming changes You can back up your system programming to either the internal memory of the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor or a Backup Restore PC Card You can back up the programming automatically or manually Occasionally you may have to restore programming from the backed up file The system may automatically restore a backup translation image if the system detects that the battery backed up translation image is corrupted NOTES If you make any changes to the system programming PARTNER ACS R7 0 will automatically back up the system programming to the internal memory of the processor at 3 A M the next morning m PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system and perform backup and restore functions remotely or locally with a PC Considerations Whenever you change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic from Not Active to Active Internal or Active PC Card a backup occurs a
516. sor 308EC or R3 0 or later 206 module If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Other Telephone Problems Trouble Making Outside Calls Trouble making outside calls can be one of the following situations m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone which cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring m You hear a busy signal as you dial m You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code m If you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m If you can make a call the problem is solved m Ifthe Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Other Telephone Problems 11 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the extension What to do f calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for the extension m f someone changed the
517. ss Feature C 2 Press a programmable button 3 Press Feature 0 6 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Conference Drop on a System Telephone Press the programmed button or Feature C 6 The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Using Conference Drop on a Single Line Telephone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference Conference Drop F06 8 31 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Contact Closure F41 and F42 The system can drive an optional Contact Closure Adjunct with two Contact Closures to operate auxiliary devices such as electronic door locks If the System Administrator has assigned your extension to a Contact Closure Group for one or both of these Contact Closures you can activate the Contact Closure from your telephone This way you can open an electric door lock or activate other electronic devices by entering the feature code or pressing the programmed Contact Closure button Considerations Program and or on buttons with lights so you can monitor the status of the Contact Closures The button s green light lights when the Contact Closure is activated by you and the red light lights when the Contact Closure is activated by another user in that Contact Closure Group The light turns off when the Contact Closure is deactivated Befor
518. ss O to exit programming mode i Dial the System Speed Dial number s code 600 699 System Flow Chart Lines Dial Mode Group Call Distribution Dil MOOD Dial 2 0 6 Dial a system line number Dial a group number 1 6 7 for VMS Dial 1 Touch Tone Y Dial a system line 2 Rotary Dial 1 Assigned Press to program another line 2 Not Assigned Y 3 VMS Line Cover only for Hunt Group 7 Press to program another line Hold Disconnect Time Dial 4 2 0 3 Dial Z 0 a Press to program another line BH m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m mmm mmu Dial a system line a Pool Line Assignment Dial 00 No Detection ne E 01 50 msec 02 100 msec 03 150 msec y Dial MOOD i 04 200 msec 05 250 msec 06 300 msec a Dial a system line E 07 350 msec 08 400 msec 09 450 msec Y 1 Dial 1 No Pool 102500 msec 112550 msec 122600 msec u 2 Main Pool 880 v E Press to program another line 3 Pool 881 n 4 Pool 882 rj L Automatic System Answer Lines 5 Pool 883 L a Dial a system line Line Coverage Extension Dial 1 Assigned Dial Ow EMO Assigned we Dial a system line then a system extension Press to program another line No line owned by an extension Press to program another line Direct Extension Dial Lines Press to unassign ownership Dial 2 0 5 Dial a system line Dial 1 Assigned Unique Line Ringing 2 Not As
519. ss a programmable button Press Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button Press Intercom X 7 Direct Line Pickup Active Line Press a programmable button Press 6 Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button Press 0 Station Lock Press Press a programmable button LU Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Press a programmable button with lights Press Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Press O Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press Dial a two digit extension number to ring extension or Dial plus the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension Station Unlock Press Press a programmable button Touch Tone Enable Press 0 Press a programmable button Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press 0 Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press 0 Dial optional two digit extension number VMS Cover Press Press a programmable button Group Calling Ring Page For ringing group Press a programmable button Press Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 For paging group Press a programmable button Press Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Message Light On Press a programmable button Press OJO Dial optional two digit ext
520. stem Program System Program amp 4 1 O at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed Press the number on the dialpad for the setting you want or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting appears m 0 0 Second Delay the factory setting wv m 1 1 Second Delay m 2 2 Seconds Delay m 3 3 Seconds Delay m 4 4 Seconds Delay m 5 5 Seconds Delay m 6 Not Active To return to the default setting press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Password 403 Use this feature to define a four digit password that users can enter from PARTNER and MLS telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Considerations m This feature is available only on PARTNER and MLS telephones m The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 m Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation System Password 403 4 61 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming a
521. steps Caller ID Log All Calls Dial GP 3 1 9 Dial a system extension Call Coverage Rings Dial AOAO Dial one digit 1 9 for the of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension 2 rings Y VMS Cover Rings Dial MOOD Dial one digit 1 9 for the of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging 3 rings Y Remote Call Forwarding Dial Dial 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Copy Settings Dial 4 3 9 9 Dial a source extension Dial target extension s Flow Charts System Programming Flow Chart How to Use E 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use System Flow Chart Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Outgoing Call Restriction Allowed Phone Number Lists Dial 4 O C7 Dial MOOD Dial a system extension Dial a list 1 8 Dial 1 No Restriction Y Dial a list entry 01 10 2 Inside Only intercom To add entry 3 Local Only intercom and local Dial the telephone up to 12 digits Press Next Item to program another extension Press Press to remove a list entry tell Sel PIX Press to program another list entry Dial To program another list Dial 1 0 1 plus Area Code and v Press Next Procedure Prev Procedure to enter 2 Area Code and only a new list 8 repeat above steps System Password Dial 4 0 3 Dial four digits to set
522. t a single line telephone to the first extension on each 206 module users can place and answer outside calls on the first line of each 206 module You can connect single line telephones in combination with system telephones at power failure extensions or you can simply keep spare single line telephones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure To use a system feature press in place of used on system telephones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use on system telephones dial only the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone To use a Speed Dial number press followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone If Call Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a single line telephone connected the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook on a single line telephone to place calls on hold park a call transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call If the single line telephone has a message light use it to notify users of messages If you have a voice messaging system the light indicates that a message has been left in your mailbox On a single line telephone the message light flashes when the telephone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Single Line Telephones
523. t have the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program the system from a PC See your Avaya representative or authorized dealer Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected and an automatic backup was attempted What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 11 1 You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Figure 11 1 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore PC Card P Slide the switch on the PC card up to the nonprotected position n Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 11 4 Problems with Automatic Backup 11 21 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it w
524. t the next occurrence of 2 00 a m After that backups are done at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month until you change the setting back to Not Active Backup and Restore 4 4 Programming System Options m Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however you can use either slot If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup to a PC Card begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored m The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups to a PC Card since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the INTERNAL AUTO mmdgyy file or PC CARD AUTO mmdgyy file only and a manual backup replaces the INTERNAL MAN mmddyy file or PC CARD MAN mmddyy file only m Verify that the System Date 101 and System Time 103 are set correctly These settings are not backed up m Calls continue to be handled normally during an automatic or manual backup m The configuration of the 1600 DSL module is not backed up to the PARTNER ACS R7 0 processor or a PCMCIA card Instead the configuration is retained in the flash memory of the 1600 DSL module Upon a system cold start the configuration retained in the flash memory becomes the active configuration of the 1600 DSL module Backup Programming Automatic 123 Use this feature to set up the automatic backup of all programming except the system date and time When Backup Programming
525. telephone to PARTNER telephones In these situations be aware that the button that you press at extension 10 or 11 the programming extension is likely to be in a different location than the button on the telephone to which the programming applies the target telephone If you are programming from a PARTNER 18D or MLS 18D telephone the button locations are the same You can use the illustrations in this appendix to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other Figure D 1 shows the buttons on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS telephone Figure D 2 shows the buttons on the MLS 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER telephone The letters on the PARTNER 34D Overlay in Figure D 1 are printed on the Overlay To help you program from an MLS 34D telephone you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS 34D Overlay in Figure D 2 on your overlay If you want to program features on specific buttons at target telephones you should 1 Lookatthe figure with the overlay that matches the telephone at your programming extension 2 Find the location of the button in the picture of the target telephone 3 Note the letter associated with that particular button 4 Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay 5 Press that button on the programming extension For example if you are using a PARTNER 34D telephone at extension 10
526. tem Administrator how to use the system telephones and single line telephones including the handling of calls Chapter 7 Operator Features explains the programming and use of features specific to the operator positions at extensions 10 and 11 This chapter is intended for the System Administrator and the operators Chapter 8 Programming amp Using Telephone Features describes the programming and use of features available to any user on the system Chapter 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment intended primarily for technicians and the System Administrator describes typical equipment that is supported by the PARTNER ACS including voice messaging systems Chapter 10 Upgrading the System explains how the system software and hardware can be upgraded as new modules and releases become available This chapter is intended for technicians and the System Administrator Chapter 11 Troubleshooting intended for both technicians and the System Administrator describes possible problems with the system and the solutions to these problems This book also contains five appendices Appendix A Cross Reference of Features contains a table cross referencing the most commonly used features and tables of feature codes arranged numerically Appendix B Special Characters describes the unique characters entered via the dialpad into strings of dialed numbers Appendix C Speed Dial Form contains a form for users to enter both Personal and System
527. tension Dial Delay 7 13 Direct Extension Dial features 7 10 IN 4 Direct Facility Termination see Line Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 27 Direct Line Pickup active line 8 33 Direct Line Pickup features 8 33 Direct Line Pickup Active Line using single line telephone 8 34 system telephone 8 34 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line 8 35 using single line telephone 8 36 system telephone 8 35 Direct Programming Method 3 7 Disallowed List Assignments 405 4 23 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 4 20 Display 6 14 assigning aname to 5 4 8 38 extension name 6 15 display extension name 8 38 showing low power 11 7 Display Language 3 16 4 29 Display Language 303 4 29 display on the telephone 6 2 Display Phone for programming 3 3 3 8 5 1 Distinctive Ring 4 30 Distinctive Ring 308 4 30 Do Not Disturb 8 36 description 8 36 using 8 37 doorphone programming 9 15 Doorphone Alert Extensions 9 15 Doorphone Extension 9 16 Doorphones doorphone alert extensions 606 9 15 doorphone extensions 604 605 9 16 programming for 9 15 9 16 Dropping Parties from a Conference Call 6 25 Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters 9 2 Emergency Phone Number List 3 18 Endeavor 362EC module 2 9 10 8 10 14 Endeavor telephones 1 12 environmental requirements 2 2 Exclusive Hold 8 37 using 8 38 Extension copying settings 3 17 4 17 customizing an 3 16 jacks 3 3 programming 3 16 programming from 3
528. tension Privacy 608 SMDR Record Type 305 Abbreviated Ringing 609 SMDR Top of Page 306 Transfer Return Extension 610 SMDR Output Format 307 Forced Account Code Entry 31611 SMDR Talk Time 308 Distinctive Ring 612 Contact Closure Group 309 Intercom Dial Tone 613 Contact Closure Operation Type 310 Automatic VMS Cover 614 Music On Hold Volume 311 External Hotline 617 Loudspeaker Paging Line 312 Voice Interrupt on Busy 728 System Reset Programming Saved 313 Line Access Mode 730 Remote Administration Password A 2 Table A 2 Dial Code Features Cross Reference of Features Dial Code Feature Dial Code Feature F01 Do Not Disturb F15 VMS Cover F02 Exclusive Hold F16 Caller ID Name Display FO3 Recall F17 Caller ID Inspect F04 Save Number Redial F18 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F05 Last Number Redial F19 Background Music FO6 Conference Drop F20 XX XX Call Coverage F07 Privacy F21 Station Lock F08 Touch Tone Enable F22 Station Unlock F09XX Message Light On F23 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F10XX Message Light Off F24 Record a Call F11 XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F25 Call Screening F11 XX PP Cell Phone Connect F11 XX PP Remote Call Forwarding F12 Account Code Entry F41 Contact Closure 1 F13XX Manual Signaling beep or ring F42 Contact Closure 2 F13 XX Manual Signaling voice signal F59 System Release Status F14 Voice Mailbox Transfer 1 These features
529. teps 4 and 5 m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 Select another procedure by using Next Procedure Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 4 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Allowed List Assignments 408 Use this feature to assign up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists to a specific extension You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Programming To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 8 Boom To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to extension m 2 Not Assigned to extension the factory setting v 5 Doone ofthe following m To assign or unassign another list to this extension press until the list number appears on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may
530. teway configuration 2 29 2 slot carrier wall mounting 2 5 5 slot carrier 2 8 wall mounting 2 8 A AA Automated Attendant Extensions 9 8 Abbreviated Ringing 4 2 Abbreviated Ringing amp 305 4 2 Account Code Entry 8 2 using 8 3 account codes 4 33 Forced Account Code Entry 4 33 list of entries 4 34 alarms clearing a Backup Failure alarm 11 4 alerts 9 1 All Lines Busy Event 4 3 Allowed List Assignments 4 20 Allowed List Assignments 408 8 4 Allowed Phone Number Lists 4 18 assigning to an extension 4 20 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 4 18 Amplified Handset 9 2 Answering a Call at your extension 6 20 identifying a call type by ringing pattern 6 7 11 ringing at another extension 8 15 8 45 answering a call on a single line telephone 6 22 answering a call on a system telephone 6 21 answering calls A 4 answering machine personal 9 6 retrieving messages 9 5 9 7 system 9 5 Answering Machines 9 4 9 7 assigning lines 3 12 Attendants Automated 9 8 Auto Answer Intercom see Hands Free Answer on Intercom Auto Attendant 9 8 Auto Attendant Extensions 4 3 Auto Dial Buttons description 7 2 programming 8 5 8 6 using 6 13 8 6 Auto Dial Numbers 8 5 Auto Dialing 8 5 using 8 6 Autodialers Intercom 8 5 description 1 12 7 3 problems 11 8 Automated Attendant extensions 9 8 Automated Attendants see Auto Attendant Automatic Backup problems 11 21 Backup Failed Check Card 11
531. than one Calling Group In addition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this helps in making paging announcements to all employees m Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline telephones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline telephones to a Calling Group m Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the system telephones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging I 70 on page 8 51 m You cannot assign a coverage path for a calling group that has T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Programming To create a Calling Group 1 Press Feature 0 C System Program System Program A QOQA at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 2 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 4 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Assigned to group m 2 Not Assigned to group the factory setting v 5 Doone ofthe following m To program another extension press Next item or Prev tem until the extension number appears on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode
532. the extension is unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off m Ifthe code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the extension the extension remains locked On a button with lights the green light remains on steady Repeat the unlocking procedure Using Station Lock on a Single Line Telephone To lock a single line touch tone telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HOOD You hear intercom dial tone again Enter a four digit code by using digits 0 9 You hear intercom dial tone again Re enter the four digit code m If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3 you hear silence The extension is locked m If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3 you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked Repeat the locking procedure Station Lock F21 8 69 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use To unlock a single line touch tone telephone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press HOO You hear intercom dial tone again Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension m Ifthe code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension you hear silence and the extension is unlocked m Ifthe code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the extension you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked Rep
533. the number of the originating extension m Press Feature 1 1 the number of the originating extension CX and the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Cell Phone Connect on a System Telephone To forward calls manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial and the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside telephone number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Cell Phone Connect manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension X and a Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 were programmed on the button Cell Phone Connect is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination telephone number was programmed dial x and the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 that contains the destination outside number at which you want the calls to ring Cell Phone Connect is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Cell Phone Connect F11 8 29 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming a
534. the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call When Voice Interrupt On Busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably can hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the operator to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call The System Administrator programs Voice Interrupt On Busy to identify extensions that can receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls You can use Voice Interrupt On Busy only from a system telephone Considerations m The Voice Interrupt On Busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep m Ifa Voice Interrupt On Busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead m If you receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call and press Hola the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call Do one of the following To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a Voice Interrupt On Busy call has ended To resume your conversation with the t
535. ting is too long What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a shorter interval m f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect or if the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the shortest interval go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local telephone company does not send a hold release signal What to do Call your local telephone company and find out whether they send a hold release signal If the local telephone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover All Calls Disconnected Possible Cause 1 You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do This is normal behavior after running Restore Programming 125 the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours If you did not run Restore Programming 125 go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Power was interrupted to the control unit What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the on position O if you have a five slot carrier m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the
536. to answer the call Program an Auto Dial button see page 8 5 for the VMS Hunt Group left intercom MM on phones for one touch dialing to the messaging system Use Group Call Distribution 206 option 1 see page 4 38 to assign outside lines that require Automated Attendant Service to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group If Automated Attendant Service will be used at night make sure a Night Service Button 503 see page 7 15 is assigned at extension 10 Assign appropriate Outgoing Call Restrictions 401 see page 4 25 as well as Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 see page 4 18 or Disallowed Phone Numbers Lists 404 see page 4 20 to voice messaging extensions Additional Voice Messaging System Programming Following are additional features used to program the communication system for a voice messaging system The procedures to program these tasks are provided below Program Automatic VMS Cover 310 to automatically route an extension s unanswered calls to the voice messaging system s Call Answer Service after a specified number of rings so the caller can leave a message Program VMS Cover Rings 321 individually for subscriber extensions to determine how many times the extension should ring before the call is sent to the messaging system to be answered If Automated Attendant Service will be used set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 to meet your business s needs If Automated Attendant Service will be used set the VMS Hunt
537. to Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information Table 6 2 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment System Telephones 6 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Table 6 2 Light Patterns on System Telephones Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Button Steady On Off steady off Flash long on long off Alternating Red Green Flash Wink long on short off Line is in use m Green means you are using the line m Red means someone at another extension is using the line Line is idle A call is ringing on the line m Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension m Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected in a conference call Also for Call Screening and Record a Call A call on the line is either on hold or parked m Green wink means the call is on hold or parked at your extension m Red wink means the call is on hold or parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Green wink means the call is either on hold or parked at your extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Green means feature is on F
538. to a pool for outgoing calls you can customize dialing restrictions for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 m To restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making calls on individual lines you must use Line Access Restriction 302 m Caller ID information does not appear for ringing calls on lines belonging to a pool programmed for Out Only or for No Access Programming To restrict an extension from making or receiving calls on all the lines in a specific pool 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 1 5 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed A display similar to the following appears Pool Access Rstr 23 Pool Enter the pool number 880 881 882 or 883 to be restricted at this extension The current restriction is displayed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 No Restriction calls permitted on all lines in that pool the factory setting v m 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on lines in that pool m 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on lines in that pool m 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can receive transferred calls on lines in that pool Do one of the following m To restrict another pool at this extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the pool number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4
539. to insert the batteries 1 4 Locate the battery compartment at the bottom of the PARTNER ACS processor module below the extension jacks Push gently on the battery icon the locking latch and slide the battery icon up to cover the plus icon this unlocks the battery assembly see Figure 2 13 Remove the battery assembly by gently pulling the tab at the bottom of the battery compartment cover Insert two new AAA size standard alkaline batteries into the metal battery clips by pushing them straight in placing the negative end of one battery into the bottom clip and the positive end of the other battery into the top clip see Figure 2 14 Installing the Control Unit 2 12 Figure 2 13 Locked and Unlocked Positions Locked Position Unlocked Position Figure 2 14 Inserting the Batteries Push to insert Installation 5 With the locking latch in the unlocked position zu battery icon and minus icon visible slide the Figure i ee nee battery assembly into the processor module occiso Module along the battery guides on the inside of the battery compartment see Figure 2 15 Push the battery assembly in far enough that the edges of the assembly slip behind the plastic housing of the processor module Locking Latch 6 Pressing lightly on the battery icon on the front of the battery assembly slide the locking latch
540. tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press Intercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone Every PARTNER and MLS system telephone except the MLS 6 telephone has a speaker and a microphone which you can turn on by pressing ekr In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing Vic rFA When the green light next to Mic AFAN is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset you can use the speaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone m To make a call without lifting the handset press to get a dial tone then dial the number you hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset m If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the speaker and microphone by pressing and hanging up the handset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset the speaker and microphone turn off m Toturn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press Mic HFA This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your telephone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your telephone s spea
541. tor when they see this message You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the message NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshold A CAUTION Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming revert to the factory settings If you have a Backup Restore PC Card do a backup before changing the batteries NOTE PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions Overview 10 1 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries See Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 11 Using a PC Card Follow these steps to upgrade your system s software with a PC card NOTE A firmware upgrade can be performed on the 1600 DSL module by using a Backup Restore PC Card that is configured for the firmware upgrade See Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Module Firmware on page 10 6 for more information A firmware upgrade can be performed on the 012E module by using a Backup Restore PC Card that is configured for the firmware upgrade See Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Mod
542. tory setting f m If you want to remove a line assignment press until a display like the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 2 Not Assigned Line Assignment 301 4 47 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 6 m If you want to assign the line to a specific button press 3 A display like the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line already has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select Do one of the following m To program another line for this extension press Next item or Prev item until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 5 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 7 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Coverage Extension 208 Use this feature to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for that line Considerations m This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system m Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be owned by the same extension m This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice messaging system for Call Answer Service m T
543. tory setting v 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 9 43 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Voice Messaging Systems Four voice messaging systems are compatible with your system m PARTNER Messaging resides in the control unit in a 2 4 or 6 port configuration m The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System PMVS resides in the control unit in a 2 or 4 port configuration m PARTNER Voice Messaging PVM PC Card 2 port configuration only m The PARTNER MAIL System 2 4 or 6 port configuration is an auxiliary device that connects to the system through extension jacks NOTE m he system extension maximum is 48 However in some configurations the 012E module and or the PARTNER Messaging module will physically permit more than 48 stations to be installed in the 5 slot carrier In these configurations only station ports and voice messaging ports up to 48 will function Station ports and voice messaging ports above 48 will not function with ETR or T R telephones because they are outside the PARTNER ACS dial plan m PARTNER Voice Messaging PVM does not support the full dial plan available in Release 7 0 Programming a Voice Messaging System PARTNER Messaging requires programming for both the communications system and PARTNER Messaging Some features must first be programmed on the communications system Then PARTNER Messagi
544. tton H111 oooooococonoocoooo oo 7 4 a Automatic System Answer Delay 110 peda bi 7 6 a Automatic System Answer Lines 1204 o oooooocoocooconnnmooo 7 6 a Automatic System Answer Mode 127 ooooooccocccoconoo no 7 7 a Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 ooooooo o 7 8 Direct Extension Dial ESTOS 2062 ikaw ry eres ara ERROR EOD EE RES 7 10 a Considerations PR TUAM be seis 7 10 a Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 scinerccins ore Peed cow dora 7 10 a Direct Extension Dial Button 4113 RANA ar 7 11 a Direct Extension Dial Delay UI lie dr AEREA AAA 7 13 a Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 7 14 Night Service Button 503 pri dadusrc wg aa waves f PM a ROS OTIS aura CET E434 A EC RC e DP CARE EUR 7 15 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 0 0 0 eee 7 17 Neri I ey AAA 7 17 FEu ru M ERREUR TT TET rm 7 18 a Using the Outgoing Call Restriction ButtON ooocoooocooooooo 7 18 EON EBORE EE AAA 7 19 a Considerations er Tee ee ERA 7 19 a Using Station Unlock on a System Telephone oooccocccooccocoo oo 7 19 a Using Station Unlock on a Single Line Telephone o coooccoccooo o 7 19 Wake Up Service Button 115 aida etree dedi X ED A 62113 240 9 5585 KEL SON NCR d EO ERO ES eee 7 20 a Programming T SAGE nas
545. tup because it changes Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Adding New Pools You can create new pools if your system is operating in Hybrid mode If you add outside lines for use in a new pool you may need to use the following features Dial Mode 201 if the new lines are rotary lines Pool Line Assignment 207 to assign lines to the new pool Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the new pool to specific extensions Line Ringing to specify when the new pool starts ringing at each extension that has the pool Pool Access Restriction 315 to limit an extension s access to all the lines in the new pool Automatic Line Selection to add the new pool to the extension s Automatic Line Selection sequence Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 17 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can probably use Copy Settings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If y
546. type of line is being provided to you Considerations m If you are having difficulty using touch tone telephones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m If the system has rotary lines you can use Touch Tone Enable F08 to send touch tone signals over a rotary line for example to access bank by telephone services m f Dial Mode is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of x If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone m The 1600 DSL module supports only touch tone signaling Programming To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program A Z O 1 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first line to be programmed Press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Touch Tone line the factory setting v m 2 Rotary line 4 To program another line press Next Item or Prev tem until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines t
547. ug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the Intercom Autodialer works the cord is faulty Call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover to arrange for a replacement mf the problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 System Telephone Problems 11 8 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 4 No Auto Dial buttons are programmed on the Autodialer What to do Program Auto Dial buttons See Auto Dialing on page 8 5 m If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m If the Intercom Autodialer does not work call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Record a Call Light is Always Red Steady and You Can t Record a Call Possible Cause 1 You do not have enough ports assigned into Hunt Group 7 What to do You must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PMVS Release 5 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four ports MLC 6 Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Unique Line Ringing 209 has been set to a pattern other than 1 What to do Set the ring pattern to Pattern 1 For MLC 6 telephones always set the ring pattern to 1 Single Line Telephone Problems Single Line Telephone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m If the telephone rings the problem is solved m Ifthe telephone still does not ring go to Possib
548. ule Firmware on page 10 6 for more information A firmware upgrade can be performed on the T1 module N caution Before starting verify that you have batteries installed in the processor module by viewing the display of the telephone at extension 10 1 If you have a 5 slot carrier move the carrier s On Off switch to the Off position O See Figure 10 1 Figure 10 1 On Off Switch on a 5 Slot Carrier On Off Switch a PES SS f N Using a PC Card 10 2 Upgrading the System 2 For all types of installations disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet 3 If you do not have a 5 slot carrier go to Step 4 If you have a 5 slot carrier a Loosen the thumb screw at the bottom of the carrier cover b Rotate the carrier cover to disengage the tabs at the top of the modules from the openings on the top of the carrier N caution Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade 4 To insert the PC Card hold it with the label facing to the right and slide it gently into either PC Card slot on the processor module see Figure 10 2 When inserted properly the PC Card projects about 1 5 8 inch 4 cm from the module Figure 10 2 Inserting the PC Card 5 Power up the system a Reconnect the power cord NcaurioN The power
549. unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on which the call was received When a call you transferred is answered if you began the call on an individual line the red light next to the line button goes on if you began the call on a line in a pool the call no longer appears on your telephone If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups Hunt Group calls do not Transfer Return if the call is not answered and Transfer Return Rings 105 is set to 4 or more rings When you transfer a call from a display telephone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display telephones If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which the call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly by using the Centrex extension number If a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call t
550. unt Code Entry F12 8 4 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Auto Dialing Use this feature to dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button the user can dial signal or transfer calls to the extension by pressing the button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line or pool assigned on a system telephone Considerations You can program an Auto Dial button only on a system telephone If you program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system telephones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system You can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system telephone or on the Autodialer for another extension in the system You can program that button for intercom ringing intercom voice signaling or manual signaling When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension PARTNER 6
551. unt code 1 From a system telephone if a password is programmed for the system enter it before lifting the handset Lift the handset or press px Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code supplied by your System Manager by doing one of the following m Dial the account code manually by using the telephone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press an idle line or pool button m If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 m If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to the outside line Verify the account code with your System Manager then repeat this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call a Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 b Enter a different account code c Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 Z If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear a denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code Acco
552. until the line number appears on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Use this feature to identify extensions that can receive Voice Interrupt On Busy calls A Voice Interrupt On Busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call When Voice Interrupt On Busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably can hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call NOTE Voice Interrupt On Busy is available only on system telephones Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 4 68 Programming System Options Considerations The Voice Interrupt On Busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep If a Voice Interrupt On Busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead If you receive a Voice Interrupt On Busy call and press Hold the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the Voice Interrupt On Busy call Do one of the fol
553. ur system you may need to adjust some line settings m Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line m Line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 16 Upgrading the System Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the line starts ringing at each extension that has the line Line Access Restriction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line The system automatically assigns the new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection NOTE Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To add a new line without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Pooled Extensions You can add new lines to existing pools if your system is configured for Hybrid mode To assign a new line to a pooled extension as an individual line use the features in Key Extensions above If you add an outside line to your system for use in an existing pool use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line and Pool Line Assignment 207 to add the line to an existing pool NOTE Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial se
554. uration Menu 4 Select the appropriate Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer DSLAM from the Quick Configuration menu The 1600 DSL module automatically resets After five minutes if the LED above the SDSL port on the 1600 DSL module is a steady green go to Step 8 If after five minutes the LED is flashing or not on at all proceed with Step 5 5 Select 2 Configure Physical Interface from the WAN Configuration Menu The 1600 DSL Module 2 26 Installation 6 From the SDSL Configuration menu select the speed of the connection as directed by your service provider You will most likely do one of the following Select one of the following for negotiated speed 3 Set SDSL Speed to Auto Cycle Nokia 4 Set SDSL Speed to Auto Sense Copper Mountain 5 Enable Conexant AutoBaud Mode 6 Set SDSL Sync Delay Lucent Select 7 Set SDSL Speed Manually to manually set the speed At the prompt enter the speed in kbps for the connection and press Enter 7 Press Esc until you return to the WAN Configuration Menu 8 Select 1 Configure Datalink Protocol 9 Select one of the following from the WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu according to the equipment of your service provider and press Esc 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay 10 If you selected 6 ATM in Step 9 follow these steps a b C j Select 3 Configure PVCs from the WAN Configuration Menu Select 4 Show Curre
555. ure Adjunct lc LE M UE E 9 10 Crd ENCUENTRO EET 9 14 heir Mag iyi A 9 15 Fax Machines rin REUS REDE EE A NT A TEE 9 17 Loudspeaker Paging System ee UE VE tieso ener Peet er er x 9 26 Modems RUIN RE id 9 29 Music On Hold PE I M m 9 32 Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment eese 9 94 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR pu UM E AO voice Messaging BUSIBITIS aria BA 10 Upgrading the System Overview A M i uu cpu S EU AE 10 1 Battery Replacement ids LER Ue m RR X c 10 2 Upgrading T1 Module FINRTIWEE ina a a 10 5 Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Module Firmware 10 6 Adding New Modules T T Master TOC v PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use See ecce cc D Ra c EE E E cg Replacing M GUISS 10 10 Changing Settings and Adding Lines Pools and Extensions 10 16 11 Troubleshooting A A rere 11 1 Customer Self Service Center 1 juo TTE ererr 11 1 When You NESARA 11 2 xu dz ike ro eiee aa 11 2 Eatery Hop EDT siii nen ria 11 3 Cl
556. using a specific pool 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 Dial the telephone number Making an Intercom Call An intercom call or inside call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice NOTE You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension To make an intercom call on a telephone 1 Do one of the following m For a system telephone a Liftthe handset or press before dialing b Press an idle button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the green light next to the button is on steady m For asingle line telephone lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Doone ofthe following m To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number m To voice signal a system telephone at the extension press X plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system telephone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply Handling Calls 6 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use f you hear two
557. ust be programmed on a button with lights on a system display telephone This feature is not supported on a button without lights m Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log All Calls is set to active Programming To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature C 0 System Program System Program amp 3 1 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Programming 4 14 Programming System Options Caller ID Type 122 Set this feature for Singapore or USA operation In the USA Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming replacing the system date and time display on system telephones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information In Singapore Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming When there is no incoming number the system detects a P or an O in the reason for DN Directory Number absence field and substitutes the information sent by the local telephone company central office in the Name parameter field m If the name is supplied the system displays
558. ust be programmed on a button with lights on the system display telephone at extension 10 This feature is not supported on a button without lights m Do not use Direct Extension Dial in places where Hold Disconnect Time 203 is not recognized because if a caller hangs up after Direct Extension Dial answers the line appears to be busy m The Direct Extension Dial Button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used m Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Direct Extension Dial Features 7 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m f Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the Music on Hold 602 or Ring on Transfer 119 setting m By default unanswered calls return to extension 10 You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different Transfer Return Extension for extension 10 In this case all unanswered Direct Extension Dial calls return to the specified extension as do unanswered calls manually transferred by extension 10 m f Do Not Disturb F01 is active at a directly dialed extension the call returns to extension 10 or its transfer return extension unless Call Forwarding F11 Call Coverage Rings or VMS Cover Rings is used or on Programming To assign or unassign a Direct Ext
559. utton is not programmed at an extension or the line or pool button is busy the call rings at one of the extension s Intercom buttons m Outgoing calls can be made on T1 lines administered for Direct Inward Dialing DID m Automatic System Answer features are disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID m Direct Extension Dialing features are disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID m Caller ID information is unavailable on T1 lines The message Direct In Dial or DID is displayed for incoming calls on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID m You should not assign T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID to Hunt Groups If a Hunt Group contains T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID callers will receive busy signal when all extensions in the Hunt Group are busy for example off hook have Do Not Disturb activated or are in programming mode m Group Call Distribution 206 is disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID DID calls are routed to hunt groups and calling groups via the DID Mapping Table See the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration online help for more information Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 27 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Hands Free Answer On Intercom HFAI is disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID Line Coverage Extension 208 is disabled on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID DID calls will
560. utton on which an outside call rings flashes green continuously even while the system answers the call and plays the Automatic System Answer greeting To answer the call lift the handset If the message was playing it stops automatically Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 Automatic System Answer Features 7 7 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Programming To change the Automatic System Answer Mode 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 2 C1 To change the mode press until the appropriate value appears m 1 Hold the factory setting v m 2 Disconnect m 3 Ring Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Use this feature to record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by Automatic System Answer The maximum length of the message is 20 seconds Considerations If you do not record a message for Automatic System Answer calls are placed on hold continue to ring or are disconnected immediately after the system answers depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 You must record the Automatic System Answer message from the system display telephone at extension 10 or 11 You cannot record or pl
561. vailable on tip ring telephones You must enable the Record a Call feature for the mailbox which is programmed through the messaging system and also program a button on the telephone for that extension using Record a Call F24 For more information about PARTNER Messaging programming refer to the PARTNER Messaging System Manager s Quick Reference For more information about PMVS programming refer to the PARTNER MAIL VS Installation and Programming Guide N WARNING If silence is detected on the line for 15 seconds call recording will terminate For PARTNER Messaging or PMVS before you can set up Record a Call for an extension you must m Install PARTNER Messaging or PMVS m Go into PARTNER Messaging or PMVS programming and program Record a Call for that extension To install PARTNER Messaging refer to the PARTNER Messaging Installation Programming and Troubleshooting Online Guide To install PMVS refer to the PARTNER MAIL VS Installation and Programming Guide Considerations m A Record a Call button with LEDs must be programmed on a telephone m Amaximum of two conversations can be recorded at one time When two conversations are being recorded the red LED associated with this feature becomes red steady m If you attempt to record a call while two others are being recorded and push the red steady Record a Call button the system ignores it m To use this feature you must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PAR
562. ve the password created by the System Administrator This feature prevents unauthorized use of the remote administration capability Considerations m This feature can be used only from a system telephone m The password can be changed only locally at Extension 10 or 11 It cannot be changed at the PC m You must enter a password before you can use remote administration m Only one administration tool can be active at a time If remote administration is active local administration is blocked If local administration is active and you start a remote session the local session drops Programming To program a password 1 At extension 10 or 11 press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 7 3 0 The Remote Password prompt appears REMOTE PASSWORD DATA Dashes appear if there is no current password If there is a password it appears in place of the dashes Enter or change the password by entering the two digit character codes found in Table 5 1 on page 5 4 The password can contain up to eight alphanumeric characters To save the password press Enter The bottom line of the display shows the password as it has been entered To remove an existing password repeat steps 1 and 2 and press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Remote Administration Password 730 4 56 Programming System Options Remote Call Forwarding 322 Use this featur
563. vice m set and view the All Lines Busy Event For instructions on how to install and use PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration see the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration Getting Started NOTE If your PARTNER system has a T1 module you must use the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program and administer the T1 module You cannot program a T1 module via Set administration If you havea T1 module go to Configuring the T1 Module on page 3 9 for instructions on how to start configuring your PARTNER system Set Administration Set Administration enables you to program and administer the features for a PARTNER system from a system display telephone at extension 10 or extension 11 However you cannot program the settings for T1 lines via Set Administration The remainder of this guide describes how to program and administer a PARTNER system via Set Administration Programming a PARTNER System 3 2 Initial System Programming System Programming Basics After the control unit is installed you set up the system by using a combination of the following two types of programming Use the System Planning Guide when programming m System Programming allows you to customize the system to meet the needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change system settings as needed You can perform System Programming from extension 10 or extension
564. wed phone numbers 4 20 forced account codes 4 34 locking your extension 8 68 logging Caller ID calls see Caller ID Logging and Dialing Logging Center ID Calls see Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 loss of power 11 2 Loudspeaker Paging 8 49 using single line telephone 8 50 system telephone 8 50 Loudspeaker Paging Line 3 12 9 28 loudspeaker paging system identifying the line jack 9 28 installation 2 33 paging system 2 33 9 26 M making a call 6 16 Manual Backup problems 11 23 Manual Signaling 8 46 using 8 47 Manual Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines 9 18 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers 4 63 message light turning on and off 8 48 Index Message Light Off 8 48 using single line telephone 8 49 system telephone 8 49 Message Light On 8 48 Message Waiting see Standard Phones messages leaving A 6 monitoring A 9 receiving A 6 Microphone 6 7 microphone 6 8 Microphone Mic Button 6 7 mixed telephone types D 1 Mode of Operation 4 50 mode of operation changing 4 50 modems 9 29 send and receive 9 30 sending only 9 29 Modes of operation 1 3 Modules description 1 9 PARTNER ACS processor 1 7 1 9 processor 1 9 modules adding new modules 10 7 LEDs 2 15 replacing 10 10 5 slot carrier configuration 10 13 stand alone or 2 slot carrier configuration 10 10 Monitoring Call Activity 7 2 8 5 Music On Hold 9 32 9 33 connecting audio source 9 32 Music On Hold 602 as bac
565. wer calls after the greeting plays There are three available modes Hold places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available Ring continues to ring and the green light next to the line button continues to flash at all extensions that have access to the line The outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is available Disconnect ends the call immediately after the Automatic System Answer greeting plays Considerations If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold calls are placed on hold at extension 10 however any extension with access to the line on which the call is held can retrieve the call If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold and a call is placed on hold for longer than the interval specified by Hold Reminder Tone 127 the system generates a short Hold Reminder Tone at extension 10 This tone sounds at the interval specified by Hold Reminder Tone 127 until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold or Disconnect you can intercept a call while the message is playing the light for the call is steady red To intercept the call press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Ring the line b
566. wing steps m f you have a 2 slot carrier or a stand alone configuration you are finished with this procedure m If you have a 5 slot carrier continue with Step 9 Make sure all modules are seated properly Position the carrier cover over the modules so that the openings on the top of the carrier cover align correctly with the tabs at the top of the installed 5 slot carrier and modules Rotate the carrier cover into position so that it aligns correctly with the thumb screw opening on the bottom of the carrier Tighten the thumb screw To ensure proper alignment and safe operation tighten the thumb screw securely Using a PC Card 10 4 Upgrading the System Upgrading T1 Module Firmware PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 provides a firmware upgrade capability for the T1 module which is equipped with programmable flash memory The firmware to upgrade this module resides on a PC Card This PC Card contains the T1 module firmware upgrade software only It does not contain the system software The steps to perform a firmware upgrade are the same as those to upgrade the system software See Using a PC Card on page 10 2 Once a successful firmware upgrade as been completed all power LEDs are steady green Upgrading T1 Module Firmware 10 5 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Upgrading 1600 DSL and 012E Module Firmware PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 provides a firmware upgrade capability for the 1600
567. worker s extension Manual Signaling is typically used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another call You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep ring or voice signal the user at the target extension Considerations m A PARTNER or MLS telephone is required at both extensions to use this feature m You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target extension number on a button Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to an Auto Dial button m You can have only one button per extension either on the system telephone or on the Intercom Autodialer for a target extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button The lights next to the button show calling activity m If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutters to identify your extension as the signaling extension m You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch transfer Hotline 8 46 Programming amp Using Telephone Features m Pressing a Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press Spkr press intercom and then press the Manual Signaling button m To respond to a signal the target extension must place an intercom call to the perso
568. x A Both ANSI T1 617 Annex D Network ANSI T1 617 Annex D User ANSI T1 617 Annex D Both LMI Network FRF 1 1 LMI User FRF 1 1 9 LMI Both FRF 1 1 0 N O Ci A CQ Iv 14 Press Esc to return to the Main Menu The 1600 DSL Module 2 28 Installation Voice Gateway Configuration Follow these steps to configure the voice gateway path 1 10 11 Select P VoicePath Configure from the Main Menu Select V Set Voice Gateway from the Voice Configuration menu Select one of the following voice gateways according to your service provider from the Voice Gateway Selection menu m 1 CopperCom m 2 MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 PathStar m 3 Jetstream NOTE If you selected Jetstream or CopperCom you are done with the voice gateway configuration If you selected MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 PathStar continue with the procedure Select M Manage MGCP NCS Embedded Client from the Main Menu Select C Configure MGCP NCS parameters from the MGCP NCS Management Menu Type the default IP address for the Notified Entity Get this address from your service provider this is the IP address for the gateway the PathStar Type the IP address to use for MGCP signaling data signaling This is the IP address of the voice PVC DLCI on the SDSL port get it from your service provider Enter the TOS byte value for Signalling packets at the prompt get this from your service provider Type the IP address to use f
569. y by using the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature can be redialed with Last Number Redial m Last Number Redial interrupts Call Screening F25 Programming To program a Last Number Redial button Em om Press Feature 0 0 Press a programmable button Press 0 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Last Number Redial on a System Telephone To use Last Number Redial 1 2 Lift the handset Press the programmed button or Feature OQ 2 Digits are displayed on system display telephones as they are dialed Using Last Number Redial on a Single Line Telephone To use Last Number Redial 1 2 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press BOO Redialing Features 8 58 Programming amp Using Telephone Features Save Number Redial F04 Use this feature to save into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from an extension with a system telephone Use this feature to save a number before you hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved NOTE Save Number Redial is available only on system telephones Considerations m Save Number Redial redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes m You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system telephone to a
570. y power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn Or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display telephones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should be instructed to notify you when they see this message You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the message NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshold N caution Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming revert to the factory settings Also the settings retained in the 1600 DSL module s flash memory become the active settings when the power is turned off and back on If you have a Backup Restore PC Card do a backup before changing the batteries NOTE The PARTNER ACS Release 7 0 supports the PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows you to program the system remotely or locally from a PC and perform backup and restore functions You must have the PARTNER ACS R7 0 PC Administration software to program the system from a PC Change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries See Inserting Batteries in the Processor Module on page 2 11 Battery Replacement 11 3 PARTNER Advanced Communications System
571. you want the machines to cover 2 SetLine Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extensions X and Y to Immediate Ring 3 Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 4 Adjust the answering machine s to answer according to your needs For example set the machine s to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the call Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine answers calls that ring at a certain extension Figure 9 4 It is useful for the following situations m When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine m When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls m When outside calls come through an operator and are transferred to the extension m When an extension has a private line Answering Machines 9 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment Figure 9 4 Personal Answering Machine PARTNER ACS Retrieving Messages To retrieve messages from a personal answering machine do one of the following m Goto the machine to manually retrieve messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code m From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension or call in when no one will answ
572. you access to multiple lines from a single button Each auxiliary pool is associated with only one pool button Since the main pool typically contains most of your company s outside lines it is associated with two pool buttons This setup allows you to place a call by using one of the main pool buttons place that call on hold and make another call by using the second main pool button Or you can establish a conference call by using lines in the main pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool can be assigned to an extension for a maximum of five pool buttons per extension System telephone users can press any of the available pool buttons on their telephones or they can enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to make an outside call Single line telephone users must dial 9 or enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to access a pool since their telephones do not have pool buttons After you press a pool button or enter a pool access code the system selects a free line from the pool for you to make the call You can access a pool as long as there is at least one available line in the pool Hybrid mode allows users who have system telephones with fewer buttons to have access to multiple outside lines and various types of pools You can make efficient use of outside lines by grouping those of a similar type or function together For example you can create an auxiliary pool of WATS or international lines and assign the pools to differe
573. you are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on your telephone You cannot access conference calls by using this feature You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system telephone to pick up a line by pressing the button and then dialing the two digit line number Direct Line Pickup Features 8 33 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use m Ifa lineis idle you cannot access it with this feature you hear busy tone For information about accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL on page 8 35 m f Line Access Restriction or pool Access Restriction is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line when the line is ringing at another extension The user can join a call or access a held or transferred call on the line m You cannot use Direct Line Pickup to access an active call at an extension that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or to access a held call at an extension that used Exclusive Hold m Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information unless Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction is used to prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls Programming To program a Direct
574. you can hear the called party answer the problem is solved m If the problem is not solved call the helpline number listed on the front inside cover Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted Possible Cause The Star Code Dial Delay setting is not inserting a long enough pause allowing part of the telephone number to be dialed before the second dial tone from the central office is established What to do Use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase the Star Code Dial Delay setting Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m fthe Recall feature works the problem is solved If the Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Other Telephone Problems 11 15 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Recall feature works properly the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still disconnects calls continue de
575. you can toggle between Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines m You can view the Caller ID name and number on a two line display telephone while a call is ringing on systems m A user at a covering extension who has a system display telephone and who is busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent m Caller ID information is unavailable on T1 lines Programming To program a Caller ID Inspect button 1 2 3 4 Press O Q Press a programmable button with lights Press MO Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using Caller ID Inspect To use Caller ID Inspect t While active on a call press the programmed button The green light flutters Caller ID Inspect is activated Press a line pool or button The Caller ID or Call Coverage information for the selected line pool or intercom is displayed Caller ID Features 8 19 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use 3 Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or press any button other than a line pool or button The green light is off when the feature is deactivated Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Once the system administrator assigns the Caller ID Call Log Line Association Caller ID Log Answered Calls a
576. you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Direct Line Pickup Active Line Call Pickup or Group Pickup For incoming calls Caller ID information appears only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do not receive Caller ID information However Caller ID information is displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected Caller ID Programming 4 11 PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation Programming and Use Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Use this feature to program extensions to log answered Caller ID calls so that calls answered at an individual extension can be viewed in the Caller ID Call Log Once the feature is activated for an extension when a user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered NOTE Caller ID Log Answered Calls is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display telephones It is not available for MLS MLC Transtalk 9000 Series or tip ring telephones Caller ID Log Answered Calls helps to track callers telephone numbers For example a sales repre

PARTNER Advanced Communications System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents